Putin Declares Victory Over New World Order: ‘Change Of Elites’ Coming Because Humanity Has ‘Woken Up’ + Facts And Opinions Suppressed By The Corrupt Mainstream Media & New Zealand: A Surveillance Society June 27 2022 | From: NewsPunch / PrincipiaScientific / NZCPR / A / Various
Global elites who have been running the world in recent decades, working in concert to usher in a New World Order, have been defeated according to Russian President Vladimir Putin.
Putin used his speech at the St. Petersburg International Economic Forum (SPIEF) on Friday to warn that a “change of elites” in the West is just around the corner.
Disastrous liberal policies undertaken by EU and US leaders are exacerbating inequalities and divisions in their societies, not just in terms of welfare but in terms of values and orientations of various groups, Putin said.
"Such a detachment from reality, from the demands of society, will inevitably lead to a surge of populism and the growth of radical movements, to serious social and economic changes, to degradation and, in the near future, to a change of elites,”the Russian leader said.
Putin Declares Victory Over New World Order: 'Humanity Has Woken Up'
Global elites who have been running the world in recent decades, working in concert to usher in a New World Order, have been defeated according to Russian President Vladimir Putin, who used his speech at the St. Petersburg International Economic Forum (SPIEF) recently to warn that a “change of elites” in the West is just around the corner.
The global elite have been exposed and are set to face the wrath of the people in the kind of reckoning not seen since the days of the guillotine in the streets of 17th century Paris. Putin says that elite blue blood is set to run in the streets all over again.
According to Putin, another revolution is just around the corner. Humanity has woken up to the elites and revenge, when it comes, will be swift and appropriate.
When the West, led by the New World Order, declared victory in the Cold War, Americans designated themselves the “messengers of God on earth,” with interests that should be considered sacred and no obligations, Putin told the audience at SPIEF.
New centers of power have since emerged, and have the right to protect their own systems, economic models and sovereignty. These:
"Truly revolutionary, tectonic changes in geopolitics, the global economy, in the technological sphere, in the entire system of international relations,” are “fundamental, pivotal and inexorable,” Putin said at the SPIEF.
“And It is a mistake to suggest that one can wait out the times of turbulent change and that things will return to normal; that everything will be as it was. It will not.”
The New World Order is gone with the wind, in other words. New centers of power have emerged, the unipolar world order isn’t coming back, and the “colonial” way of thinking has failed.
The people of the world have spoken and they have rejected the New World Order’s plans to turn them into cattle or “useless eaters”.
How did this great change happen? It’s quite simple, according to Putin. In all their hubris and arrogance, the West, led by the New World Order, miscalculated its response to the conflict in Ukraine.
When the US and its allies launched the campaign to “cancel” Russia over its activities in Ukraine, they hoped to crash and undermine the Russian economy and society.
The sanctions have instead boomeranged on their creators, aggravating social and economic problems, driving up the cost of food, electricity and fuel, and hurting the quality of life across the West, but especially in Europe and the US.
"The European Union has completely lost its political sovereignty, and its bureaucratic elites are dancing to someone else’s tune, accepting whatever they are told from above, causing harm to their own population and their own economy,” Putin said.
EU citizens will pay the price for “decisions divorced from reality and taken contrary to common sense,” he added, as direct losses from the sanctions alone could exceed $400 billion in a year.
Blaming the high energy prices and inflation in the West on Russia - “Putin’s price hike,” as the White House put it – is a “stupidity” and “designed for people who can’t read or write,” the Russian president said.
“Don’t blame us, blame yourselves,” Putin said.
Putin further argued that if there are food shortages around the world, the finger of blame will be squarely pointing at Western leaders.
The EU “blindly believing in renewable sources” and abandoning long-term natural gas contracts with Russia led to the spike in energy prices last year, according to the Russian leader.
Meanwhile, both the US and the EU addressed the Covid-19 pandemic by printing trillions of dollars and euros.
US and EU sanctions against Russia – in particular fertilizer and grain exports – are one of the reasons for growing global food insecurity, Putin pointed out.
If there is famine in the world’s poorest countries, “this will be entirely on the conscience of the US administration and the European bureaucracy.”
Troubles with food supply have arisen over the past several years – not months – due to the “short-sighted actions of those who are accustomed to solving their problems at someone else’s expense,” distorting the trade flows by printing money in a sort of “predatory colonial policy,” Putin said.
Russia is ready to send food to Africa and the Middle East, where the threat of famine is most acute, but faces “logistical, financial, transport” obstacles imposed by the West, he said.
Replay: Putin Dismisses 'Stupid' Western Sanctions 'Blitzkrieg'
Russian President Vladimir Putin accused the West on Friday of colonial arrogance and trying to crush his country with "stupid" sanctions that amounted to an economic "blitzkrieg."
Facts And Opinions Suppressed By The Corrupt Mainstream Media
This is a follow-up to my previous emails here, here and here to inform you of recent developments, facts and opinions which are not reported by the corrupt, paid-for mainstream media (MSM) concerning the government’s undemocratic abuse of the general public.
Please do not casually dismiss this necessarily longish work of careful research.
World Economic Forum (WEF)
The unaccountable WEF has had a major influence on the Covid “plandemic” (ref. Reiner Fuellmich, qv), openly proclaimed in their book Covid‑19: The Great Reset.
This relatively small band of billionaires, corporate heads and camp followers held their annual meeting in Davos in late May, putting their abhorrent hypocrisy, arrogance, malevolence and lack of self-awareness on public display, as shown in the clips below.
They are quite open about their anti-democratic, anti-human plans for world domination.
Their evil machinations of the last two years, disgracefully enabled by treasonous politicians, public officials, the corrupt MSM and others, have caused global chaos leaving the ordinary people of the world poorer, hungrier, colder, travel-restricted, unhealthier or even prematurely dead.
The Three Waters proposal driven by Local Government Minister Nanaia Mahuta is a totally unnecessary, very divisive battle with local government and the people of New Zealand.
Their outrageous Great Reset plan for ordinary people is that “by 2030 you’ll own nothing and you’ll be happy”, confined, muzzled, monitored and coerced in an undemocratic dystopian technocracy. This is unacceptable and it must be resisted.
Here is WEF boss Klaus Schwab talking about the Great Reset which he says we need because … actually for no credible reason at all, certainly none that we, the people, have mandated.
Here is Schwab boasting about how the WEF has infiltrated governments all around the world, parodied by rogue gallery cartoons here and here (almost every Western leader) and mocked by this compilation of all the usual WEF muppets parroting the meaningless WEF mantra “Build Back Better”.
Here is Pfizer boss Albert Bourla laughing off the abysmal failings of his Covid vaccine saying “everything (chuckles) went OK, now we can move on“, callously dismissing all the vaccine injuries and deaths.
Pfizer CEO: By 2023 We Will Reduce the World Population by 50%
Here is Bourla talking about a pill with a microchip which sends a signal when swallowed, gleefully anticipating how useful it will be to enforce “compliance”.
Here is a video sponsored by WEF puppet Christine Lagarde suggesting that the elderly who “have had a good life” should consider euthanising themselves “for the children“.
Here is the despotic former New Zealand prime minister Helen Clark fretting that “popular support for Covid is waning, the people are done with Covid, the problem is it’s not done with us. We are in danger of losing this moment for transformative change”.
Here is Australia’s tyrannical eSafety Commissioner saying “we need a re-calibration of human rights, like freedom of speech“.
Here is US climate buffoon John Kerry who flew into Davos in his private jet lecturing everyone with unfounded assertions (i.e. lies) about his fictional “climate crisis”.
Here is the Alibaba president talking about a carbon footprint tracker to monitor what you buy, what you eat, and where and how you travel.
Finally, here is a clip showing how the WEF and the UN have signed an agreement to “accelerate” Agenda 2030, an agenda which has never been mandated by us, the people.
Independent reporter Sophie Corcoran shows up the hypocrisy of these people here and here. She quite rightly describes the WEF and WHO as a gross attack on democracy and says that Boris Johnson is betraying the British people by getting involved with these unelected, unaccountable bodies. Her full interview segment is available here starting 44:00.
All the G7 leaders stayed away from this WEF meeting, probably because they know that the WEF is toxic to 98% of the general public.
Just staying away from the annual meeting is not enough. Instead of covertly acting as enablers to the WEF as they have done on Covid, climate change and Ukraine, Boris Johnson and all our politicians need to publicly denounce this rapacious, evil, anti-human, recklessly transhumanist organisation and sever all links to it.
It should be outlawed and indicted for conspiracy to commit crimes against humanity.
Boris Johnson protests that the country needs to move on from Partygate but he must not be allowed to get away with his blatant lies and heinous crimes.
The obvious main point about Partygate which the corrupt MSM suppresses is that it showed that Johnson and his co-conspirators knew that the virus was of negligible danger to them, yet they have used it as a pretext to tyrannise the general public for the past two years.
Their entire Covid narrative is very obviously a pack of lies. Peddling it so brazenly and taking us all for fools shows how little respect they have for the general public.
Sad to say, they are getting away with it. The following is the timeline of just a few of their easily seen through, globally-coordinated chicaneries. (An American neurosurgeon elaborates here.)
As explained in this recent interview (from 25:50), in early 2020 the International Committee on Taxonomy of Viruses (ICTV) insisted that the virus which was starting to circulate was not a novel virus but an individuum of the original 2003 SARS virus.
Political pressure was brought to bear, the ICTV was forced to back down and the virus was named as SARS‑CoV‑2 as if it were a novel virus.
This lie allowed them to promulgate the second lie that the entire population was equally susceptible and immune naïve.
This in turn allowed complicit modeller Professor Neil Ferguson to concoct his fearmongering predictions of horrendous numbers of Covid cases and deaths.
Just before the first lockdown in March 2020, they quietly downgraded Covid‑19 to the status of not being a High Consequence Infectious Disease (HCID). Why on earth would they do that when the virus was supposedly a deadly threat?
They did it because, unlike a non-HCID, an HCID carries a legal obligation to provide antiviral prophylaxis treatments using drugs such as hydroxychloroquine and ivermectin, drugs which they had pre-emptively banned precisely and shockingly because they knew they were safe and effective for treating Covid‑19.
This trickery allowed the experimental vaccines to be “legally” granted emergency use authorisation, based on the fiction that vaccination of the entire population was the only way to deal with the virus.
Their next move was to throw out our long-establish respiratory disease pandemic guidelines in favour of the untried and draconian option of locking down the entire country (apart from essential workers) for two years on and off with callous disregard for all the resulting collateral damage, all on the back of the relatively mild WuFlu virus.
Under cover of lockdown they boosted the Covid‑19 “first wave” death count by euthanising helpless old people with lethal doses of midazolam and morphine or other inappropriate treatments.
The average age of 2020 Covid‑attributed deaths was 82.4, higher than average UK life expectancy.
Despite the UK “pandemic” being statistically all over by mid-June 2020 they kept up the fearmongering until the vaccines became available in December 2020.
Whether by accident or design, the rollout caused a huge spike of sudden deaths among the mainly frail and elderly first recipients which they shamelessly mis-attributed to be their fear-mongered but never-manifested Covid‑19 “second wave”.
These and subsequent vaccine-induced deaths are being covered up by stonewalling denial and globally-coordinated refusals to perform autopsies.
As this typical analysis shows, pre-vaccine all-cause mortality in 2020, the year of the supposedly deadly pandemic, was not nearly as bad as post-vaccine 2021 and onwards, yet our lying politicians and MSM feign that the vaccines have been a great success.
I’ve said most of this before in previous emails, e.g. here, but maybe if I repeat it often enough, people will eventually accept the horrendous reality of what has really been going on.
Mark Steyn on GB News (8pm, Mon-Thur) continues his campaign against the scandalous establishment stonewalling on Covid vaccine injuries and deaths, tag-lined “The Big Shut Up”.
In this segment he reveals that the government ordered 650 million Covid vaccines, enough for a ridiculous 10 jabs per head of population. Demand has levelled off after about 140 million jabs, an average of about 2 jabs per head.
He reports how Sir Christopher Chope MP has been “slapped down” for spreading alleged misinformation on the Covid vaccines.
All Sir Christopher did was to give a very cautious estimate that possibly 10,000 people in the UK have been killed or seriously injured by the vaccines, based on the UK Yellow Card system which is now running at over 2,100 deaths and almost 500,000 people having suffered one or more adverse effects.
These numbers are reckoned to be under-reported at least 10‑fold and perhaps even 40‑fold.
The slap down came from “the nation’s numbers watchdog” who claims without giving any evidence that there have been only 27 vaccine deaths to March 2022. “Total crap” says Mark.
He invited this person to come on his show to explain the numbers gap but she declined, just as health secretary Sajid Javid had been declining for weeks. The 9‑minute segment is worth watching in full.
For having the temerity to debate this issue openly, Mark is currently under review by government propaganda enforcer Ofcom and is becoming increasingly irate in his condemnation of the “omerta code” driving The Big Shut Up.
In this segment (from 6:00) he explodes “I’m sick of Full Fact, I’m sick of Ofcom, I’m sick of the groupthink media … [because] the propaganda is untrue”.
It probably pained the propagandists at the ONS to be forced to release the information that almost 180,000 people in England died within 60 days of taking a Covid vaccine between January 2021 and March 2022.
That number is almost 100,000 more than the 60-day average of the pre-Covid 2019 registered deaths in England (496,370/6=82,728).
This suggests that cautious Sir Christopher Chope has hugely underestimated the scale of UK Covid vaccine serious injuries and deaths (coupled with NHS lockdown failings).
On his “Dead Man Talking” Substack, my data analyst colleague Joel Smalley has been posting analyses of public all-cause mortality data to illustrate the adverse effects of the Covid vaccines.
Anyone still in denial on Covid vaccine injuries and deaths should watch this moving documentary telling the sad tale of ordinary people who took the vaccines for what they believed was the public greater good.
Some of them died as a result and others suffered debilitating injuries but they all are now being cruelly neglected by the politicians who manipulated them into their dire situation.
The West’s suicidal obsession with Net Zero has led to a pending domestic energy price cap of a horrendous £2800 (up from £1137 in 2019), looming power cuts, coercion to install pointless, expensive, ineffective heat pumps and to buy pointless, expensive, user-unfriendly electric vehicles.
It is patently obvious (to me at least) that “climate change” has always been a scam just as it is now obvious that Covid has been a scam.
Both scams are Malthusian in intent, aimed at reducing global economic activity and the human population.
Climate analyst Ben Pile knows this and in this recent article he describes how UN climate change envoy Mark Carney and fellow WEF schemers such as the Governor of the Bank of England have set Big Money on a path to cripple the fossil fuel industry financially, despite the obvious fact that fossil fuels are essential to our wellbeing.
Without a radical change of path there is no hope of any quick return to normality.
His accompanying video shows that they knew their policies would lead to disastrous energy price rises and inflation with tragic consequences across the global economy, yet it is all based on lies.
A Norwegian WEF muppet admitted at Davos that the fossil fuel industry squeeze is very damaging but absurdly claimed that “the pain will be worth it”.
In arguing the moral case for fossil fuels, Alex Epstein explains why Net Zero will be a disaster for humanity.
A professor of forecasting and innovation describes absurd, undemocratic Net Zero as a “Stalinist conspiracy”.
In a recent GWPF paper, Andrew Montford points out that the climate change scam is entirely dependent on the same sort of unvalidated, untrustworthy, provenly-wrong computer model predictions as were used by Neil Ferguson and SAGE to oppress us during the Covid scam.
The immediate outlook is grim. We are in uncharted waters of political corruption where almost all western governments are literally waging undeclared civil war against their own people at the behest of their WEF / UN / Big Money / Big Tech overlords, robbing us of our hard-won basic human rights and trying to impoverish us and even kill us.
The Fuellmich trial evidence shows that they launched their desperate “plandemic” because of a looming banking system collapse due to the unsustainable debt load (e.g. $30 trillion in the US) built up by their abuse of our fiat currencies.
They are trying to engineer a controlled demolition of our political and financial civilisation to be replaced by a totalitarian New World Order in which they retain their power and wealth.
We need to find a way out of this unprecedented dystopia or a future of technocratic serfdom awaits us. The first imperative is to open the eyes of the sadly traumatised and brainwashed general public.
Because of corrupt MSM censorship, most people probably don’t even know that the undemocratic WHO recently attempted a power grab of the sovereign rights of almost 200 countries around the world, described here, supported by almost all western politicians despite public protests.
The good news is that the power grab was thrown out thanks mainly to Africa, Brazil and other developing countries, as described here and here.
This was a decisive defeat, hopefully presaging the demise of the establishment’s hoped-for “one world government”.
A “Better Way” conference took place in Bath in late May, promoted here. Few will have heard of it as it was ignored by the corrupt MSM because it spoke out against the official Covid narrative on the theme of how to fight the establishment’s unscientific and tyrannical Covid policies.
Unfortunately the proceedings are paywalled so we will have to wait and see what comes of it.
His latest is an interview of Steve Kirsch who estimates that the Covid vaccines have killed 500,000 people in the USA while saving just 25,000 lives. Well worth watching in full. Dr Fuellmich’s promotional tour of the USA is due to start soon.
In a recent inspirational monologue, that unlikely hero of free speech and democracy Neil Oliver accuses the government of having broken its social contract with the people because it is no longer protecting us, it is oppressing us.
The good news is that he sees signs that more and more people are seeing through the lies and manipulations they have been being subjected to. The full 9‑minutes is well worth watching.
Amongst the gloom, here is an optimist who doesn’t worry about the WEF achieving their stated goals for 2030 because he believes they are certain to fail. Maybe, but they could still do a lot more damage in trying.
Finally, a short clip of well-deserved abuse being heaped on the fascist Italian health minister.
Also, the CEO of a large Spanish pharma company is facing criminal charges because he faked his vaccine passport to avoid taking the vaccine, which speaks volumes about his well-informed lack of trust in the safety of the Covid vaccines.
In a world of propaganda, the truth is always a conspiracy.
Free speech used to be something we all took for granted – being able to say exactly what we thought, sharing politically incorrect jokes, watching outrageously funny and highly popular TV programmes like the Two Ronnies, Monty Python’s Flying Circus, ‘Allo ‘Allo.
Nor was it all British humour that captivated the nation – Billy T James was a Kiwi hero, as was Barry Crump.
All that is now gone – not because we have lost our sense of humour, but because someone somewhere said they were offended.
We now live in an increasingly dystopian world, where saying the wrong thing can get you ‘cancelled’ – fired, socially ostracised, even jailed.
Worse, under Jacinda Ardern’s regime, New Zealand is morphing into an Orwellian society, where things no longer mean what they say – ‘lies’ are being called the “truth”, and the real ‘truth’ is being re-classified as “misinformation” or “disinformation”.
This was on display during the Prime Minister’s recent address to Harvard University – as journalist Graham Adams explains, in an article in The Australian:
"The 8000 graduating students at Harvard who listened to the Commencement address delivered by New Zealand’s Prime Minister probably found her defense of democracy inspiring.
But few of those hearing her warning that ‘Democracy can be fragile’ would have any idea of her stealthy and persistent attempts to strangle it in her homeland."
“While she was more than happy to pose before a receptive audience in Boston as a staunch defender of democratic ideas, she is far more equivocal about the topic at home."
"Perhaps that should not be surprising as she bends to the will of her powerful Maori caucus to insert ‘co-governance’ with unelected iwi members into a broad swathe of New Zealand life - from health and education to the conservation estate and planning law".
“The concept of ‘co-governance’ – based on a radical interpretation of the Treaty of Waitangi as a contract that mandates 50:50 power-sharing between iwi and the Crown – is, at heart, a form of ethno-nationalism, and completely antithetical to true democracy.”
And that’s the problem with our Prime Minister, who says one thing when she is overseas but means another when she is back home – which is why it is so important to examine her speeches carefully.
In her address, the PM stated, “The foundation of a strong democracy includes trust in institutions, experts and government – that can be built up over decades but torn down in mere years.”
She then claimed, “We are at a precipice, and rather than ask what caused it, today I want to talk about how we address it.”
It’s not surprising that the Prime Minister doesn’t want to discuss what has caused the fracturing of public confidence and trust in the Government – the “precipice”, as she describes it – because she and her politics of division are the cause.
Until Jacinda Ardern became PM, New Zealanders were largely trusting of their Prime Ministers, secure in the knowledge that if they deviated too much from the straight and narrow, the Fourth Estate would hold them to account.
Not so anymore. Labour’s $55 million Public Interest Journalism Fund ‘bribe’ has put paid to that.
As a result, through her own actions, Jacinda Ardern has gravely undermined trust in the Government for many New Zealanders.
To refresh our memory, two incidents stand out.
The first was her claim on 19 March 2020 that her Government is the ‘single source of truth’:
"Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern has quashed rumours that the Government is set to announce a total lockdown across the country to combat coronavirus.
She stressed for people to only trust official Government sources as misinformation only fuelled public panic.
‘I cannot go round and dismiss every rumour I see on social media, as much as I’d like to.
When you see those messages, remember that unless you hear it from us, it is not the truth’.”
Four days later she announced the start of the world’s most stringent nation-wide month-long lockdown.
Her lie marked the transformation of New Zealand into what at times resembled a totalitarian regime – with the PM’s Orwellian call for “kindness” used to disguise the cruelty and heartbreak that was being caused.
Not only was her lockdown against Ministry of Health advice, it was also illegal.
She hadn’t even bothered to ensure she had the legislative authority to impose the dictatorial restrictions she had announced.
Those restraints not only crushed basic human rights, but, by calling on “the team of five million” to ‘dob in’ neighbours, family, and friends flouting her draconian rules, Jacinda Ardern divided society.
Urgent Update For Our Nation of New Zealand
As of the 30th of September 2021 Our Government passed a bill that has now set precedence within this country to further destroy our Free Speech.
Witin NZ we have a ''Bill of Rights Act 1990'' which is Binding by the Crown. Yet our Government sees fit to obliterate any form of Civil Rights and Liberties before our eyes during 2019 to present day.
The following is now set within Legality, that online forms of expression and speech can be used as a form of domestic terrorism.
The bill bellow is being introduced to amend the current ''Films, Videos, and Publications Classification Act 1993'', which will then combine the two acts together, including the powers for Police or Legislature to be able to enforce take down notices for statements or publications deemed ''Offensive''.
Also there is a bill that would overturn ''Due Process'' by requiring motorists to hand over their ''Saliva'' to be tested for drugs, despite the '''Bill of Rights 1990'' stating the following:
Section 21 Unreasonable search and seizure: Everyone has the right to be secure against unreasonable search or seizure, whether of the person, property, or correspondence or otherwise.
Generally due process is fundamental in any free and just society, this includes a person shall be secure in all their belongings and property, where a Warrant must be cited to continue for any grounds for search and seizure.
The following bill would give Police power to obtain personal saliva without warrant or due process: See here
The following bill is being introduced to begin framework towards a Digital National passport or ID: See here
The following bill would create precedence for Hate speech laws (Offline) to be punishable. See here
The ramifications of this means that any country outside of New Zealand would then begin to only be fed news from Main stream sources, and our voices will continued to be silenced, for any reality on the ground here in New Zealand.
Much like how the CCP in China now have the situation.
The PM then used the world stage to paint herself as a hero in saving lives, ignoring the human cost of locking down New Zealanders for weeks on end – denying urgent health care, preventing social interaction, and destroying businesses.
The resulting “excess” death toll was thought to be well over 1,000 – people who died as a consequence of her lockdown.
The second incident was the scandal of vaccine mandates.
On September 9th 2020, just five weeks before the General Election, Jacinda Ardern promised there would be no forced vaccinations.
She said those who chose to opt-out wouldn’t face any penalties at all:
"‘No, and we haven’t for any vaccination in New Zealand applied penalties in that way,’ Ardern told The AM Show, after being asked if there might be sanctions for refusing a Covid-19 vaccine.”
Her subsequent introduction of vaccine mandates turned that promise into a lie.
It also made a mockery of her “be kind to each other” mantra, as again, she violated human rights, created serious financial hardship, and further divided society.
When the High Court ruled in February that vaccine mandates for Police and Defence Force staff were unlawful, they also revealed that the Ministry of Health had advised the Prime Minister that mandates were unnecessary.
In spite of that, Jacinda Ardern deliberately deceived the ‘team of five million’ into thinking mandates would limit the spread of Covid-19, when in fact, they had nothing to do with health, but were being used as weapons of coercion, to force compliance with her vaccine strategy.
New Zealanders were also told the unvaccinated were more likely to spread Covid than the vaccinated.
This was another distortion of the truth, with research confirming that those who are fully vaccinated can spread Covid just as readily as the unvaccinated.
Perhaps it was the fear of being caught out and exposed for the disinformation she was spreading, that caused the Prime Minister – in contrast to her approach at Ihumatao where she went out of her way to end the occupation peacefully – to not only refuse to meet Parliament’s anti-mandate protesters but to go to great lengths to malign and discredit them.
NZCPR Guest Commentator, Waikato University’s Professor John Gibson, has been investigating vaccine mandates, finding not only that the health advantages from the trials of the experimental Pfizer vaccine were seriously overstated to New Zealanders, but that the costs of the mandate policy far outweighed the benefits:
"Whether in hope or in ignorance, politicians and public health bureaucrats overstated the testing criteria used for the vaccines. A trusting public believe what they are told, and so expect the vaccines to be effective in protecting against SARS-CoV-2 infection and in reducing mortality risk.
Politicians who rely on focus groups and internal polling when considering things like vaccine mandates then find that a misinformed public supports these interventions.
The imposition of mandates is likely to have further added to the misunderstanding because, surely, a kind and caring government would only mandate something that is in people’s best interests because it is ‘safe and effective’.”
In fact, Jacinda Ardern has deliberately attempted to close down any critical assessment of her vaccination strategy, including by labelling criticism as conspiracy theory.
And conspiracy is clearly a matter of such great importance to our Prime Minister, that she raised it in her Harvard speech: “When facts are turned into fiction, and fiction turned into fact, you stop debating ideas and you start debating conspiracy.”
This then led her into a discussion of the “scourge of disinformation”.
It turns out that Jacinda Ardern has numerous taxpayer-funded government agencies investigatingconspiracy and disinformation.
These include the Ministry of Health’s Disinformation Assessment and Response Team (DART), the national Computer Emergency Response Team (CERT NZ), the New ZealandPolice, the Department of Internal Affairs, and the Department of Prime Minister and Cabinet (DPMC), which operates the National Security Group, the National Centre for Preventing and Countering Violent Extremism, the COVID-19 Group, COVID-19 Modelling Aotearoa (run by Professor Shaun Hendy with Associate Professor Siouxsie Wiles) – and an associated agency, The Disinformation Project.
The Disinformation Project, which is headed by a principal investigator at Auckland University’s Te Punaha Matatini, Kate Hannah, defines ‘misinformation’ as “false information that was not created with the intent to harm people”, while ‘disinformation’ is defined as “false information that was created with the intent to harm a person, community, or organisation”.
A key part of their work is monitoring “information disorders”, which apparently occur whenever anyone shares so-called ‘misinformation’ or ‘disinformation’.
This ‘disorder’ is considered so serious that it is identified not only as a threat to social cohesion, but also to “the country’s democratic fabric and electoral integrity”.
It seems the Department of Internal Affairs is well advanced in preparing for sweeping regulatory changes to increase protection against the sharing of such “harmful” content across all communication channels including previously unregulated websites, social media, print media, as well as radio and TV.
They define ‘harmful’ content at three levels. The first is content that can cause harm to individuals, the second is content that can cause harm to communities and identity groups, and the third is ‘content that can cause harm to wider society’ – “this might look like individuals or communities losing trust in, or access to, key public institutions such as the legal, health and education systems, freedoms of identity and expression, and democratic participation.”
Harm is, of course, highly subjective and, in practice, can be attached to virtually anything, which is why “losing trust” sounds suspiciously like anything opposing Government policy!
Does this signal the impending wholesale regulation of free speech platforms in New Zealand – under the pretence that they could be causing harm to society?
Is this the beginning of a new age of authoritarianism – an attack on anyone who challenges Labour’s dogma through any forum, including protest action?
Without a doubt, as a result of Jacinda Ardern’s authorisation, New Zealanders are under surveillance as never before.
Just this week, Herald Business Journalist Kate MacNamara confirmed this state of affairs in an article investigating social media surveillance:
"Controversial social media surveillance commissioned by the Government analysed New Zealanders’ private messages to government sites without their knowledge, and contrary to the officials’ descriptions of the work.
Private company Resolution provided the Department of Prime Minister and Cabinet with some 231 ‘social listening’ reports over a period of two years, at a cost of more than a quarter of a million dollars.”
In some cases, Kate explains, the reports “contained both excerpts of individuals’ comments from social media as well as the commenters’ profile pictures.”
While such surveillance has been described as “shocking” and “unethical”, is it, in fact, a glimpse of our future?
The reality for New Zealand is that through ignoring ‘official advice’ and making her disastrous “Captain’s Calls”, Jacinda Ardern is creating an Orwellian society where the ‘single source of truth’ has become the source of ‘untruth’, and a ‘Disinformation’ agency is likely to become a source of ‘misinformation’.
As if that’s not bad enough, she then has the gall to prance on the world stage presenting an illusory façade of virtue.
Fortunately, more and more former Labour Party voters are waking up to the damage to the country that’s being caused by Prime Sinister Ardern.
From replacing democracy with the toxic Maori supremacy agenda for ‘co-governance’, to undermining free expression by turning New Zealand into a surveillance society, the real question is how much more carnage will she be allowed to create before the 2023 general election?
Ukraine Biolabs, Blood, Sand, Betrayal& U.S. Congress Admitted Nazi Role In Ukraine In 2015 June 26 2022 | From: GeorgeWebb / GlobalResearch / Kanekoa / Various
Blood, Sand, Betrayal - Part Two: Six Years Of Work Summarised.
With the Pentagon’s recent admission of 46 biolabs in Ukraine, I wish my deployment of information about Ukrainian biolabs over the last two years could have been deployed with the precision of a 101st Airborne parachute drop.
While in Normandy during a D-Day re-enactment this year, I saw paratroopers jumping from a C-47 plane over St. Mere Eglise, France, releasing parachutes in perfect syncopation. I was impressed with the precision of the paratroopers given the high winds and rain that day.
As the paratroopers gently floated down to perfect landings in the field below, I wistfully imagined how each of my 99-page booklets that I have written over the last two years on Ukrainian biolabs could have been dropped with such beautiful periodicity and precision.
They compared them to ISIS and blamed them for the Christchurch shooter then they sent them $31 billion in weapons.
On October 16, 2019, the top Democrat on the House Homeland Security Committee’s counterterrorism subpanel, Rep. Max Rose (NY), led a letter signed by forty Democrats asking the State Department why they had not placed Ukraine’s Azov Battalion on the U.S. list of “foreign terrorist organizations” (FTOs).
In the letter, the lawmakers compared the Azov Battalion to the Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS), and discussed how, Brenton Tarrant, the Christchurch, New Zealand mosque shooter, who massacred fifty-one people in 2019, had been radicalized by the “ultranationalist militia organization” which “openly welcomes neo-Nazis into its ranks”.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
If only I could have matched that precision in the release of some 40-odd booklets on the Ukrainian biolabs for the Resistance against the current funding of the Neo-Nazi elements in Ukraine!
What if I could have dropped my critical information with such precision? Well, I decided there is nothing stopping me from summarizing it now in such a way, so here it is.
Pentagon confirms Ukraine's role in "biodefense" with 46 biolabs there. Conspiracy theory is now just another confirmed Pentagon press release. pic.twitter.com/kcbngMZC9d
— George Webb - Investigative Journalist (@RealGeorgeWebb1) June 11, 2022
I decided to use the map of the Normandy invasion as sort of a chronological backdrop to provide readers with an easy visual summary.
In 2016 and 2017, I had an inside insight into who was configuring US State Department Blackberrys for dark weapons in Ukraine. This insight was confirmed by two key whistleblowers, resulting in a book called “Blackberrys Matter”.
I corresponded with my “Blackberrys Matter” book which sumarized key findings in 2017 here with the 101st Airborne landing in St. Mere Eglise, commanded by General Maxwell Taylor. A grandson of Maxwell Taylor may very well have been one of my US State Department Blackberry whistleblowers, so Utah Beach made a good placeholder for my research InfoGraphic.
In 2017 and 2018, I got a great deal of help in figuring out exactly what the US State Department Blackberrys were being used for in Ukraine - bioagent research, development, and testing program for the US Army, headquartered at Ft. Belvoir, Virginia.
My ex-cop research partner who had numerous contacts with the Special Forces veterans of the JSOC Command had informed my research partner I nicknamed Task Force about extensive “bio-tagging” used in an operation called Operation Blackjack in Afghanistan.
Task Force feared this same “bio-tagging” would be implemented by the Dept of Homeland Security in the United States. Task Force is represented with Omaha Beach of the D-Day Landing, as she died later that year in 2018.
Task Force’s predictions of “bio-tagging” the US population for biosurveillance tracking through a program called MAVNI would be captured in my two books “Awan Minutes To Midnight” and “Under Lockdown”.
Since the UK’s Porton Down bioagent facility was actively involved in this program, I have given the book “Under Lockdown” the same middle position as the British Gold Beach landing in the infographic.
By late 2019, we were already predicting a lockdown with some sort of new, novel virus, to be delivered from Ukraine’s Neo-Nazi Azov Batallion in China for spread across the globe.
These initial speculations were later confirmed in a March 2020 gathering of citizen journalists near Washington, DC. This research about Ukrainian Billionaire Igor Kolomoisky’s Azov Batallion potentially super spreading the new, novel virus is depicted in my book, “Somewhere Under the Rainbow”.
Since our Washington, DC group depicted the Canadian Winnipeg BSL-4 flying pathogens back and forth to Wuhan’s Virology Lab, we give my book about this Ukraine Azov Batallion super spreading Corona to the Canadian Beach of Juno Beach.
I realize now that I have summarized just five books now in this substack, and I am at the byte limit for an email. I will just add the key character of Sina Bavari, a central figure to the Fort Detrick Lab leak, and the 9/11 Anthrax scare in 2001.
And I will add Ron Fouchier of the Erasmus Lab in Holland for my book, “Spray It In Dutch” for the NATO Lab that developed SARS, MERS, and SARS-COV-2 (COVID-19) with Gain of Function experiments intended to aerosolize the virus.
U.S. Congress Admitted Nazi Role In Ukraine In 2015
Rather than fully inform its readers about a crisis that has the potential of becoming a nuclear showdown between the United States and Russia, the [NY] Times has chosen to simply be a fount of State Department propaganda, often terming any reference to Kiev’s Nazi storm troopers to be “Russian propaganda.”
Now, however, a unanimous U.S. House of Representatives - of all things - has acknowledged the unpleasant truth.” - Robert Parry, June 2015.
Last February [2014], when ethnic Russian rebels were closing in on the Ukrainian port of Mariupol, the New York Times rhapsodically described the heroes defending the city and indeed Western civilization – the courageous Azov battalion facing down barbarians at the gate. What the Times didn’t tell its readers was that these “heroes” were Nazis, some of them even wearing Swastikas and SS symbols.
The long Times article by Rick Lyman fit with the sorry performance of America’s “paper of record” as it has descended into outright propaganda – hiding the dark side of the post-coup regime in Kiev.
But what makes Lyman’s sadly typical story noteworthy today is that the Republican-controlled U.S. House of Representatives has just voted unanimously to bar U.S. assistance going to the Azov battalion because of its Nazi ties.
When even the hawkish House of Representatives can’t stomach these Nazi storm troopers who have served as Kiev’s tip of the spear against the ethnic Russian population of eastern Ukraine, what does that say about the honesty and integrity of the New York Times when it finds these same Nazis so admirable?
Emails from Hunter Biden's laptop confirm that he not only invested $500,000 into a bio-lab company based in Ukraine, but raised nearly $30 million dollars for that lab and secured U.S. Department of Defense contracts while his father was Vice President of the United States.
And it wasn’t like the Times didn’t have space to mention the Nazi taint. The article provided much color and detail – quoting an Azov leader prominently – but just couldn’t find room to mention the inconvenient truth about how these Nazis had played a key role in the ongoing civil war on the U.S. side. The Times simply referred to Azov as a “volunteer unit.”
Yet, on June 10, the U.S. House of Representatives approved a bipartisan amendment to the Defense Appropriations Act – from Reps. John Conyers Jr., D-Michigan, and Ted Yoho, R-Florida – that would block U.S. training of the Azov battalion and would prevent transfer of shoulder-fired anti-aircraft missiles to fighters in Iraq and Ukraine.
“I am grateful that the House of Representatives unanimously passed my amendments last night to ensure that our military does not train members of the repulsive neo-Nazi Azov Battalion, along with my measures to keep the dangerous and easily trafficked MANPADs out of these unstable regions,” said Conyers on Thursday.
He described Ukraine’s Azov Battalion as a 1,000-man volunteer militia of the Ukrainian National Guard that Foreign Policy Magazine has characterized as “openly neo-Nazi” and “fascist.”
And Azov is not some obscure force. Ukraine’s Interior Minister Arsen Avakov, who oversees Ukraine’s armed militias, announced that Azov troops would be among the first units to be trained by the 300 U.S. military advisers who have been dispatched to Ukraine in a training mission codenamed “Fearless Guardian.”
A Bloomberg News article by Leonid Bershidsky noted that “it’s easy to see why” Conyers “would have a problem with the military unit commanded by Ukrainian legislator Andriy Biletsky: Conyers is a founding member of the Congressional Black Caucus, Biletsky is a white supremacist. …
Biletsky had run Patriot of Ukraine [the precursor of the Azov battalion] since 2005. In a 2010 interview he described the organization as nationalist ‘storm troops’ … The group’s ideology was ‘social nationalism’ - a term Biletsky, a historian, knew would deceive no one.
"In 2007, Biletsky railed against a government decision to introduce fines for racist remarks: ‘So why the “Negro-love” on a legislative level?
They want to break everyone who has risen to defend themselves, their family, their right to be masters of their own land!
They want to destroy the Nation’s biological resistance to everything alien and do to us what happened to Old Europe, where the immigrant hordes are a nightmare for the French, Germans and Belgians, where cities are “blackening” fast and crime and the drug trade are invading even the remotest corners.’”
The Bloomberg article continued, “Biletsky landed in prison in 2011, after his organization took part in a series of shootouts and fights."
Following Ukraine’s so-called revolution of dignity last year, he was freed as a political prisoner; right-wing organizations, with their paramilitary training, played an important part in the violent phase of the uprising against former President Viktor Yanukovych.
An additional $33 Billion dollars for Ukraine, for weapons and armored vehicles. It's time someone tells the truth about where this money is really going, to some of the worst people in the world,in this case, actual Nazis.
The new authorities - which included the ultra-nationalist party Svoboda - wanted to show their gratitude.
"The war in the east gave Biletsky’s storm troopers a chance at a higher status than they could ever have hoped to achieve.
They fought fiercely, and last fall, the 400-strong Azov Battalion became part of the National Guard, receiving permission to expand to 2,000 fighters and gaining access to heavy weaponry.
So what if some of its members had Nazi symbols tattooed on their bodies and the unit’s banner bore the Wolfsangel, used widely by the Nazis during World War II?
“In an interview with Ukraine’s Focus magazine last September, Avakov, responsible for the National Guard, was protective of his heroes. He said of the Wolfsangel:
‘In many European cities it is part of the city emblem. Yes, most of the guys who assembled in Azov have a particular worldview. But who told you you could judge them?
Don’t forget what the Azov Battalion did for the country. Remember the liberation of Mariupol, the fighting at Ilovaysk, the latest attacks near the Sea of Azov. May God allow anyone who criticizes them to do 10 percent of what they’ve done.
And anyone who’s going to tell me that these guys preach Nazi views, wear the swastika and so on, are bare-faced liars and fools.’”
Whoops
Though the House vote on June 10 may have shined a spotlight into this dark corner of the U.S.-embraced Kiev regime, the reality has been well-known for many months – though played down in most of the Western news media, often dismissed as “Russian propaganda.”
Even the Times has included at least one brief reference to this reality, though buried deep inside an article. On Aug. 10, 2014, a Times’ article mentioned the Nazi taint of the Azov battalion in the last three paragraphs of a lengthy story on another topic.
“The fighting for Donetsk has taken on a lethal pattern: The regular army bombards separatist positions from afar, followed by chaotic, violent assaults by some of the half-dozen or so paramilitary groups surrounding Donetsk who are willing to plunge into urban combat,” the Times reported.
“Officials in Kiev say the militias and the army coordinate their actions, but the militias, which count about 7,000 fighters, are angry and, at times, uncontrollable. One known as Azov, which took over the village of Marinka, flies a neo-Nazi symbol resembling a Swastika as its flag.” [See Consortiumnews.com’s “NYT Discovers Ukraine’s Neo-Nazis at War.”]
A Shiver Down the Spine
The conservative London Telegraph offered more details about the Azov battalion in an article by correspondent Tom Parfitt, who wrote: “Kiev’s use of volunteer paramilitaries to stamp out the Russian-backed Donetsk and Luhansk ‘people’s republics’"… should send a shiver down Europe’s spine.
"Recently formed battalions such as Donbas, Dnipro and Azov, with several thousand men under their command, are officially under the control of the interior ministry but their financing is murky, their training inadequate and their ideology often alarming.
The Azov men use the neo-Nazi Wolfsangel (Wolf’s Hook) symbol on their banner and members of the battalion are openly white supremacists, or anti-Semites.”
Based on interviews with militia members, the Telegraph reported that some of the fighters doubted the reality of the Holocaust, expressed admiration for Adolf Hitler and acknowledged that they are indeed Nazis.
Biletsky, the Azov commander, “is also head of an extremist Ukrainian group called the Social National Assembly,” according to the Telegraph article which quoted a commentary by Biletsky as declaring: “The historic mission of our nation in this critical moment is to lead the White Races of the world in a final crusade for their survival. A crusade against the Semite-led Untermenschen.”
In other words, for the first time since World War II, a government had dispatched Nazi storm troopers to attack a European population – and officials in Kiev knew what they were doing.
The Telegraph questioned Ukrainian authorities in Kiev who acknowledged that they were aware of the extremist ideologies of some militias but insisted that the higher priority was having troops who were strongly motivated to fight. [See Consortiumnews.com’s “Ignoring Ukraine’s Neo-Nazi Storm Troopers.”]
But a rebel counteroffensive led by ethnic Russians last August reversed many of Kiev’s gains and drove the Azov and other government forces back to the port city of Mariupol, where Foreign Policy’s reporter Alec Luhn also encountered the Nazis. He wrote:
“Blue and yellow Ukrainian flags fly over Mariupol’s burned-out city administration building and at military checkpoints around the city, but at a sport school near a huge metallurgical plant, another symbol is just as prominent: the wolfsangel (‘wolf trap’) symbol that was widely used in the Third Reich and has been adopted by neo-Nazi groups."
“Pro-Russian forces have said they are fighting against Ukrainian nationalists and ‘fascists’ in the conflict, and in the case of Azov and other battalions, these claims are essentially true.”
SS Helmets
More evidence continued to emerge about the presence of Nazis in the ranks of Ukrainian government fighters. Germans were shocked to see video of Azov militia soldiers decorating their gear with the Swastika and the “SS rune.”
NBC News reported: “Germans were confronted with images of their country’s dark past … when German public broadcaster ZDF showed video of Ukrainian soldiers with Nazi symbols on their helmets in its evening newscast."
Nazi symbols on helmets worn by members of Ukraine’s Azov battalion. (As filmed by a Norwegian film crew and shown on German TV)
“The video was shot … in Ukraine by a camera team from Norwegian broadcaster TV2. We were filming a report about Ukraine’s AZOV battalion in the eastern city of Urzuf, when we came across these soldiers," Oysten Bogen, a correspondent for the private television station, told NBC News.
“Minutes before the images were taped, Bogen said he had asked a spokesperson whether the battalion had fascist tendencies. ‘The reply was: absolutely not, we are just Ukrainian nationalists,’ Bogen said.”
Despite the newsworthiness of a U.S.-backed government dispatching Nazi storm troopers to attack Ukrainian cities, the major U.S. news outlets have gone to extraordinary lengths to excuse this behavior, with the Washington Post publishing a rationalization that Azov’s use of the Swastika was merely “romantic.”
This curious description of the symbol most associated with the depravity of the Holocaust and the devastation of World War II can be found in the last three paragraphs of a Post lead story published in September 2014.
Post correspondent Anthony Faiola portrayed the Azov fighters as “battle-scarred patriots” nobly resisting “Russian aggression” and willing to resort to “guerrilla war” if necessary.
The article found nothing objectionable about Azov’s plans for “sabotage, targeted assassinations and other insurgent tactics” against Russians, although such actions in other contexts are regarded as terrorism. The extremists even extended their threats to the government of Ukrainian President Petro Poroshenko if he agrees to a peace deal with the ethnic Russian east that is not to the militia’s liking.
“If Kiev reaches a deal with rebels that they don’t support, paramilitary fighters say they could potentially strike pro-Russian targets on their own - or even turn on the government itself,” the article stated.
The Post article - like almost all of its coverage of Ukraine - was laudatory about the Kiev forces fighting ethnic Russians in the east, but the newspaper did have to do some quick thinking to explain a photograph of a Swastika gracing an Azov brigade barracks.
So, in the last three paragraphs of the story, Faiola reported: “One platoon leader, who called himself Kirt, conceded that the group’s far right views had attracted about two dozen foreign fighters from around Europe."
“In one room, a recruit had emblazoned a swastika above his bed. But Kirt … dismissed questions of ideology, saying that the volunteers - many of them still teenagers - embrace symbols and espouse extremist notions as part of some kind of ‘romantic’ idea.”
Despite these well-documented facts, the New York Times excised this reality from its article about the Azov battalion’s defense of Mariupol last February.
But isn’t the role of Nazis newsworthy? In other contexts, the Times is quick to note and condemn any sign of a Nazi resurgence in Europe.
However, in Ukraine, where neo-Nazis, such as Andriy Parubiy served as the coup regime’s first national security chief and Nazi militias are at the center of regime’s military operations, the Times goes silent on the subject.
Rather than fully inform its readers about a crisis that has the potential of becoming a nuclear showdown between the United States and Russia, the Times has chosen to simply be a fount of State Department propaganda, often terming any reference to Kiev’s Nazi storm troopers to be “Russian propaganda.”
Now, however, a unanimous U.S. House of Representatives - of all things - has acknowledged the unpleasant truth.
Eleven Common Symptoms Of The Global Depopulation Slow Kill June 25 2022 | From: WakingTimes / Various
“Maintain humanity under 500,000,000 in perpetual balance with nature.” – The Georgia Guidestones
The full-spectrum global attack on human health is quite obvious to see for anyone who is paying attention and in search of wellness.
So many of the factors that are negatively influencing public heath could easily be prevented or removed from society, yet the decisions of the ruling class continue to ensure that our food supply is toxic, that our environment is compromised, and that our exposure to chemicals and industrial waste is total. Why?
With the stroke of a pen carcinogenic poisons like Monsanto’s Roundup could be banned. Industrial disasters like Fukushima or the Deepwater Horizon could easily get the attention they deserve from world powers, but the will to intervene on behalf of human and environmental health is zero, while the will to intervene militarily in corporate and political affairs is guaranteed.
People are suffering more than ever from a host of chronic conditions and illnesses that can wreck even the healthiest and strongest of us. To be sick is the new normal, and to be healthy is outstanding and unusual.
Concerned citizens are battling grass roots struggles on all fronts, yet, at the top levels of society the corruption, gross negligence, and seeming incompetence continue unabated, ensuring that important decisions always favor the health of corporations and special interests.
With such obvious disregard for life, it would be naive to presume that our national and global leadership have our best interests at heart, and also to assume that any of this could be accidental.
And when we look at comments and statements from some of the world’s most influential people, a dark philosophy is uncovered, and a shocking agenda to depopulate planet earth is revealed. See for yourself:
"The world today has 6.8 billion people. That’s heading up to about nine billion. Now if we do a really great job on new vaccines, health care, reproductive health services, we could lower that by perhaps 10 or 15 percent.”
– Bill Gates
“Frankly I had thought that at the time Roe was decided, there was concern about population growth and particularly growth in populations that we don’t want to have too many of.” – U.S. Supreme Court Justice Ruth Bader Ginsburg
“In order to stabilize world population, we must eliminate 350,000 people per day.”
– Jacques Coustea
“If I were reincarnated I would wish to be returned to earth as a killer virus to lower human population levels.”
– Prince Phillip, the Duke of Edinburgh
“My three main goals would be to reduce human population to about 100 million worldwide, destroy the industrial infrastructure and see wilderness, with it’s full complement of species, returning throughout the world.”
– Dave Foreman, Earth First Co-Founder
“This planet might be able to support perhaps as many as half a billion people who could live a sustainable life in relative comfort. Human populations must be greatly diminished, and as quickly as possible to limit further environmental damage.”
– Professor of Biology at the University of Texas at Austin Eric R. Pianka
“Maintain humanity under 500,000,000 in perpetual balance with nature.”
Make what you will out of these statements, but the fact remains that globally, human health and the environment are in critical condition and there is no sign of relief in sight.
Couple this with the fact that many of the world’s elite do publicly fantasize of culling the human population, and the realization is harsh: we are targets.
Our world simply does not have to be poisoned with chemtrails, radiation leaks, GMO’s, electro-magnetic pollution, frack wells, fluoride, mercury, vaccine adjuvants, depleted uranium, oil spills, antibiotics, endocrine disrupting chemicals, toxic food additives, agro-chemicals, pharmaceuticals, and so much more.
The aggregated, generations long effect of such total contamination is the explosion of a host of bizarre and life-altering illnesses and ‘conditions,’ that chronically sap our energy and vitality, slowly debilitating us, separating us from our power and putting us into the doctor’s office.
The following 11 common symptoms are signs that the global depopulation slow kill is in play and is effective, and that within a couple of generations the human race will no nothing of health, wellness and vitality.
1. Gut and Digestive Issues
The primary attack on the body’s immune system takes place in the digestive system where the body’s natural bacterial defenses live.
Chronic poor digestion, leaky gut syndrome, gastritis, colitis, inflammatory bowel syndrome, candida overgrowth, food sensitivities and other serious issues are become increasingly common, resulting from the consumption of denatured foods laden with chemicals and sugars, GMO poisoning and so on.
Roundup herbicide is known to kill healthy bacteria in the body after being ingested in only residual amounts. Antibiotic overuse and contamination in the water supply means that building a health but biome is nearly impossible.
2. Chronic Fatigue and Low Energy
The body’s natural store of energy is the first thing to become depleted when the body and mind are over-exposed to pollution and stress.
The persistent exposure to toxic foods, poisoned spaces, electromagnetic radiation, psychological attacks, continually forces the body and psyche to be in a state of crisis.
The regular amount of energy needed to perform the ordinary rigors of life is not available, and as a result we become chronically tired, low-energy, lethargic and generally slowed down.
Even when we balance diet, exercise and meditation, maintaining personal energy is difficult, so many people are having to constantly dose themselves with caffeine and so-called energy drinks just to accomplish an ordinary day.
Dietary illnesses such as the sweeping obesity and diabetes epidemics are a sign that the soft kill is greatly impacting public health.
Public relations and social engineering have changed the public’s understanding of what food actually is, and as our consumption of crap corporate foods increases, so do our wastelines and our chances for getting getting chronic disease like diabetes.
Of course, both of these conditions are entirely curable with a proper diet, but in a country where raw milk is illegal, the truth about food and health is rarely spoken in the mainstream.
The maintenance of chronic illness is very profitable for the medical establishment, and obesity is a gateway to many chronic and life-threatening illnesses.
4. Disorientation and Brain Fog
Many people these days suffer from spells of disorientation and fogginess of the mind, without any clear cause or reason as to the mind should be functioning so poorly.
Brain fog is a difficult to identify chronic condition where a person feels disconnected, confused and distant, almost an illness of consciousness.
A spell can last for a day, or it can last for years, often persisting until a person finally isolates the primary cause.
Candida overgrowth, a condition where negative bacteria is being over-produced within the body, is the result of poor diet and a compromised gut biome, and is thought to cause disorientation and brain fog.
5. Chronic Inflammation
Chronic inflammation is part of a biological response to harmful stimuli and is increasingly being recognized as a serious silent killer because of the health problems it trigger.
The purpose of inflammation is to rid the body of any causes of damage or injury and to initiate repair. It is a defense mechanism that being constantly activated primarily consuming by inflammatory foods.
Modern wheat is an example of a food that has been so genetically altered that it now no longer provides nutrition, but rather instead irritates the tissues of the body, causing chronic inflammation, leading to bigger health problems.
6. Allergies
People suffer more seriously from seasonal and random allergy attacks than ever before, and some attacks can be severe enough to temporarily disable a person.
Everyone is watching pollen counts on the nightly news, but allergies simply weren’t this serious a generation ago.
Something has changed in the body and in the environment, and with the omnipresence of chemtrails and geo-engineering projects in the sky, suspicion that the respiratory system is being attacked is warranted.
7. Autism
Autism in children is rising frighteningly and without a precise indication of exactly what is causing it, we should be dramatically erring on the side of caution.
It could be environmental, it could be vaccines, GMO’s, or household chemicals, but something is taking our children. Will autism rates have to get to one-in-two before a Manhattan Project like effort is initiated to end this?
Alternative cures, treatments and therapies are targeted for extermination by the state, and the sick are corralled into risky, expensive treatments that fail to address the root causes of cancer and promote healthier living.
9. Morgellon’s
This strange and scary disease appears to be an infection of sorts by some still unknown type of organic material.
Manifesting as tiny living threads or worms that surface at the skin, irritating the patient, it is believed that no Morgellon’s patient has ever been able to undergo an autopsy due to an attempted global cover up.
The US government just admitted that Americans are overdosed on fluoride when they lowered the recommended amounts to put in public water supplies.
Fluoride is linked to many health problems including cancer and lowered IQ in children, yet the government still forces into just about everyone. Dental fluorosis is a sign of overexposure to fluoride, and a sign of deliberate poisoning.
11. ‘Chemical Imbalances’
Some will disagree, but mental health issues like ADD/ADHD, anxiety, insomnia, and depression can all be cured with proper diet, exercise and supplementation.
In fact, these conditions are fairly new to the human population, and are on the rise, or at least diagnoses are on the rise.
Of course the medical establishment benefits greatly from having more and more patients consuming drugs to remedy mental health issues.
Conclusion
The soft kill is about distracting you from life, debilitating you, and getting you out of the game and into the pharmacy.
It would take very little to eradicate so much of the toxicity from our modern world, but the initiative of the ruling elite is to destroy, contaminate and compromise all that which is most fundamental to life on planet earth. A deliberate soft kill.
Is this an accident, or the global depopulation soft kill strategy working effectively for the world’s elite? What do you think?
A Zen Master Explains Why “Positive Thinking” Is Terrible Advice June 24 2022 | From: ThePowerOfIdeas / Various
Have you ever been told to just “think positive” and your problems will go away? Or that to achieve your goals in life, all you have to do is visualize it with positive intent?
It’s a philosophy that’s been popular for decades thanks to books like How to win Friends and Influence People and Think and Grow Rich.
In fact, according to spiritual guru, Osho, it might just be one of the biggest “bullshit philosophies” there is.
Why “Positive Thinking” Won’t Help You Out
When asked what he thinks of the “positive thinking” movement, Osho believes that it’s doing more harm than good. Why? Because it means we’re denying reality and being dishonest to ourselves:
"The philosophy of positive thinking means being untruthful; it means being dishonest. It means seeing a certain thing and yet denying what you have seen; it means deceiving yourself and others.”
“Positive thinking is the only bullshit philosophy that America has contributed to human thought – nothing else. Dale Carnegie, Napoleon Hill, and the Christian priest, Vincent Peale – all these people have filled the whole American mind with this absolutely absurd idea of a positive philosophy.
And it appeals particularly to mediocre minds…
Dale Carnegie’s book, How to Win Friends and Influence People, has been sold in numbers just next to the Christian Bible. No other book has been able to reach that popularity.
The Christian Bible should not be a competitor in fact, because it is more or less given free, forced on people. But Dale Carnegie’s book people have been purchasing; it has not been given to you free. And it has created a certain kind of ideology which has given birth to many books of a similar kind. But to me it is nauseating.
… Dale Carnegie started this whole school of positive philosophy, positive thinking: Don’t see the negative part, don’t see the darker side. But by your not seeing it, do you think it disappears? You are just befooling yourself. You cannot change reality. The night will still be there; you can think that it is daytime for twenty-four hours, but by your thinking it, it is not going to be light twenty-four hours a day.
The negative is as much part of life as the positive. They balance each other.”
He also used this opportunity to throw shade at the enormously popular book Think and Grow Rich:
"About Napoleon Hill I remember… he himself was a poor man. That would have been enough proof to disprove his whole philosophy. He became rich by selling the book, Think and Grow Rich.
But it was not positive thinking that was making him rich – it was fools around the world who were purchasing the book, it was his work, his labor, his effort. But in the very beginning days, when his book came out, he used to stand in bookstores to persuade people to purchase the book.
And it happened that Henry Ford came in his latest model car and went into the bookshop to find something light to read. And Napoleon Hill did not want to miss this chance. He went forwards with his book and he said, “A great book has just been published – you will be happy with it. And it is not only a book, it is a sure method of success.”
Henry Ford looked at the man and said, “Are you the writer of the book?”
Napoleon Hill said proudly, “Yes, I am the writer of the book.” And he can be proud: that book he has written is a piece of art. And to create a piece of art out of crap is real mastery.
Henry Ford, without touching the book, just asked one question, “Have you come in your own car or on the bus?”
Napoleon Hill could not understand what he meant. He said, “Of course, I came on the bus.”
Henry Ford said, ”Look outside. That is my private car, and I am Henry Ford. You are befooling others; you don’t have even a private car and you write a book called Think and Grow Rich! And I have grown rich without thinking, so I don’t want to bother with it. You think and grow rich! – and when you grow rich then you come to me. That will be the proof. The book is not the proof.”
And it is said that Napoleon Hill never could gather up the courage to meet this old man, Henry Ford, again, even though he became a little richer. But compared to Henry Ford he was always a poor man and was bound to remain a poor man, always. But Henry Ford’s logic was clear.
No. I do not believe in any philosophy of positive thinking.”
Osho says that forcing yourself to think positive all the time is simply denying the reality of our lives, and it will eventually come around and bite us:
"You ask me: Am I against positive philosophy? Yes, because I am also against negative philosophy.
I have to be against both because both choose only half the fact, and both try to ignore the other half.
And remember: a half-truth is far more dangerous than a whole lie, because the whole lie will be discovered by you sooner or later. How long can it remain undiscovered by you? A lie, of course, is a lie; it is just a palace made of playing cards – a little breeze and the whole palace disappears.
But the half-truth is dangerous. You may never discover it, you may continue to think it is the whole truth. So the real problem is not the whole lie, the real problem is the half-truth pretending to be the whole truth; and that is what these people are doing.”
The Negative Ideas of Your Mind Have to be Released, Not Repressed
Osho goes onto say that it’s harmful to repress negative emotions:
"The negative ideas of your mind have to be released, not repressed by positive ideas. You have to create a consciousness which is neither positive nor negative. That will be the pure consciousness.
In that pure consciousness you will live the most natural and blissful life…
You don’t like a person, you don’t like many things; you don’t like yourself, you don’t like the situation you are in. All this garbage goes on collecting in the unconscious, and on the surface a hypocrite is born, who says, “I love everybody, love is the key to blissfulness.” But you don’t see any bliss in that person’s life. He is holding the whole of hell within himself.
He can deceive others, and if he goes on deceiving long enough, he can deceive himself too. But it won’t be a change. It is simply wasting life – which is immensely valuable because you cannot get it back.
Positive thinking is simply the philosophy of hypocrisy – to give it the right name. When you are feeling like crying, it teaches you to sing. You can manage if you try, but those repressed tears will come out at some point, in some situation.
There is a limitation to repression. And the song that you were singing was absolutely meaningless; you were not feeling it, it was not born out of your heart.”
The Deep State: It Is War, Not Peace That Pays June 23 2022 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various
The Deep State at work: President Eisenhower warned us. He called the “Deep State” at work the “military-industrial complex.” There will always be people in a society who are more willing than others, more prone to bullying, stealing, and making jackasses out of themselves.
As 18th-century political philosopher William Godwin observed, if a government has any legitimate purpose at all, it is to keep these people from doing harm to their fellow human beings.
But over time, these bullies will infest government and its related industries. Then, instead of keeping these pests under control, government gives them authority, even funding a kind of fake-respectability.
Their predations, illusions, and vanities become public policy.
All major industries – media, education, health care and finance – attract these bullies and jackasses. But the Deep State treats them like a manure pile to a herd of pigs.
Soon, they will be rooting and wallowing in the biggest heap of misappropriated resources in all of history.
Today, the Deep State’s agents bark at you to take off your belt and shoes at airports. Try to dig a pond in your backyard, or let your teenage son work on the family farm, and they will make a case of it.
They snoop and spy, looking for secrets they can exploit to bribe you. They tax. They regulate. And they control.
"Ultimately, and the sooner the better, it will require our system and people to reject Trump and those surrounding him - who have already done so much to disgrace the offices they hold and undermine America’s standing in the world.”
But the ones that are out of control are the cabal members themselves and this must be stopped immediately.
This shadowy secret government whose ultimate goal is the implementation of the so-called New World Order, is pulling the strings on the world’s puppet-heads of state and captains of industry.
The term Deep State has recently gained traction, in addition to the use of terms like; shadow government, cabal, Rothschild Khazarian Mafia, The Powers That Be, the Luciferians, Illuminati, Elite; all referencing the same group of hidden Luciferian Satanists that detest and rob people.
The Deep State is an unelected insider-government within in the government. They are not interested in politics, just in money and power, and will continue doing what they are doing, until they cannot do it anymore.
How The Deep State Operates:
A complex web of revolving doors between government, the military-industrial-complex, Wall Street, and Silicon Valley consolidates the interests of defence contractors, banksters, military campaigns, and both foreign and domestic surveillance intelligence, the media, and healthcare, just to name a few.
Money, the economy, and government have all changed since the collapse of the Bretton Woods agreement and the end of gold-backed money.
When on August 15, 1971, President Nixon hammered the last nail in the coffin of honest money by abolishing gold backing for the US-Dollar, the world’s reserve currency.
This was not the only reason for the profound changes that followed. There was also the introduction of Communist China to capitalism, the fall of the Soviet Union, and the rise of the Internet, to name just a few.
After the dissolution of the Soviet Union in 1991, the Deep State faced the biggest threat to its existence: It no longer had a plausible enemy.
Since then, it has put U.S. jackboots on the ground in a takedown of a series of pseudo-enemies – all laughably inferior.
It is War, Not Peace That Pays:
However, with all its firepower, all its superior military technology, and all its trillions of dollars in spending, America hasn’t won a single one of its many wars since the end of the Cold War by way of a clear or honourable victory.
Not one, but then again, that has never been the intention, the only true intention being to turn around money and power, period.
Instead, all wars have led to one fumbled mess after another. Enemies were suddenly promoted into angels; allies morphed into demons.
You’d think this would bring the public to its senses. Maybe all this spending, blustering, and bombing is not really paying off? Maybe it is creating more enemies than it defeats?
But that is just the point: For the common man, a war is little more than a Super Bowl with mortal stakes.
They holler and hoot for the Homeland team. They salute their heroes and hate their enemies, even when they’re not sure who the enemy is.
Those who do the thinking and the plotting, on the other hand, have another agenda. They are just as happy with a defeat as a victory. Victory, and the peace that followed World War II, almost put them out of business. It is war, not peace that pays.
And war pays well, not to mention all the personal liberties that are confiscated with each fabricated war.
The Trillion Dollar Industry:
The U.S. “security” industry has about $1 trillion a year in spending power [2017]. You can buy a lot of votes with that kind of money. The Deep State remains in charge. The fix is always in.
The deep state hides in plain sight and goes far beyond the military-industrial complex.
While most citizens are at least passively aware of the surveillance state and the conspiracy between the government and the corporate heads of Wall Street, few people are aware of how much the intelligence functions of the government have been outsourced to privatised groups that are not subject to oversight or accountability by the public.
The Money Suckers:
Moreover, while Wall Street and the federal government suck money out of the economy, relegating hundreds of millions of people to poverty and incarcerating more people than China – a totalitarian state with four-times more people than the US.
The deep state has, since 9/11, built the equivalent of three Pentagons, a bloated state apparatus that keeps defence contractors, intelligence contractors, and has financed privatised non-accountable NGOs.
Big Business, called Corpocracy aids the deep state. The revolving door between government and Wall Streetmoney allows top firms to offer premium jobs to senior government officials and military yes-men.
Wall Street is the ultimate foundation for the deep state because the incredible amount of money it generates can provide these cushy jobs to those in government after they retire. Nepotism reigns supreme as the revolving door between Wall Street and government facilitates a great deal of domestic strife:
"Bank bailouts, tax breaks, and resistance to legislation that would regulate Wall Street, political donors, and lobbyists.
The senior government officials, ex-generals, and high level intelligence operatives who participate find themselves with multi-million dollar homes in which they spend their retirement years, cushioned by a tidy pile of investments.”
How Did The Deep State Come Into Being?
Although the Deep State is an age-old planned entity, originally it may have been named differently.
Insiders are of the opinion that ultimately it is the offspring of the military-industrial complex, while others say it came into being with the Federal Reserve Act in 1913, when Woodrow Wilson remarked;
"We have come to be one of the worst ruled, one of the most completely controlled and dominated governments in the civilised world, no longer a government by conviction and the vote of the majority, but a government by the opinion and duress of a small group of dominant men.”
This quasi-secret cabal is pulling the strings in Washington, and much of the world is maintained under the pressure of a corporatist ideology that thrives on deregulation, outsourcing, deindustrialization, and financialization, yielding perpetual war and economic imperialism abroad, while consolidating the interests of the oligarchy.
The Deep State is a government within a government that operates off tax dollars but is not constrained by the constitution, nor are its machinations derailed by political shifts.
In this world – where the deep state functions with impunity – it doesn’t matter who is president so long as he or she perpetuates the war on terror, which serves this interconnected web of corporate special interests and disingenuous geopolitical objectives.
"As long as appropriation bills get passed on time, promotion lists get confirmed, black (i.e., secret) budgets get rubber stamped, special tax subsidies for certain corporations are approved without controversy, as long as too many awkward questions are not asked, the gears of the hybrid state will mesh noiselessly”.
Is There Hope For the Future?
For sure there is hope, and the epilogue is imminent. At present, discord and unrest continues to build.
But various groups, establishments, organisations, and portions of the populace from all corners of the political spectrum, including libertarians from both the left and right, whistleblowers and others are beginning to vigorously question and reject the labyrinth of power wielded by the deep state.
Can these groups – can we, the people – overcome the divide and conquer tactics used to quell dissent? That depends on how many of us wake up and unite in the importance of forging a future with freedom and prosperity.
It lies in our own hands. We must all wake up; become and remain positive and motivated to eradicate this Deep State Mafia, once and forever.
Take into consideration; Our Creator has created planet Earth and its people, not to be destroyed by a small group of Mafiosi, ofter referred to as the Deep State.
Research Shocks Scientists: Human Emotion Physically Shapes Reality June 22 2022 | From: LifeCoachCode / Various
Three different studies, done by different teams of scientists proved something really extraordinary.
But when a new research connected these 3 discoveries, something shocking was realized, something hiding in plain sight.
Human emotion literally shapes the world around us. Not just our perception of the world, but reality itself.
In the first experiment, human DNA, isolated in a sealed container, was placed near a test subject. Scientists gave the donor emotional stimulus and fascinatingly enough, the emotions affected their DNA in the other room.
In the presence of negative emotions the DNA tightened. In the presence of positive emotions the coils of the DNA relaxed.
The scientists concluded that “Human emotion produces effects which defy conventional laws of physics.”
In the second, similar but unrelated experiment, different group of scientists extracted Leukocytes (white blood cells) from donors and placed into chambers so they could measure electrical changes.
In this experiment, the donor was placed in one room and subjected to “emotional stimulation” consisting of video clips, which generated different emotions in the donor.
The DNA was placed in a different room in the same building. Both the donor and his DNA were monitored and as the donor exhibited emotional peaks or valleys (measured by electrical responses), the DNA exhibited the IDENTICAL RESPONSES AT THE EXACT SAME TIME.
There was no lag time, no transmission time. The DNA peaks and valleys EXACTLY MATCHED the peaks and valleys of the donor in time.
The scientists wanted to see how far away they could separate the donor from his DNA and still get this effect. They stopped testing after they separated the DNA and the donor by 50 miles and STILL had the SAME result. No lag time; no transmission time.
The DNA and the donor had the same identical responses in time. The conclusion was that the donor and the DNA can communicate beyond space and time.
Scientists who were studying this, described the photons behaving“surprisingly and counter-intuitively”. They went on to say that “We are forced to accept the possibility of some new field of energy!”
They concluded that human DNA literally shape the behavior of light photons that make up the world around us!
So when a new research was done, and all of these 3 scientific claims were connected together, scientists were shocked.
They came to a stunning realization that if our emotions affect our DNA and our DNA shapes the world around us, than our emotions physically change the world around us.
Hero Worship And The Shadow Self June 21 2022 | From: FeelingGoodFeelingGreat / Various
Are you afraid of your own shadow? I’m not talking about the silhouette of yours on the ground; I’m talking about the psychological shadow.
In Jungian psychology, the shadow is the collection of aspects of yourself that you deem unwanted or undesirable and hide deep in the caverns of your subconscious mind.
What we classify as unwanted or undesirable is largely determined by our cultural conditioning. The classic example is the business man whose true passion is art, yet he suppresses this gift because of what his parents and society labeled as favorable or unfavorable.
This happens with all aspects of self we refuse to accept (which can happen consciously or subconsciously).
While the shadow self is often thought of as the “bad” qualities that we refuse to acknowledge within ourselves, the most suppressed qualities are often the best ones. This is what I call the golden shadow.
The Golden Shadow
"Our deepest fear is not that we are inadequate. Our deepest fear is that we are powerful beyond measure. It is our Light, not our Darkness, that most frightens us.”
- Marianne Williamson
Hero worship is an extension of the golden shadow. We suppress our inner greatness and subconsciously project our collective golden shadow onto heroes.
Heroes of all kinds – superheroes, celebrities, athletes, gurus – are thought of as amazing and perfect, while we view ourselves as a lesser “poor little me.”
We put all of our hopes and dreams not in ourselves, but in our favorite athlete, or the president, or a superhero we saw in a movie.
All of the beauty we’ve refused to accept within ourselves is projected onto models and the “beautiful faces” we see on TV. This is all externally projecting our suppressed greatness because somewhere along the line we’ve deemed ourselves unworthy of embodying.
Here’s the truth. We all have greatness within. Yours may not look like Michael Jordan’s (who supposedly isn’t the nicest human being by the way – a testament to the grand deception of celebrity worship). Your greatness may not look like mine either.
But I can guarantee that you have some kind of unique greatness. It’s been there all along, you’ve just refused to acknowledge it.
The Darker the Shadow, The Stronger the Super Powers
Mythological figures like superheroes and omnipotent gods are the projection of a society that feels weak and helpless.
This collective projection comes from a huge “elephant in the room” shadow that we refuse to acknowledge. Our hero myths are created to fill the yearning for the brilliant potential that we’re systematically denying ourselves.
Can we fly and lift giant boulders? Who really knows? But super powers are more metaphorical. We’ve denied our inner gems so vehemently that we subconsciously create external, all-powerful saviors to fill that void and balance the scales.
We’re so afraid to step into our own power that we project it outward instead of owning it.
We cowardly choose work unfulfilling jobs, sit on the couch and watch TV instead of coming to grips with the immense power that lies within. You don’t have to be rich and famous to do this. It all simply comes down to your focus. What are you focusing on? What are you giving energy to?
Accepting your power within could be as simple as having a clear purpose in life, choosing a career you truly love, meditating, being fully present, feeling gratitude, honoring compassion, creating art or anything else where your focus is on cultivating your own gifts instead of focusing on something external.
Once we start doing this, who knows what possibilities will emerge? We know next nothing about the nature of reality, so the (assumed) laws we think we’re subject to might change and/or dissolve as we let go of self-imposed limitations. Anything is possible, but we’re so quick to stubbornly argue FOR our limitations.
We live in prisons that are locked from the inside.
The God Within
As humans, we have a tendency to project our best qualities onto external Gods, creating an external savior complex.
If you view those qualities as something out there, then they become a mere intellectual concept and you relegate yourself to “poor little me.” But if you view those qualities as archetypes WITHIN YOU, the whole game changes.
When you view Buddha or Jesus Christ as men to be worshipped who are more special than you, you’re missing the whole point.
Buddha and Christ are archetypal examples of the “higher” consciousness that exists within all of us.
Yet because we’ve been so conditioned to cast our greatness to the shadows, most people cannot even fathom this concept and argue for their own diminutiveness.
"The kingdom of God is not in the clouds, in some designated point of space; it is right behind the darkness that you perceive with closed eyes.”
- Paramahansa Yogananda
The Heroic Chasm
I’m not saying to never admire anyone else or be an egocentric narcissist. Not at all. When you shine light on your shadow and cultivate love within, only then can you truly love others.
It’s useful to learn from others, but the difference comes in whether or not you choose to embody those qualities you admire.
“It’s cool to imitate, just grow into your own
Don’t let the green grass across the picket fence
Turn you into Mr. Smith without a purpose or a home
Underneath he is a Jedi, on the surface he’s a Clone”
– Jay Electronica
You see, most people admire others, but think “I could never be like that” or something similar that implies inferiority. That’s self-sabotaging victim logic.
A 5’3” man probably won’t become a professional basketball player, but he most certainly has the potential for greatness in other ways. Well that’s not entirely true either. Look at someone like Mugsy Bogues, who actually was a 5’3” professional basketball player.
So it is possible, if you choose to believe in yourself. Sometimes we need to redefine what possible is. “Impossible” is an opinion; a mere imaginary fence created by self-defeating, “poor-me” victims.
If you hear about a successful business person’s morning routine, do you think “I don’t have the discipline for that” and flip to the next channel to distract yourself? Or do you take notes and start applying it towards your own mission in life?
We must bridge the heroic chasm. On one side, you have the idolized hero, and on the other the average person who refuses to acknowledge their own greatness.
The chasm is bridged by learning from “heroes” then EMBODYING those qualities which the heroes represent. If those qualities are not examined, learned and embodied, you just become another passive, “poor little me” for the rest of your life.
The successful athlete continuously embodies and applies the qualities of the people they look up to. The wise person continuously embodies and applies the wisdom of others. The enlightened person continuously embodies an applies the God-like qualities.
How are you going to bridge the heroic gap? Or will you choose to deny your greatness and cowardly feed your shadow with hero worship?
Life to too precious to fritter away by denying your own greatness. Learn from others then cultivate that greatness within. It’s there within all of us.
A Masterclass In Propaganda & Transgressing The Logic Of The New Tyrannical Normal June 20 2022 | From: NZPCR / OffGuardian / Various
“It is true that you may fool all of the people some of the time; you can even fool some of the people all of the time; but you can’t fool all of the people all of the time.” - President Abraham Lincoln
When Jacinda Ardern took office in 2017, she promised her government would be the most open and transparent New Zealand had seen.
In her first formal speech to Parliament she pledged:
"This government will foster a more open and democratic society. It will strengthen transparency around official information.”
Since that time, the Government’s “iron grip” on the control of information has tightened and it is harder now than ever to get information.
This is the view of one of New Zealand’s most experienced political journalists, Stuff’s Andrea Vance, who last weekend explained:
"In my 20-year plus time as a journalist, this Government is one of the most thin-skinned and secretive I have experienced. Many of my colleagues say the same…
It’s now very difficult for journalists to get to the heart and the truth of a story. We are up against an army of well-paid spin doctors.
At every level, the Government manipulates the flow of information…
Even squeezing basic facts out of an agency is a frustrating, torturous and often futile exercise.”
She explains that since “the current Government took office, the number of communications specialists have ballooned. Each minister has at least two press secretaries. Ardern has four.”
The team assisting the Prime Minister to shape her public image is headed by her chief press secretary, Andrew Campbell, with former Stuff business editor Ellen Read as his deputy.
Essentially, they handle incoming questions for the prime minister, help with speech writing, set up interviews and press conferences, and accompany the PM through media engagements.
In addition, the prime minister’s office not only controls what other members of the Cabinet are saying, but they go to great lengths to “make sure their audience is captured, starting the week and cementing the agenda with a conference call with political editors”.
It is not just politicians that have press secretaries – so too do government departments, and under our PR-savvy Prime Minister, the number is skyrocketing.
In the year Labour took office, the Ministry for the Environment had 10 PR staff – they now have 18. The Ministry for Foreign Affairs and Trade more than doubled their staff – up to 25.
MBIE blew out from 48 staff to 64, with the New Zealand Transport Agency, which had 26 communications staff five years ago, now employing a staggering 72!
With this PR army promoting an image of government benevolence and attempting to block unwanted scrutiny, even basic requests for information are now being denied.
Andrea Vance describes how attempts by two senior journalists to interview Foreign Minister Nanaia Mahuta, at a time of intense interest in the China-Australia-New-Zealand relationship, were refused – not because of geo-political sensitivities, nor a diary clash, but because “the paranoid and hyper-sensitive minister objected to taking questions from two journalists at once.”
That same Minister, with her local government hat on, had released radical proposals for ‘three waters’ reforms that would essentially centralise the management of drinking water, wastewater, and storm water operations from local councils to mega-agencies, with 50 percent control allocated to private sector tribal corporations.
Yet, she “refused to answer detailed questions about the proposed changes”, agreeing to only one interview – with a ‘friendly’ state broadcaster. The whole debacle represented “a serious blow to accountability”.
It turns out that journalists who ask hard questions and challenge the Government’s spin are increasingly being side lined – refused interviews, excluded from press conferences, and ignored at media stand-ups.
Government departments are also being obstructive, refusing to answer Official Information Requests unless ordered to do so by the Ombudsman.
As a result, queries that should have been responded to within 20 working days are taking months to answer with much of the information, when it is eventually released, heavily redacted.
These are not the actions of the open and transparent government promised by Jacinda Ardern, but of an increasingly totalitarian regime.
In her article Andrea Vance asks why the difficulties faced by journalists should matter to the public: “Why should you care?”
She then explains:
"Because the public’s impression of this government is the very opposite. They see a prime minister that has captivated the world with her ‘authentic’ communication style, intimate social media postings, daily Covid briefings and proactive releases of Cabinet papers.
It is an artfully-crafted mirage, because the reality is very different. This is a Government that is only generous with the information that it chooses to share.”
Jacinda Ardern is, of course, a public relations graduate, with a Bachelor of Communication Studies in Public Relations and Political Science from Waikato University.
As a result, when faced with a pandemic and an election in 2020, Prime Minister Ardern’s confidence in the power of PR led her to employ an army of communications experts to help her win the Covid-PR war and the election.
As George Orwell said, if you control the language, you can control the mind, and that is certainly how it all played out. Using carefully crafted lines like “the team of 5 million”, Jacinda Ardern was able to persuade the nation that she was saving lives – and deserved to be re-elected.
Official information revealed that by the end of May 2020, the cost of the PM’s public relations campaign – which had built a formidable propaganda machine involving 28 advertising, marketing and communications contractors – was a staggering $16 million dollars:
"The majority was to two firms who are listed as communications directors by the Department of the Prime Minister and Cabinet.
Clemenger BBDO was paid $3m for its role, which involved the clear and concise messaging such as ‘stay home, save lives’.
But the biggest earner OMD, a multinational advertising firm… was paid $12m for its role in the response.”
It turns out that everything from “go hard, go early” to the “be kind to each other” messaging was carefully planned, tested, and executed by experts.
At the time, Newstalk ZB’s Mike Hosking was scathing that so much money was being spent on ‘spin’:
“Extraordinary, isn’t it? It shows just how much we got played by a government that was as desperate to score points as it was to actually address a health crisis.
Is the Next Step For Cancel Culture To Drive Certain People From All Society?
Is communication important? Of course. But do you need to pay $16 million for it?
No. This wasn’t simple instruction that any government can come up with, this was clearly a highly planned, seriously worked over piece of strategy designed for maximum political impact.
And the irony is, from the advertising agencies point of view, it worked. We got sucked in, followed orders and came out hailing the Prime Minister with a 59 percent share in a poll. Value for money then?
Or a master piece of fantastically expensive spin? Again, we were played like a fiddle.”
"The Ardern Government has been delivering a masterclass in propaganda since Covid began.
It has presented the plan that it formulated as the only feasible option, set up rules and language to prosecute that agenda and rhetorically crushed all opposition.
That was buttressed over the months by the fact that the Government’s plan was sound, effectively carried out and delivered comparatively very good results. Labour won a crushing election victory off the back of it.”
Indeed, the $16 million of taxpayers’ money bought Labour a masterly election campaign – by keeping the country’s focus on the virus, and constantly repeating the mantra that it was our team of 5 million that defeated it, they communicated a powerful party line: by sticking together we won the Covid battle and by staying with Labour we will win the battle to rebuild our nation.
Labour’s regular election year focus group polling would have told them that to win over ‘soft’ National voters they needed to shift into the political centre ground and temper their socialist ambitions.
As a result, Labour based their election manifesto on their 2017 agenda, and used conservative slogans such as a ‘strong and stable’ government and a ‘steady pair of hands’.
Their PR machine was evident on the campaign trail as political commentator Richard Harman explained at the time:
"On the road with Ardern, they had a much more experienced and substantial team. They had two press secretaries with the Prime Minister; National had one.
Labour had a professional video crew for social media; National had a staffer with an iPhone. Labour had its former party president and Minister, Ruth Dyson, as its advance person carefully setting up events that Ardern was going to and checking them out to avoid pitfalls.
There was little evidence of any advance work [by National].”
After the election, Jacinda Ardern acknowledged that her support had come from across the political spectrum,
"To those amongst you who may not have supported Labour before… I say thank you. We will not take your support for granted. And I can promise you, we will be a party that governs for every New Zealander.”
In a media conference the next day, she specifically reassured New Zealanders about the agenda she intended to roll out, saying, “None of it will be new, because we laid the foundations for these next three years in the previous three years.”
But the truth is that much of what Jacinda Ardern has done since the election is new to the public.
Not only was her He Puapua report – which provides a blueprint for Maori sovereignty over New Zealand by 2040 – not disclosed to the voters during the campaign, but it’s public release was deliberately delayed until after the election.
It is in this politically-charged environment, that this week’s NZCPR Guest Commentator, journalist Graham Adams outlines the difficulties in holding a Prime Minister to account, who is PR-driven and, it seems, is prepared to ‘bend the truth beyond breaking point’:
"Jacinda Ardern has offered herself as a hostage to fortune by repeatedly denying that the doctrine of ‘white privilege’ is being taught in schools, or that the teaching curriculum mentions it anywhere, or that it is part of her ‘government’s agenda’.
“She has conceded that white privilege… might have been taught by a teacher somewhere at some time in some school but insists it isn’t official policy.
In denying that discussing white privilege is an approved part of teaching in schools, evidence shows she may have been bending the truth beyond breaking point.
The official education document Te Hurihanganui mentions ‘white privilege’ in its opening paragraphs. The government has funded the programme to the tune of $42 million.
Launched in October 2020, it has now been established in numerous schools in Nelson, Te Puke, Porirua and Southland, with more to come.”
Graham points out:
"For someone who prides herself on mastering the details of her government’s policies, it’s impossible to believe Ardern is simply ill informed or forgetful about Te Hurihanganui’s existence or what it recommends.”
He wonders whether the motivation for the PM’s repeated denials – that leave her open to charges of lying – could be that Labour’s polling is showing a high degree of public disquiet over anti-racism programmes in schools and the imposition of the He Puapua plan for tribal rule.
Perhaps this means the Ardern Government’s “artfully-crafted mirage” that Andrea Vance so eloquently describes, is finally starting to fracture.
Certainly, the fact that the Government is rolling out the radical He Puapua in secret, instead of openly, indicates that even Labour supporters are becoming concerned.
If they really understood the truth – the serious threat to democracy that the PM’s separatist agenda represents and the deeply divided society it would create – their opposition and sense of betrayal would intensify.
On this issue, we the majority have the mandate – Jacinda Ardern does not.
Transgressing The Logic Of The New Tyrannical Normal
An Essay on the Struggle for Reason and Freedom.
Scholars have speculated that Shirley Jackson’s timeless story The Lottery (1948) was a contemplation of and attempt to make sense of the ghastly forms of rationalization at work in Nazi death camps uncovered during the postwar Nuremberg trials.
While the major theme of Jackson’s story, man’s general inhumanity toward humankind, continues to reverberate, the development of a certain character within the tale speaks even more profoundly to the present.
Old Man Warner and his unblinking obedience to strange abstractions embody a banality of evil that appears in many of his fellow townsfolk and the codes of behavior and speech they are goaded by bizarre norms to embrace.
Questioning these abstractions and the traditions that animate them comes at a substantial price, however.
“Every man has his price” (Walpole, 1734) - an utterance on the lips of both despots and saints, past and present, eager to embrace or repel tyranny. The observation has the ring both of a universal truth and a hasty generalization.
In Jackson’s story, the price for the old man, intent to guard the prevailing socioeconomic order, was his own humanity.
In the present, the saying resonates with those whose minds have been effectively dazzled by the global Pavlovian project observable in state-corporate propagandawhich claims that a virus with a 99.8% survival rate spells certain doom for the world.
They who demand that every living creature obey, without question, the unscientific irrational contradictory plans of the unfolding state-corporate global medical hegemony.
The competitively compliant masses, armed with faculties of reason effectively effaced, are all too happy to publicly signal their subservience and submit their civil and human rights to a technocratic global lordship consolidating the kind of control and power that will remain, forevermore, impervious to any challenge.
How observable facts such as these elude the notice of so many people today is covered, most notably, in a popular university course in propaganda at New York University.
Mark Crispin Miller, world-renowned professor of media, culture and communication, has given Mass Persuasion and Propaganda for decades.
In these times, however, of state-sanctioned “woke totalitarianism” enforced by its global big tech guardians, the course and its most famous professor was bound to become a target for cancellation.
The operation against Professor Miller began in earnest last year when a disgruntled student falsely claimed that her teacher was nurturing a student-led mutiny against the NYU administration for its masking policies.
The latest and most baffling attack on Miller has emerged, however, with the publication of a hit piece titled “The Professor of Paranoia” in the Chronicle of Higher Education - a rank illustration of the truths we might see in the aphorism that every man can be bought.
Inexplicably, its author Mark Dery marks out his territorial criticism of Miller by explicitly signaling his own ideological presuppositions - a liberal pose that can only pretend to be progressive, open-minded, balanced and enlightened by an unflagging pursuit of unvarnished truth.
What profits the man who gives up his intellectual integrity for an ideology demanding all empirical knowledge pass through the politically correct filters set by the Federal Ministry of Truth?
Dery muses over decades past, reading Miller’s classic 1988 volume, Boxed In: The Culture of TV and cites our mutually favorite chapter, “Big Brother Is You, Watching.”
He references a salient passage that (in his mind apparently) should serve to chasten Miller for his contemporary transgressions:
"TV ‘reduces all of its proponents to blind spectators of their own annihilation’”
Dery proceeds to call up a host of Miller’s supposed offenses against all accepted expressions of scholarly integrity - uninvestigated 9/11 intrigue, stolen elections, CIA-backed psychological operations against domestic populations, and now the new social and economic “Normal” promulgated by a transnational network of elite Davos movers and shakers.
Scoffing, as he does, at the very idea of addressing such pressing issues comes at the cost of one’s own intellect, a mental annihilation akin to that bizarre period of public discourse in the wake of 9/11 when FOX News was the unrivalled PR arm of the GOP.
The passage from Boxed In that Dery selected as a weapon against Miller serves as the most glaring example of irony.
The very examples Dery cites in his critique show that only those weaned on TV have not yet sampled the solid foods of scholarship - the disinterested science that political institutions have tried for years to marginalize, ignore, or erase.
What does Mark Dery receive beyond keeping up perverse social appearances like those erected in years past by likes of Bill O’Reilly and Sean Hannity - major cheerleaders for the annihilation of countless souls in the post-9/11 regime-change wars?
Today, is it any wonder to academics who steadfastly refuse to betray the call of their vocation, no matter the cost, that such a criticism of Miller would be featured in a journal advocating for higher education?
For anyone in the education field who has witnessed larger forces of the corporate-state complex prevail upon academe and reengineer institutions over the past number of decades, it is impossible not to see the sort of friendly fascism that Bertram Gross had warned about in 1980 when he saw an emerging new order in which:
"More concentrated, unscrupulous, repressive, and militaristic control by a Big Business-Big Government partnership preserve[s] the privileges of the ultra-rich, the corporate overseers, and the brass in the military and civilian order"
Gross showed plainly how public discourse controlled by the gatekeepers helps centers of power frame the reengineering of the social world as “reasonable” and inexorable because it is overtly friendly - to business - and, thus, integral to the logic of an efficient and free market.
The problem for public intellectuals like Miller who work tirelessly to preserve natural and civil rights is disarming the dissemblers and blind servants of power who come with a wink and a smile trying to reassure the masses to trust the plan.
Since 9/11, the ethos of business as usual has been focused on normalizing the tyrannical demands of security as asserted by the transnational partnerships among “the corporate overseers and the brass in the military and civilian order” (Gross, 1980, p. 167).
Old Man Warner would be proud to see so many of his heirs today maintaining the lottery and asserting the need to follow hideous traditions no matter where they lead. Dery notes that:
"Extreme disbelief - a skepticism so radical it dismisses nearly every official narrative as propaganda - can make for strange bedfellows.”
Its applications are limitless and range from construction to even evaluating the atomic structure of a crystal. However, up until now, it was bound to 2D only.
For the last 5 years, an aerospace and aeronautics engineer Luis Teia has been on a quest to understand the Pythagoras’ theorem in 3D. Using his paper, “Pythagoras triples explained via central squares” that was published in the 2015 edition of Australian Senior Mathematics Journal, he has derived the proof.
Okay, sounds amazing but what on Earth does it really mean? Before we jump into the details, the 2D proof of the theorem required about half a page, right? For the 3D proof, a book of 120 pages is required – that’s how complex it is.
The geometrical part was drawn by making use of CAD and the algebra covers the 2/3rd of the book. Both, 2D and 3D, proofs are interconnected and the 3D proof is, in fact, built using the 2D one in a particular way.
The right-hand side of the theorem is rotated by 90 degrees and the blue square transforms into a blue octahedron. For those who do not know, an octahedron is the 3D equivalent of a square.
This implies that while the 2D proof is based on squares, the 3D proof relies on octahedrons. One can spot the presence of 2D theorem by understanding that right-angle triangle (shaded) is present.
The 3D variables are in fact governed by the 2D. The detailed explanations can be found in Teia’s book, X3+Y3=Z3: The Proof.
The benefits of this? This recent understanding can help us in reaching an enhanced 3D version of our current geometry and would help mankind embark on our technological leap similar to the one that Pythagoras helped achieved about 2.5 millennia ago.
There’s a reason that the culture of the 1980’s is experiencing a resurgence right now. Just as there’s a reason that we’re in the early days of getting more build-up of 90’s nostalgia.
It’s not all that complicated, but it is a pattern that has profound consequences for how art is created, how we conceptualize culture, and perhaps even what sort of political rhetoric comes into vogue.
The pattern is this: pop culture is forever obsessed with a nostalgia pendulum that regularly resurfaces things from 30 years ago.
How Memory Shapes the World
There are a number of reasons why the nostalgia pendulum shows up, but the driving factor seems to be that it takes about 30 years for a critical mass of people who were consumers of culture when they were young to become the creators of culture in their adulthood.
The art and culture of their childhood (e.g. Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtle comics in 1984) helped them achieve comfort and clarity in their world, and so they make art that references that culture and may even exist wholly within that universe (e.g. the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles 2014 film reboot, 30 years later).
Since most of the other fashionable creators around them also lived through the same period, they too indulge in the “new” nostalgic trend that’s being repurposed, creating a kind of feedback loop where all parties involved want to contribute more and more work that revives that same zeitgeist.
It can be explained equally well from the consumer side. After about 30 years, you’ve got a real market of people with disposable income who are nostalgic for their childhoods. So artists working in popular mediums are rewarded for making art that appeals to this audience.
Like many pop culture patterns, some aspects of this phenomenon are intentional, and some aspects are an organic product of the personal histories of the creators involved. Film studios and advertisers, for instance, often consciously use the nostalgia pendulum to build an audience’s emotional attachment with the release of something new.
On the flip side, the writers and toy makers and musicians who are creating the artifacts of culture really do have fondness and nostalgia for the themes of their childhood that they’re referencing.
So J.J. Abrams really was a kid during the summer of 1979 in which Super 8 is set. It just so happens that 1979 was 32 years prior to the film’s release in 2011, which means it also resonates with a broad market of newly financially solvent adults.
Building on previous theories of realigning elections, he posits that, due to demographic changes like the ones described above, every 30-38 years, a critical election occurs that drastically changes the dominant political framework.
In these realignments, the ideology tends to oscillate between a focus on private interest and a focus on public interest. There seems to be general agreement that 2016 was not a realigning election, but a rhetoric of nostalgia certainly played a crucial role in the outcome of the 2016 election.
Slogans like “Make America Great Again” coupled with racist dog-whistle politics that makes references to things like “law and order” hearkens back to the Reagan era of 30 years ago and its antecedents.
The nostalgia pendulum is a phenomenon I’ve been taking note of anecdotally for several years now, but I decided it was worth gathering some more evidence to support my hypothesis.
While all sorts of artistic mediums get remade, remixed, and adapted in this same 30-year cycle (hip hop beats reused in pop songs, comics turning into movies, books becoming plays, etc), film remakes are some of the most noticeable artifacts of this process.
I therefore decided to analyze over 500 film remakes from the past century to see if the nostalgia pendulum would rear its head out of the data [*]. Short answer: it did.
The far left side of this graph shows that many films get remade only a few years after the original. This is a kind of bandwagon effect, which in its most benevolent form can be attributed to multiple discovery (people coincidentally arriving independently at the same idea by tapping into the same cultural themes), and in its most capitalist interpretation is clearly market-driven (using the success of the original to make a few extra bucks by iterating on the same story, characters, or ideas).
That cluster on the left-hand side is also why twin films are so often released only months apart (think of Dante’s Peak vs. Volcano, Antz vs. A Bug’s Life,The Illusionist vs. The Prestige, or (heaven help us) Unfriended vs. Friend Request).
However, it’s the next big cluster of remakes that concerns us here. If we include all the data, the average time-to-remake is 22.92 years, with the median at 24 years.
But, of course, those early bandwagon remakes skew things toward the lower end, masking that the next biggest cluster of remakes happens right at the next swing of the nostalgia pendulum - around 30 years after their original.
Prominent Examples of the Nostalgia Pendulum
Below, in order to drive this home with some examples you’ll recognize, I’ve included some famous remakes from the past 20 years that fit into the paradigm of the nostalgia pendulum.
The Parent Trap (1961 - 1998, 37 years) Star Wars (1977) -> Star Wars: Episode I – The Phantom Menace (1999) - 22 years Gone in 60 Seconds (1974-2000, 26 years) Planet of the Apes (1968-2001, 33 years) Carrie (1976-2002) — 26 years Strawberry Shortcake Doll (1979) -> Strawberry Shortcake TV series (2003) - 23 years Dawn of the Dead (1978-2004, 26 years) King Kong (1933-1976, 43 years; 1976-2005, 29 years) The Omen (1976-2006, 30 years) Halloween (1978-2007, 29 years) Raiders of the Last Ark (1981) -> Indiana Jones and the Kingdom of the Crystal Skull (2008) - 27 years Fame (1980-2009, 29 years) Tron (1982) -> Tron: Legacy (2010) - 28 years Footloose (1984-2011, 27 years) RoboCop (1987-2014, 27 years) Jurassic Park (1993) -> Jurassic World (2015) - 22 years Ghostbusters (1984-2016, 32 years) Beauty and the Beast (1991-2017, 26 years)
Stranger Things
As mentioned in the opening of this article, probably one of the most beautifully shameless culprits to intentionally exploit the nostalgia pendulum is the Netflix original series Stranger Things.
In this case, it wasn’t just a few people gathered in a room that decided which retro TV shows and movies to hearken back to.
With Netflix’s recommender system at work gathering data on the preferences of all of its 93 million users, it’s very likely that a large number of the show’s influences were algorithmically determined. The result is a powerfully crafted piece of art with a somewhat terrifying degree of success.
There’s a great side-by-side comparison video that shows just how exactly Stranger Things paid homage to its predecessors. For our purposes, here is a list of many of those influences and how long it was between their release and the release of Stranger Things (2016).
Dungeons & Dragons tabletop game (1974) - 42 years (reached popularity in late 70’s and early 80’s, which makes this closer to 30 years) Close Encounters of the Third Kind (1977) - 39 years Alien (1979) - 37 years E.T. (1982) - 34 years The Thing (1982) - 34 years Poltergeist (1982) - 34 years Firestarter (1984) - 32 years A Nightmare on Elm Street (1984) - 32 years Explorers (1985) - 31 years The Goonies (1985) - 31 years Stand By Me (1986) - 30 years
Everything Old Is New Again
This cyclical view of time and culture fits in with the broader sociological concept of social cycle theory.
It’s important to note, however, that many of these theories do not discount the forward progress of time. We are in for quite a shock if we think that the next 30 years, as climate change continues to affect more and more of our daily life, will be like anything we have seen before.
Still, there is a certain comfort in watching these cultural patterns come back around. The wheel of time rolls forward, yet remains steady on its axle. [*] Notes (nerdy thoughts to follow, continue at your own peril):
My data source for comparing original and remake films was Wikipedia - List of film remakes (A–M) and List of film remakes (N–Z). Wikipedia can be a great resource for aggregated data, especially for non-controversial data like film release dates. And because there’s such a large community around Wikipedia, there are a number of export tools that can help you quickly grab the data from an article, no coding required.
In this instance, I used Wiki Table to CSV to get a CSV-formatted version of the table that displayed original and remake movies with their dates. After opening the CSV in Excel, I was able to use some FIND functions in Excel to extract the dates from between parentheses.
A little bit of clean-up, and voila! A nice, neat set of columns with a date for the original and a date for the remake of 533 titles. After that it’s just a subtraction function to get the difference between the year of the remake and the year of the original.
In the analysis, I always used the earliest original date listed, and if multiple remakes were listed, I tended toward using the date of the most famous remake (e.g. 12 Angry Men (1997) instead of 12 (2007)). In situations where I was less familiar with the film (certain foreign films, for instance) or there were 2 films of equal popularity, I chose the date of the earlier remake.
For the sake of my sanity I did not try to go through every film and figure out the month they were released and whether that impacted the number of years between original and remake. I therefore just subtracted one year from the other. Lastly, I made the histogram graph at Westa.net.
For anyone interested, the Excel spreadsheet with film data is here: film-remakes.xls
Covert War Between Russia And Khazarian Jewry June 17 2022 | From: Geopolitics / Various
The precursor to the ongoing covert hybrid WW3 has its colorful beginnings in the Kingdom of Khazaria, a Turkic empire which had its epicenter center in what is now known as Ukraine.
Within minutes the false narrative of the Sarin attack in Syria was exposed as a hoax with fake pictures of rescuers with sneeze masks handling gas attack patients. Look in the background and you will probably find that shocked girl, the one crying at Sandy Hook, Boston and Paris, et al.
Comment: Before anyone takes an opportunity to have an anti-semitic hissy-fit - it should be made clear once again that it is the Zionists that hide withihn Judaism and uses it as a cover - that is the problem that we all face.
Khazarians became known to surrounding countries as thieves, murderers, road bandits, and for assuming the identities ["name stealers"] of those travelers they murdered as a normal occupational practice and way of life.
800 AD - The Ultimatum is Delivered by Russia and Other Surrounding Nations
The leaders of the surrounding nations, especially Russia, have had so many years of complaints by their citizens that, as a group, they deliver an ultimatum to the Khazarian king.
They send a communique to the Khazarian king that he must choose one of the three Abrahamic religions for his people, and make it his official state religion and require all Khazarian citizens to practice it, and socialize all Khazarian children to practice that faith.
The Khazarian king was given a choice between Islam, Christianity and Judaism. The Khazarian king chose Judaism, and promised to stay within the requirements laid out by the surrounding confederacy of nations led by the Russian czar.
Despite his agreement and promise, the Khazarian king and his inner circle of oligarchs kept practicing ancient Babylonian black-magic, also known as Secret Satanism.
This Secret Satanism involved occult ceremonies featuring child sacrifice, after “bleeding them out”, drinking their blood and eating their hearts.
As opposed to most peoples today, the remnants of Khazaria don’t let bygones be bygones.
They have been preparing for the big war. They have been infiltrating all of the institutions of the world.
"The deep dark secret of the occult ceremonies was that they were all based on ancient Baal Worship, also known as worship of the Owl.
In order to fool the confederacy of nations led by Russia that were watching Khazaria, the Khazarian king melded these Luciferian black-magick practices with Judaism and created a secret Satanic-hybrid religion, known as Babylonian Talmudism.
This was made the national religion of Khazaria, and nurtured the same evil that Khazaria was known for before.
Sadly, the Khazarians continued their evil ways, robbing and murdering those from surrounding countries who traveled through Khazaria.
Khazarian robbers often attempted to assume their identities after they murdered these visitors, and became masters of disguises and false identities - a practice they have continued even to this very day, along with their child-sacrifice occult ceremonies, which are actually ancient Baal Worship."
Today, they are everywhere, and Russia’s battle is ours, too.
“The truth is incontrovertible. Malice may attack it, ignorance may deride it, but in the end, there it is.”
- Winston Churchill
The current conflict between the US and Russia is due to one simple reason: the Ashkenazim. They have a debt to settle with Russia. Allow us to forward a bit of chronological tables as we delve into the nitty-gritty behind the conflict.
They are a resilient, roaming Turkic people. They have a knack for reinventing themselves. They first surfaced in world annals as the notoriously barbaric Scythians or Sakadeans, depending on regional phonetic.
“Here there is no Gentile or Judahite, circumcised or uncircumcised, barbarian, Scythian, slave or free, but Christ is all, and is in all.”
-
Colossians 3: 11
The word Scythian or Sakadean comes from the word Saka – with its Iranian verbal root Sak, meaning to roam.
The Scythians settled Central Eurasia which they conquered with their Gentile brother Togarmath and various other cousins, expanding across a vast track of land that encompassed but was not limited to parts of present-day Turkey and Iran. Their Gentile brother Riphath along with their uncle Javan’s descendants settled in Greece.
Later on, they reinvented themselves and settled a land they would call Khazaria – from the word Qasar, with its Turkic root Qaz, meaning to roam – following the break-up of the western Turkish Steppe Empire.
Then the country converted en masse to Judaism/Pharisaism, sometime between 740 and 920 AD, just so they could remain independent of the two competing empires of that time, Christianity and Islam.
“Judaism was the most actively proselytizing religion… The most significant mass conversion occurred in the 8th century, in the massive Khazar kingdom between the Black and Caspian seas,”explained Jewish historian Shlomo Sand.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Then, Sviatoslav I of Kiev destroyed Khazaria around 1048 and absorbed it into Kievan Rus’, a territory that would later become part of the Russian Empire.
In Imperial Russia, the Ashkenazim were kept under tight control and enclosed in the Pale of Settlement. Something the Ashkenazim never forgave Russia.
Biding their time, they nurtured their hatred and plotted their revenge along with a new reinvention.
They became the power behind the heinous Bolsheviks who took over the Russian government in the 1910s, killed 66 million Christians, including 200,000 members of the Christian clergy, and destroyed 40,000 churches.
“You must understand, the leading Bolsheviks who took over Russia were not Russians. They hated Russians. They hated Christians. Driven by ethnic hatred they tortured and slaughtered millions of Russians without a shred of human remorse. It cannot be overstated.
Bolshevism committed the greatest human slaughter of all time.
The fact that most of the world is ignorant and uncaring about this enormous crime is proof that the global media is in the hands of the perpetrators,” explained famed Christian Russian writer Alexandr Solzhenitsyn.
The great majority of these vicious Bolsheviks were Ashkenazi Jews such as Vladimir Lenin, Leon Trosky, Lev Kamenev, Gregory Zinoviev, Yakov Sverdlov, and Grigory Sokolnikov.
They were financed by Ashkenazi bankers from New York and London, such as Rothschild Bank and Jacob Schiff of Kuhn and Loeb & Co., who themselves championed the destructive ideology of the Ashkenazi Karl Marx, and found it profitable to invest in Communism’s disastrous conquest of Russia, while making a few bucks in the process by plundering the country via well placed agents who would later be known as “oligarchs“.
Russia’s entire Soviet Empire collapsed in 1991. Thus the Ashkenazim succeeded in bringing Russia to its knees.
Today, Russia is under fire for the conflict in Ukraine. A conflict that was started by the neocon Ashkenazi Victoria Nuland in the US State Department, with her neocon Ashkenazi husband Robert Kagan working in the background via powerful organizations such as Project for a New American Century, the Brookings Institution, and Council on Foreign Relations.
“Many of the participants in Kiev’s ‘EuroMaidan’ demonstrations were members of Soros-funded NGOs and/or were trained by the same NGOs in the many workshops and conferences sponsored by Soros’ International Renaissance Foundation (IRF), and his various Open Society institutes and foundations.
The IRF, founded and funded by Soros, boasts that it has given ‘more than any other donor organization’ to ‘democratic transformation’ of Ukraine,” wrote William F. Jasper in The New American.
In other words, the Ashkenazim or the Jewish neocons are goading the Russian bear by wagging the American dog. The dog can’t really decline because AIPAC has it by the groin, bribing equally both the Republicans and the Democrats, who are nothing but political whores willing to betray their country and risk the peace of the world.
And remember, AIPAC is controlled by powerful Ashkenazi-American business leaders.
Their sole purpose is to destroy Russia once again by starting a fire in its underbelly, Ukraine. A fire they’re planning to spread into Russia proper via military and economic warfare.
Why? Because Russia has had the gall to rise from its still warm Ashkenazi-induced ashes. And because Russia has had the temerity to arrest their well placed thieving agents known as “oligarchs”, with some fleeing the country.
And because Russia has had the audacity to impede the American war on Syria, which was orchestrated by AIPAC for the benefit of Israel.
After the destruction of Khazaria, the Ashkenazim scattered East and West throughout Europe and reinvented themselves as Errant Jews or Wandering Jews – meaning Roaming (Khazarian / Sakadean or Scythian) Jews. That label had nothing to do with a longing for Palestine but a longing for Khazaria or perhaps a longing for a new land, any new land.
Here’s an excerpt from Wikipedia:
“In 1903 Theodore Herzl presented the British Uganda Program at the Sixth Zionist Congress in Basel.
In the late 1930s, the British Zionist League considered a number of other places where a Jewish homeland could be established. The Kimberley region in Australia was considered until the Curtin government (in office: 1941–1945) rejected the possibility.
With the support of the then Premier of Tasmania, Robert Cosgrove (in office from 1939), Critchley Parker proposed a Jewish settlement at Port Davey, in south west Tasmania. Parker surveyed the area, but his death in 1942 put an end to the idea.
The Jewish Autonomous Oblast set up in the Russian Far East in 1934, represented a Soviet approach to providing a Jewish homeland."
In the wake of World War 2, a great number reluctantly assimilated themselves throughout the Americas. However, the great majority migrated to Palestine where they created many terrorist groups such as the Irgun, the Stern gang, and Haganah.
They terrorized the Palestinian population, killed thousands upon thousands, and forced hundreds of thousands out of their homes and into neighboring Arab countries.
Consequently, they stole Palestine and renamed it Israel in order to reinvent themselves as Hebrews and hoodwink gullible Christians in the West.
“It is certain that there is no ethnic or racial continuum between the Biblical Israelites and the (Ashkenazic) Khazarians who lead the Jewish state,”explained Gilad Atzmon, Jewish writer and musician.
In their adoptive countries outside of Israel, including the US and Europe, the Ashkenazim have become financial and influential powerhouses, not because they’re Jews – at heart the majority of them are really not religious at all and couldn’t care less – but because they’re a shrewd people.
They have learned much from their roaming throughout history, and they assimilate themselves fast and hard. They’re the ultimate Nomads.
Now could it be that, after two successive ideological failures in the forms of Communism and the current slow-motion destruction of Zionism in Israel, somewhere deep inside the minds of die-hard Ashkenazi leaders lies a plan for a new reinvention?
Will that reinvention be the re-conquest of their Khazar Khaganate – a land that is situated deep inside Russia and encompasses Ukraine and Crimea? Is that why Putin suddenly reattached Crimea to Russia?
Could it be that the Ashkenazim’s plan is to take back and re-settle their ancient Khazaria after the Downfall of Apartheid Israel?
Is it why the duly elected President of Ukraine was forcibly removed in order to install a puppet government with a new [then] Prime Minister named Arseniy Yatsenyuk, who according to The Guardian is playing down his Jewish roots (Arseniy Yatsenyuk was recently replaced by another Jew, Volodymyr Groysman)? Will they be okay with just Ukraine? Revenge Round 3? If so, prepare for World War 3.
“I saw the prosperity of the wicked… Their strength is firm… Pride serves as their necklace; Violence covers them like a garment… This is what the wicked are like - always free of concern as they go on amassing wealth... Surely (Lord) You place them on slippery ground… How suddenly they fall and are destroyed,completely swept away by terrors!” - Psalm 73:2,4,6,12,18,19
The Jewish Bolsheviks who took over the Russian government in the 1910s, killed 66 million Christians, including 200,000 members of the Christian clergy, and destroyed 40,000 churches.
World War 1: Britain was losing the war against Germany. The Zionists stepped in and bribed President Wilson to get the US into the war to help them. In return, the Jews asked the British Empire to deed them Palestine to create Israel. Their wish was granted in the form of the Balfour Declaration of 1917, which cost the world 18 million dead.
World War 2: The Zionists fomented that war (just like they’re doing today with Iran and other countries in the Middle East), so that European Jews could feel threatened.
The deception worked as European Jews fled in droves to Palestine and took over the homes of Palestinians, who were evicted at gunpoint and then either massacred or driven out of their land into neighboring Arab countries.
With enough Jews on the ground, Israel was created in 1948 at a cost of 80 million dead.
World War 3: Will the Zionists succeed in bringing the world once again to the brink of disaster to create Greater Israel? If they do, will it instead bring about their downfall? Apartheid Israel is truly a scourge. A cancer that needs to be dealt with.
Appeal: Every conscientious individual should implement a personal boycott of Israel and everything made there.
This ancient practice of “virgin offerings,” which continue even today, is based on Baal Worship, or the Worship of the Owl.
The Worship of the Owl is the key ritual at the Bohemian Grove where most leaders of the United States congregate to plot the direction of their rule.
We have also seen how ISIS destroyed all of the ancient relics in Palmyra, Syria, which included the UNESCO protected Arch of Triumph, or Baal Shamin, “a temple dedicated to worshiping the Phoenician god of storms and rainfall only to find them displayed in New York, UK and recently Saudi Arabia.
"Arch of Baal" Erected Today in New York City
Temple of Baal
A recreation of Palmyra’s Arch of Triumph was unveiled in New York almost a year after Islamic State militants destroyed the original structure.
The 1,800-year-old Roman arch was blown up by the extremist group last October, but a team of archeologists at Oxford University’s Institute for Digital archeology (IDA) set about recreating it, in an act of resistance to Isis’s rampant acts of cultural destruction in Iraq and Syria.
As an aside, recent medical research has found out that injecting blood from teens reverses aging, which should explain why children continue to disappear around the world even today.
"Injecting blood from young people into old mice improves the mice’s brain power and leads to increased physical activity, according to new research. The finding could lead to breakthroughs for people suffering from degenerative conditions such as Alzheimer’s Disease.
The findings, which have yet to be peer-reviewed, were presented at the Society for Neuroscience annual meeting in San Diego, California on Monday, the New Scientist reports."
We don’t have to resort to cannibalism and suck in some amounts of blood from some virgins just to reclaim our youth. Just read the entire linked article, when you have the time, as the real science behind the anti-aging effects is laid in simple terms.
The destruction of the old Baal tower in Palmyra only suggests that some Jewish benefactors of ISIS don’t want the Syrian people to remember that they were once part of the tradition.
The Goyim must be restricted to the religion of subservience, of self-sacrifice, that is fundamentally embedded in the Catholic doctrine, while they, the Rulers of the World, continue to live and worship Baal, the two towers of Hegelian Dialectic, to pit everyone against each other, to divide and conquer the people for all eternity, neither of which should led to enlightenment and the freedom of the individual.
Although Putin can be seen inside Christian churches lighting candles, or even visited the Pope at the height of the efforts to reform the Vatican Bank in the aftermath of the massive resignations of banking CEOs [here], it doesn’t mean that he is already a conscript like the Pope would have wanted him to be. He is just playing politics like any politicians do. But his Oriental indoctrination should play largely into his decision-making, too. The age-old conflict can only be resolved when one is completely decimated. The ultimate destruction of the world may befall on humanity should they allow the Khazarian Askhenazi Jewry to win. Otherwise, if humanity makes the effort and topple the enemy, only then will man’s horizon could broaden itself and allow the exploration of the unlimited possibilities of his being.
Four Reasons To Break A Sweat June 16 2022 | From: GreenMedInfo / Various
Your body has a natural, powerful, built-in system for detoxification that doesn't require trendy juice cleanses or expensive protocols. All you have to do is sweat!
While sweating has a host of benefits simply because it’s a result of health-boosting exercise, the act of sweating itself heals the body as well. Whether you’re sitting in a sauna, walking on a warm day, or working out, sweating is a necessary bodily function with powerful healing effects.
Specifically, more studies are emerging lauding the detoxifying abilities of sweat. By clearing out a range of toxins, from persistent organic pollutants (POPs) to heavy metals, sweat plays an essential role in your body’s natural detox function. Let’s look at some of the toxins that are cleared from your body when you sweat:
1. Persistent Organic Pollutants (Solvents, Fumigants, and Insecticides):
A clinical study with 20 participants found that sweat samples contained a range of toxins, including pesticides DDT / DDE, endosulfan, methoxychlor, and endrin. In fact, nearly all parent compounds of pesticides were found in the samples studied, which shows that sweating is an effective way of diminishing your body’s toxic burden.
Additionally, the sweat sample contained some pesticides – including DDT, methoxychlor, and endrin - that were not present in the blood or urine samples collected from the same participant, suggesting that some pesticides are only mobilized and excreted through sweating.
2. Phthalate (Plasticizer):
Phthalate, found in plastic products, is another toxic chemical that is removed through sweat. In one study, researchers evaluated blood, sweat, and urine samples from 20 individuals, and discovered that all subjects had mono(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate (MEHP), a common phthalate, in each of the samples.
The concentrations of this compound in sweat were more than twice as high as urine levels, showing that sweating may be the most effective way of ridding your body of this endocrine-disrupting compound.
3. Heavy Metals;
One study with 20 patients reported that when compared to urine, sweat contained about 24 times more cadmium, 19 times more nickel, 16 times more lead, and almost three times more aluminum. Overall, sweat proved more effective than urine at removing 14 out of the 18 heavy metals studied. It also contained larger quantities of 16 out of the 18 metals than the blood samples did.
Click on the image above to view a larger version in a new window
Of all the metals, aluminum was found at the highest concentrations in sweat, with zinc, copper, and nickel also occurring at relatively high amounts in the studied samples.
4. Bisphenol A (BPA):
Researchers examined the blood, urine, and sweat of 20 participants for BPA, an endocrine-disrupting toxin found in canned foods and plastic water bottles, among other things. Of the 20 sweat samples collected, 16 contained BPA, while only 14 urine and 2 blood samples tested positive for the toxin.
Not only does this reveal that sweat is the most effective way of removing BPA build-up in the body, it also shows that testing blood or urine for toxicity levels may not present the whole picture.
When it comes time to break a sweat, there are a host of activities that you can choose from. The majority of exercises and sports will get you sweaty: running/brisk walking, swimming, Bikram yoga, tennis, basketball – the list goes on.
A low impact option is spending time in a sauna. When comparing an infrared sauna to a steam sauna, researchers found that the sweat from the infrared sauna contained more bismuth, cadmium, chromium, mercury, and uranium. The steam sauna caused higher levels of arsenic, aluminum, cobalt, copper, manganese, nickel, lead, tin, thallium, and zinc to be excreted.
It’s important to note that hydration is essential in maximizing the health benefits listed above. Sweating has powerful effects on your health, but not hydrating properly during and after sweating will lead to a host of separate health problems.
An easy rehydration guideline to follow is to weigh yourself directly before and after sweating – the weight lost is the amount of water you should drink after to rehydrate yourself. For reference, one pound of water is slightly less than a ½ liter.
Additionally, sweat contains minerals that are essential to keep your body functioning optimally. After activities where you sweat excessively, it’s important to replace the minerals lost, especially zinc, copper, selenium, chromium, and potassium. Coconut water is a great source of potassium, and nuts, seafood, whole grains, and legumes generally contain relatively high levels of zinc, copper, selenium, and chromium.
Next time you feel yourself tempted to stay on the couch instead of going for a run, or opt to stay in the air conditioning instead of spending time in a sauna, think of all the “sweaty” benefits that you’re not getting! Breaking a sweat might seem like pain, but it’s worth it to keep your internal detox systems healthy and well-functioning.
Iron Rules Of Medicine June 15 2022 | From: DrSircus/ Various
There are just too many professionals out there who just do not have a clue to what is going on in their patient`s lives and that is because they fail to acknowledge and study the Iron Rules of Medicine.
I spoke to a patient the other day who was seeing a doctor, one who is not enemies with natural medicine, who recommended antibiotics to a 69-year-old patient with multiple complaints including kidney infection. The patient instantly discontinued treatments with this antibiotic recommending doctor.
I did not have to break my arm to stick a pH strip in the patient`s mouth and to count how many breaths she was taking in a minute’s time. Her breathing rate was 30 (amazing she already did not have cancer) and her saliva pH was 5.
Want to get ahead of your doctor and learn some of the iron rules of medicine?
Iron Rule Number One
Breathing and oxygen are the foundations for life and health. Oxygen is our most important nutrient and yet when prescribed in a hospital it is a drug.
Most of us never thought that we also eat with our noses meaning the food/nutrient we need most comes in through our nasal passages.
What do we learn from these two simple tests mentioned above? What gets revealed is a person`s approximate oxygen levels, carbon dioxide levels, cellular energy levels (voltage) as well as pH (she was intensely acid.)
Doctors do not know that the faster a person breathes the lower their oxygen, CO2 / bicarbonate levels, pH and voltage go. Fast breathing gets one nowhere except closer to chronic disease, cancer and earlier than wanted death.
How is an antibiotic going to help this 69-year-old woman recover from low energy, oxygen, CO2 and high acidity levels that provide excellent breeding grounds for microbes of all types. Understand that there are fundamental reasons we get infections.
Low oxygen, CO2, cellular energy and too high acidity are breeding grounds for infections. What is the point with antibiotics when they do not treat the underlying cause of infection?
Poisoning people should be against the law but it isn’t if you do it with a doctor’s prescription. Botox is an obvious example yet unfortunately every pharmaceutical, even aspirin, are toxic poisons that cause death in staggering numbers.
Iron Rule Number Three
Conflict and stress are common and real causes of disease including cancer. They have their correspondences in the brain and in all organ systems.
Stress dominates both our breathing patterns and how our hearts beat - beat for beat - meaning stress lays itself out in what is called Heart Rate Variability (HRV).
The higher the stress the tighter the variability between in and every heartbeat. As we flatline, meaning each beat is the same, we flatline in life because of death threatening conflicts and stress. Vulnerable hearts are flexible dancing on each moment of life. Pathologies of the vagus nerve are measurable with HRV.
Dr. R. G. Hamer and his New Medicine spoke of an ‘Iron Rule of Cancer’ in 1981. He mistakenly perceived that every cancer or cancer-like disease originates with a Dirk Hamer Syndrome (‘DHS’) which is a very difficult highly acute, dramatic and isolating shock that affected the psyche,the brain and certain organs.
I say mistakenly because, though he might be correct in most or many cases of cancer it is certainly not the case in all cancers. High levels of radiation or of heavy metals like mercury can also bring on cancer with or without psychological damage and intense stress.
Chemotherapy and radiation therapy, as well as many other toxic shocks are also known to bring on cancer as are massive mineral deficiencies in the body.
The minute hydration levels decline oxygen transport and utilization decline, cell voltage declines, the body becomes more acidic, and the more toxins build up because they cannot be eliminated from the body with efficiency.
All functions within the body require the presence of water. A well hydrated body enables these functions to occur quickly and efficiently.
Iron Rule Number Five
“It seems clear that light is the most important environmental input, after food, in controlling bodily function,” reported Richard J. Wurtman, a nutritionist at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
Without enough sun or administration of sufficient vitamin D we get sick, inflammation takes over our body, and eventually die.
One of the greatest triggers of influenza, the swine flu and deaths from pulmonary deficiency is vitamin D deficiency.
One of the biggest reviews of the role of vitamin D in health found that people who took supplements of the vitamin for six years reduced their risk of dying from all causes.
Studies have already suggested that vitamin D played a key role in protecting against cancer, heart disease and diabetes - conditions that account for 60 to 70 per cent of all deaths in the West.
Mineral deficiencies cause disease as well as cancer. Humans are very much like plants. We need light, water, oxygen, CO2 and minerals. Minerals are the building blocks of our bodies.
They are required for body structure, fluid balance, protein structures and to produce hormones.
They are a key for the health of every body system and function. They act as co-factors, catalysts or inhibitors of all enzymes in the body.
In the absence of certain trace minerals, various heavy metals are more likely to accumulate. Minerals create safety buffers against toxic metals.
Minerals provide the spark for many of the body’s cellular processes and keep them running efficiently. Without these finely-tuned chemical reactions no organism can function.
Radiation damages our bodies by breaking the chemical bonds in our cells. The amount of damage done depends not only on how much radiation we are exposed to but also very much on how mineral deficient we are.
“Psychiatric medications are among the most widely prescribed and biggest-selling class of drugs in the US.
In 2010, Americans spent $16.1 billion on anti-psychotics to treat depression, bipolar disorder and schizophrenia, $11.6 billion on antidepressants and $7.2 billion on treatment for ADHD, according to IMS Health, which tracks prescription drug sales.”
Psychiatric drugs can cause many horrible side effects, some of which are worse than the original condition they were intended to treat. In fact, there is a very clear link between psychiatric medications and the violent actions of the “mass shooters” over the past few years. In many cases, these drugs are harmful and unnecessary.
Caveat lector: I’m not a doctor, nor do I play one on TV. The contents of this article are not meant to replace medical advice. The data presented is for informational purposes only.
There is a theory that most (and some say all) mental illnesses are caused by nutritional deficiencies. The brain is a miraculous creation that must be properly fueled in order to function correctly. Feeding your brain (and body) empty chemically created calories is akin to putting diesel fuel into a gasoline engine.
It sputters and grinds to a halt, and the contamination must be thoroughly flushed out of the system for it to work properly again. Vehicles come with differently shaped fuel-filler openings, to make it difficult to put in the wrong fuel.
Human beings, unfortunately, are not equipped with this type of mechanism and can therefore stuff anything and everything into their mouths and hope their body recognizes it as fuel.
Back to the Brain:
The brain uses 20-30% of a person’s daily caloric intake for the day. If you don’t consume enough calories, verbal fluency, problem solving ability and motivation are affected first. Then bodily functions are decreased in reverse order of necessity for life.
Your brain requires essential fatty acids to maintain proper function. This is one of the many reasons that extreme low-fat diets are not healthy. Fatty acids are required to maintain connections between neurons.
A lack of N3 (aka Omega-3) fatty acids may cause learning and motor disabilities, and may damage the passage of dopamine and serotonin in the frontal cortex. The most vital EFAs are 3, 6, and 9.
Dopamine and serotonin are both crucial to mental health. Dopamine affects the brain processes that control voluntary movements, emotional responses, and the ability to register pleasure and pain. Serotonin is known as the feel-good neurotransmitter. This chemical is related to the ability to resist impulses.
Serotonin (or lack thereof) plays a major role in things like depression, suicide, impulsive behavior, mood control, and aggression. The basic premise is that if these chemicals are not being properly transported in your brain, your mental health could suffer.
A lack of Vitamin D has been linked to depression, schizophrenia, dementia, Parkinson’s disease, and Alzheimer’s disease. Research has suggested that Vitamin D is in actuality a neuroactive steroid, a chemical that is targeted by certain SSRI antidepressants. A lack of Vitamin D can negatively affect the transport of Dopamine.
The best source of Vitamin D is sunlight absorbed through the skin. This may explain the prevalence of depression in the winter, particularly in regions that receive less direct sunlight.
Niacin (Vitamin B3) is an effective treatment for depression, anxiety, schizophrenia and insomnia. In the textbook Orthomolecular Psychiatry, David Hawkins, M.D. and Linus Pauling, Ph.D. outline the protocol for a niacin regimen for mental health. Although this particular book targets the treatment of schizophrenia, the niacin treatment is the same for other mental health issues.
The body cannot store niacin, so it’s important to take this supplement every day. A great resource for information about Niacin can be found here. Here’s how it works:
“In the brain, low levels of the neurotransmitter serotonin are associated with depression. One of the building blocks of serotonin is the amino acid tryptophan, and one of the building blocks of tryptophan is niacin. Tryptophan also helps the body supply itself with niacin.
If tryptophan is divided between serotonin production and niacin production, serotonin production is likely to be inadequate. Supplemental niacin and tryptophan can improve symptoms of depression."
(Think about it – it isn’t cost effective for the pharmaceutical companies because you can’t patent a plant! Supplements containing tyrosine and phenylalanine are said to help with the transport of serotonin and dopamine, as well.
Other vitamins and minerals that are important to mental health are: Vitamin E, Folate (another B vitamin), Magnesium, Calcium, Zinc, Chromium, B12 and B6.
Eating for Good Mental Health
The first line of defense against mental health issues should always be nutritional. Take a good look at your diet and contemplate the fuel you are putting into your body.
Once you’ve made the required adjustments to your diet, start a food/mood journal. It’s very likely you will begin to see a link between certain foods and your state of mind. Around the holidays or when I’m on vacation, sometimes I’ve found myself in a funk; and, generally speaking, I’ve been eating things I don’t normally consume.
Certain foods seem to trigger this for me, particularly commercial bread products. You may discover that the issue is as much about what you avoid as it is about what you eat.
From a preparedness aspect, we know that if the SHTF, we will be undergoing a lot more stress than we do in our current day to day lives.
This tough time could be anything from a job loss to a natural disaster to an economic collapse. It’s vitally important to stock up on foods that promote good mental health, as well as stockpiling vitamins and supplements that can assist you nutritionally in dealing with stressful situations.
Following are some sources of the most important nutrients for good mental health. I take vitamins, but I take them as a SUPPLEMENT – meaning, I try very hard to meet my nutritional needs with food first and foremost.
The human body is a marvelous creation, and it works better when fueled with food and just “topped up” with vitamins. This list is not meant to be comprehensive – it’s just a starting point for your pantry and garden planning.
Niacin [Which is also helful for addiction recovery]
Meat Spelt Fish Bran (Wheat and Rice) Peanuts Marmite Beans
Vitamin D (There are few food sources of this – the #1 way to get it is synthesized from sunshine)
The Real Green Glossary: FAQ & The Great “Global Warming / Climate Change” Alarm Is Part Of The WEF’s “Great Reset” July 13 2022 | From: BreakingViews / GlobalResearch / NZPCR / Various
The innovative manipulation and misuse of the English language is the proudest achievement of that new breed of media entertainers - ‘climate change journalists.’
Attuned to a post-modern society where truth is in the eye of the beholder, reportage of climate science is dominated by fudge and misdirection.
Even the Green Prince has become so confused that he is to publish his own Glossary. The UK Telegraph reports:
"The Prince of Wales will on Thursday launch a "green glossary" for farmers after warning that environmental jargon is so obscure that it can harm efforts to combat climate change."
He said it was vital that everyone "speaks the same language”…
The vocabulary being used by NGOs and scientists was “so hard to understand it even appeared to have been deliberately chosen to hide real meanings.”
That is clearly a step forward – but how are non-farmers to cope?
The following FAQ is a first attempt to fill this vacuum:
1. Does “Climate Change” Mean Changes in the Climate?
No. It means dangerous anthropogenic global warming (DAGW); ie a sharp increase in the global mean surface temperature (GMST) arising from changes in the atmosphere caused by human activities.
The term that climate scientists now use for actual experienced long-term changes in temperatures, rainfall, sunshine hours, etc is “climate variation”.
2. What Does “Scientists Say” Mean?
Nothing. There are millions of scientists and they all say different things. When used by a reputable journalist, it should mean the consensus view in Assessment Reports published by the UN-sponsored Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC).
These reports are generally signed off by most of the world’s governments.
Yes. Over the last 50 years, it has been warming at an average rate of 0.12°C per decade. Since the end of the Little Ice Age in about 1850, the GMST has increased by 1.1°C. At present rates of change, it will increase by a further 0.9°Ç by 2100.
4. Is Planetary Warming Unusual?
No. Since the last glaciation, GMST has fluctuated constantly (it is always either warming or cooling). There are known and unknown regular oscillations caused by planetary orbits, the brightness/magnetic activity of the sun, volcanic and tectonic activity, migrations of ocean currents, etc.
The Medieval Warm Period (MWP) was warmer than now but, around 1150 AD, was followed by the Little Ice Age (LIA) which persisted until about 1850.
5. Is Atmospheric Carbon Dioxide Increasing?
Yes. It is currently estimated to be 0.0042% of the atmosphere, or 420 parts-per-million (ppm) and is currently increasing at an average rate of 2 ppm, as a result of increased emissions from human activities.
The atmospheric concentration of CO2 was at a record low of 280 ppm in 1850 and the increase did not have any evident impact on world climate until it exceeded 330 in about 1950.
Check out the third planet to from the left.
You live there. Do you yet see the size of the lie?
Yes. Humans make infinitesimally small contributions in myriad ways, but mainly by increasing natural emissions of greenhouse gases (GHGs) and by land use change.
The extent of the “advanced greenhouse effect” contribution is unproven and highly controversial.
7. Does Nature Contribute to Global Warming?
Yes. The extent of natural variability and forcing is the subject of a thousand opinions but has never been officially assessed. The remit of the IPCC is restricted to human-caused warming.
While the consensus IPCC opinion is that human activities cause “most” observed warming, sceptics believe natural effects are dominant and the human contribution is trivial.
8. Are There Any “Human Footprints”?
No. The IPCC view that “more than half” of recent global warming was anthropogenic is largely based on the expert judgmentof its WG1 lead authors.
They are mainly modellers – who say that the models cannot replicate past temperatures when the human contribution is omitted. Sceptics say the models are neither verified nor validated and have been criticised for “running hot” by the IPCC itself.
No. Climate is local weather averaged over decades, and local weather is not correlated in any way with trend changes in GMST.
On a worldwide scale, GMST trends are not well correlated with the either the frequency or intensity of extreme weather events such as hurricanes, storms, floods, droughts or wildfires.
10. Is Climate Change “An Existential Threat”?
No. This notion is entirely invented by climate campaigners, and dramatised by politicians/news media. Even the worst case IPCC scenario (combined with the least-accurate computerised models) suggest possible future risk of serious inconvenience only.
The latest Assessment Report (AR5) contains no prediction of widespread mortality rates.
11. Can We “Save the Planet”?
No.Planet Earth was formed about 4.3 billion years before the first humans appeared, and it had more atmospheric CO2 and higher temperatures than now for most of that time.
Extensive use of stored fossil fuels began less than a century ago.
Regenerate: Beyond The C02 Narrative
The science and differing perspectives behind CO2's link to climate change can be dizzying.
Beyond that, there is a story that is not being told about our environment, and it's leading to proposing solutions that will likely cause even further damage to our environment. Regenerate reveals this hidden story, and encourages humanity to reconnect with nature.
12. Would “Net Zero by 2050” Solve Global Warming?
No. At least not by any detectable amount. It cannot apply to the largest emitters – China and India – which will produce the majority of global emissions in the next 30 years. But even if the USA (the next largest) somehow achieved this goal, it would avert only 0.137°C by 2100.
This is barely within the margin of error of measurements.
13. Is “Carbon” a Pollutant”?
No. All human animal and plant life is mainly made of carbon (and water).
Plants are fertilised by carbon dioxide and cannot survive if atmospheric CO2 falls below 250 ppm. The earth’s vegetation has increased by about 14% as a result of the recent growth in ppm.
Barry Brill OBE JP LL.M(Hons) M.ComLaw is a former MP and Minister of Energy, Petrocorp director, and chair of the Gas Council, Power NZ, ESANZ, and EMCO. He is presently the Chairman of the New Zealand Climate Science Coalition.
The UN’s COP26 is a grotesque and decadent spectacle.
We are witnessing Versailles levels of extravagance and hypocrisy. From every corner of the globe, the super-rich, the powerful and the full of puffed-up virtue are gathered in Glasgow to pontificate to the rest of us about how much we are harming the planet with all our waste and hubris.
They arrived in their fleets of private jets to bemoan the scourge of air-industry emissions. They are tucking in to five-star meals in between wondering out loud if the little people should eat less meat.
They’ll rest their weary, virtuous heads on plump, silk pillows after long days of discussing how to rein in the material aspirations of the masses.
It is perhaps the most nauseating display of oligarchical conceit of recent times.
The foregoing is unapologetically uplifted from a recent thundering editorial in Spiked. Brendan O’Neill captures the odious dishonesty of the world’s privileged and powerful as they strut their virtue in a groupthink orgy of piety. I recommend that you read it all.
One by one these elitists are competing to heighten the hysteria … “one minute to midnight” … “code red for the planet”… “an existential threat to humanity”… “greatest moral challenge of our time” … “last best hope for the world” … and on … and on … and on.
Hundreds of highly-paid PR flacks in dozens of countries have sweated out these histrionic phrases. The world’s billionaires and high potentates then humbly volunteered to deliver the gold-plated words personally to Glasgow by private jet and chauffeured limousine. And to be seen there.
But why are 400 private jets parked at airports serving Glasgow? Honestly? Why not deliver the words by email – or even by video if the media need visuals? What do they achieve by their swaggering physical presence? After all, everybody knows that this entire convention is a pretentious charade.
Nobody at the convention hall in Glasgow really needs to be convinced that climate action is a good thing. The hall is an echo-chamber of like-minded enthusiasts.
A committee of 25,000 is never going to make any worthwhile decision that was not pre-approved long before the convention began.
It is all theatre. But it is a very expensive performance, and – with Scotland reporting 400 new infections each day – it is a potentially dangerous performance for over 100 countries.
All attendees are exempted from Scotland’s vaccine passport scheme.
(“All animals are equal but some are more equal than others” - Orwell).
The private jets alone will blast 13,000 tonnes of CO2 into the atmosphere, and their ostentatious presence has been branded “rank climate hypocrisy” and the “nadir of carbon inequality”. But they are no more than the visible tip of an iceberg.
Many of their mega-rich owners – Bloomberg, Bejos, Fink, Gates, Soros, Schwab, the Rockefellers, the Rothschilds – are pouring many more billions into lobbying governments everywhere for their favoured climate policies.
There are literally tens of thousands of professional climate activists working on a full-time basis and drawing wages funded by these “philanthropists”. They make up the bulk of the non-delegates at the Glasgow convention. What hope does common sense or moderation have in the face of such an army of propagandists?
Francis Menton believes that, on balance, it’s a good thing we have these annual COPs, saying:
"I can think of no other comparable activities that put on such dramatic and widely-viewed display the immeasurable foolishness and hubris of our political overlords."
Menton points out that no less than 25 COPs have previously ordered the world to reduce its omissions.
They succeeded in delivering the dismal track record shown in this graph:
While every smug and sanctimonious member of the climate elite can readily churn out 10,000 words about the benefits of “net zero carbon by 2050”, none ever seem to mention the costs.
Or who is to pay those costs. [Clue: it’s not them.]
Both New Zealand and UK governments have released modelling as to the likely costs. While admitting that “nobody knows”, the models suggest a figure of about US$11,000 per household per year.
Contrast this with the 68% of Americans who tell opinion surveyors that they are not prepared to pay more than $10 per month to ameliorate climate change.
Where is the self-awareness of elites who instruct us to “do what we say not what we do":
Al Gore, who predicts 20-foot rises in sea levels has bought a 9-bathroom beach front villa in Montecito, California;
Barack Obama, who declared “the moment when the rise of the oceans began to slow” has acquired a waterfront mansion on Martha’s Vineyard;
When John Kerry recently flew in his family’s private jet to Obama’s 60th birthday party, it was the 16th private-jet jaunt his family has taken this year
The Prime Minister of the Maldives, who mimed an underwater cabinet meeting, built an international airport less than 2 metres above mean sea level;
In the knowledge that limiting population is a key tenet of climate alarmists, Boris Johnson is about to have his seventh child;
Jeff Bezos flew into Glasgow in his Gulfstream jet after attending Bill Gates 66th birthday party in the Mediterranean. At the party 50 guests were choppered from private yachts to a beach;
Closer to home, the New Zealand Green Party MPs fly more kilometres than the MPs of any other party.
Minister James Shaw flew no less than 14 bureaucrats to Glasgow (in business class) for no known benefits to taxpayers – shouldering aside hapless MIQ applicants who have been queueing for months to return to their homeland.
This is a movement that allows the descendants of incredibly wealthy banking families to tell the rest of us to wear a cardie rather than turn on the central heating and which invites literal princes to make sad faces about all the flying and meat-eating the oiks are engaging in.
I said it was a modern version of Versailles, but actually it’s worse than that. At least daft bint Marie Antoinette wanted the lower orders to eat cake (she just didn’t realise they didn’t have any).
This new lot actively campaigns against the consumption of the 21st-century equivalent of cake – meat, heat, easy travel. ‘Don’t let them eat cake’ is the cry of the eco-aristocrat.
The Great “Global Warming / Climate Change” Alarm Is Part Of The WEF’s “Great Reset”
If anyone says to you “the weather extremes are a sure sign of global warming”, it’s because they take this information directly from the media and assume it to be fact.
The media get it from government – or government ‘expert advisors’.
The ‘expert advisors’ get it from a computer modelling exercise (e.g. Imperial College London).
The computer modelling exercise gets it from a large financial incentive offered by the corporate conglomerate and bought-out government, with the explicit instruction to produce a result which fills the needs of their combined political goals.
In this case, to magic-up ‘scientific proof’ that [man-made] global warming is real.
The need to have ‘proof’ that this invention is real is arrived at in spite of the fact that global warming’s main proponents know that the idea was dreamed-up at the Club of Rome in 1972 under a widely publicised treatise with the catchy title ‘Limits to Growth’.
Limits to Growth might have appealed to those who oppose neo-liberal capitalist insistence on the necessity for a ‘permanent growth’ economy; but the real intent behind those words is the conditioning of the receiver to take a self imposed pseudo-sacrificial attitude about ‘limitation’.
Ergo, limiting one’s self for the sake of a ‘higher cause’ – saving the natural environment from Global Warming!
This form of conditioning becomes the perfect precept for encouraging naturally concerned citizens to not just embrace cutting back the typical material excesses of their lives, but ultimately the pseudo-saintly renunciation of all material interests.
The ghoulish plan behind Klaus Schwab’s quasi religious Sermon from the Mount WEF:
“You will own nothing and you will be happy.”
Schwab’s psycho-social engineering ‘deep mind experts’ having planned-out the precise stepping stones necessary for a ‘check-mate’ seamless handing-over of all private wealth to the insatiably materialistic elite masters of deception.
A thoroughly odious yet quite brilliant slight of hand.
The great ‘Global Warming’ alarm was raised as a calculated way for leading industrialists, bankers and royalty to ensure their future as the premier influencers and controllers of global affairs.
Blanket controlled media indoctrination, using rampant fear mongering as its key component, is designed to convert public sentiment to the cause.
The elite industrialist club know full well that ‘fear’ makes desperate people turn to their perceived leaders to protect them – and tell them what to do. The historial precedent for this is ubiquitous.
The notion that the climate was dangerously warming had no scientific evidence to back it up. That was cooked-up later under the auspices of the International Panel on Climate Change (IPPC).
It is more than unfortunate that the great majority of green oriented NGO’s also swallowed the bait and, being by then mostly well funded by corporate backed governments, took the money, closed their eyes and minds – and jumped on board – thus embracing the deadly distortion of their original green commitments.
It is now the turn of Klaus Schwab (director of World Economic Forum) to take up the reins handed down to him by earlier representatives of the small but powerful elite that runs planetary affairs via such puppet heads of state as Bush, Cheney, Blair – and other aspiring despots of that time.
Schwab’s job is to ensure that ‘stop global warming’ goals are fully implemented through the channels of The Green New Deal, Great Reset, Fourth Industrial Revolution, Zero Carbon agenda.
He must get this fake-green ball firmly rolling down the road especially designed for it by highly paid technocrats, whose particular bent is to create an ‘inventory of everything’ to make possible the control of all aspects of life on Earth.
These techno’s view the management of the world as an exercise in accounting. A sterile reductionist mind-set closely linked to robotics and the notion that advanced mechanisation and calculation is superior to the creativity of the human mind.
Hence the WEF’s announcement of the forthcoming ‘Internet of Everything’, the 5G powered Smart City surveillance and control grid which forms the centrepiece of The Great Reset agenda.
An authentic vision that bears no resemblance whatsoever to today’s gigantic corporate led Fourth Industrial Revolution, held up by the WEF masters of deception to be the only solution for ‘greening the planet’. What it actually is, of course, is a wholesale corporate / cabal grab for the control of the world’s primary resources and money supply. The word ‘green’ could hardly have been more butchered.
So with this fake green ideology now at the forefront of the central control global planning elite’s blueprint for a brave new world, the drive is on to utilise every opportunity possible to enforce conditions that constrict mankind’s behaviour patterns to fit the cunningly concocted demands of ‘preventing global warming’.
The great Club of Rome scare story, designed specifically to leave a frightened and confused public completely dependent upon the technocrat ‘experts’ coming up with a ‘life saving solution’ to prevent the planet from frying.
Now, ‘the life saving solution’ to the fictional ‘problem’ the technocrats came up with, has to fulfil the hard-wired goals of this small but very powerful elite that forms the shadow government of the planet. A despotic cabal whose intention is to master-mind the future according to a darkly inflated sense of self importance and superiority over the rest of humanity.
The first thing needed to smooth the way for the unfettered display of such rampant megalomania is to ensure the least possible public resistance. Least resistance to the rolling-out of ‘the grand plan’, whose implementation requires – to make it credible – a continuous process of environmental disruption and degradation.
The cause of this disruption can then be pinned on the advance of the ‘catastrophic’ warming’ – to which all solutions must be ‘technological’. Technological in the sense of high tech, robotic, digital and electro magnetic.
Killing at least two birds with one stone is a popular concept within the ranks of New World Order proponents. So it was found that the effects of a general dumbing-down of brain power could be enhanced when combined with individually targeted mind control, hypnosis and torture, all of which had already been well tested via the US MK Ultra programme.
In this program human beings were ruthlessly experimented upon to find at what point they ‘cracked’ and became controllable tools for carrying out the secret operations needed to undermine the orderly functioning of society and to enact psy-ops, false flag events and even – when deemed necessary, murders.
A variation on these same techniques were used behind closed doors during Covid lockdown, especially in care homes, where genocide has become thematic and old people are considered disposable matter in the cause of ‘stopping Covid’.
Mind control is the central weapon of the elite planners. Its presence is ubiquitous in all aspects of daily life – starting with the TV – a particularly vital component of (State) control of the masses, and extending into all mainstream media operations, cell phone technologies, computer programmes, WiFi and advanced military ‘silent’ weaponry.
There is a wafer thin line of distinction between the process and function of mind control, propaganda and straight indoctrination.
All the above are now being deployed to get the joys of Klaus Schwab’s Great Reset, Zero Carbon, Green Deal and 5G Smart Cities firmly installed in the brain cells of culpable human beings, who are also to be induced to hand-over all their private assets ‘for the cause’.
Do not underestimate the mind bending power it takes to get ordinary folk to embrace the notion “You will own nothing and you will be happy”.
It is nothing less than ‘fear of global warming’ that holds the entire Great Reset / Green Deal invention together.
Without this scary message of ‘disaster if we don’t act’ underpinning it, the future of the New World Order’s master control agenda would fall apart at the seams.
Atmospheric Aerosol Geoengineering (Chemtrails), Covid, 5G, The High Auroral Atmospheric Research Program (HAARP), WiFi, GMO, the chemical saturation of household products and especially foods – are all examples of contemporary weapons whose deployment is sold to us as ‘important progressive science’, but whose true purpose is to suffocate the life force that drives human and environmental vigour, natural health and spiritual vibrance.
Right down to the manipulation and degradation of human, animal and plant DNA and the genome of life itself.
At the end of this egregious mono cybernetic intrusion into the divinity of creation is ‘Robotic Man’. The transhumanist singularity omega point. A soulless cyborg ‘inhuman race’ which gets all its instructions through having its neocortex permanently wired to a central super computer.
This is actually the vision of the evolution of humanity that Schwab’s dark controllers have planned-out to be ‘The New Normal’; making the sentient human race largely obsolete by around 2050 – and almost so by 2030 / 2040.
A human race that will by then have been culled down to approximately one quarter of its current number, if all goes according to plan for the psychopathic architects of the Great Reset/New World Order/Green Deal.
It is vital to grasp that the monstrous Covid invention, whose toxic ‘vaccinations’ are a genocide inducing weapon dressed up as ‘protection’, is just one of the cards in the ‘kill and control’ pack.
A significant one, but one whose manifestation is symptomatic of the demonic bag of tricks available to the insentient perpetrators of raw evil.
Corona Virus and Global Warming are First Cousins
They both owe their creation to exactly the same ‘rabbit from a hat’ conjuring trick.
That of applying the art of deception-hypnosis en masse, in order to make people believe that what is unreal is real – what is fake is actual. And they both use the same fascist control mechanisms to achieve their ends.
Now we have put together the disparate parts of this genocide operation called: The Great Reset (forced totalitarian take-over), Green New Deal (fake green fascism), Zero Carbon (no carbon=no life), Fourth Industrial Revolution (completely robotic workplace) we can recognise that each element is actually integral to the overall plan.
Strung together in this way we can finally see the whole diabolical picture.
It is therefore vital to recognise that we can only be effective in our defence of Life on Earth by seeing and acting on this ‘whole picture’. Not being drawn into treating each symptom as a separate and unrelated crises in its own right. Which is precisely what the instigators want us to do, of course.
For a steadily growing number of people, these dark days are actually having the reverse effect than that intended.
They are stimulating the manifestation of great shafts of counteractive light! Suddenly, tens of thousands are finding a commonality of purpose and joining together to take-on the masters of deception, through standing strong for truth, justice and freedom.
It portends a remarkable shift of emphasis in all our lives. One of truly dramatic proportions that heralds the tangible unfolding of a new era for humanity.
An era in which a dissolving of old barriers of race, class, religion and money – ushers in a profound sense of universal brother and sister hood; a great expansion of the spiritual and a new form of worldwide social and economic cooperation.
Cooperation in which shared humanitarian goals steadily replace the divisive and destructive greed of the profit predicated global market place.
This heart-led flowering of humanity is to be the truly defining factor of the great Global Warming / Covid Scam, as the history books will one day relate.
The overwhelming use of fear and deception has provoked the opposite state to come out of hiding and to manifest as what, for its detractors, will be an unendurable counter force – emanating from none less than the energetic source of Creation Itself.
Such an astounding metamorphosis is now underway, and it has taken an extraordinary, blatant manifestation of darkness to ignite the counteractive fire which is now calling forth a great renaissance of the true powers of man.
This is the age of truth, enlightenment and action.
Take your courage in both hands and step forth! Set your sights on nothing less than disarming and dismantling the technocratic top-down total-control system that attempts to enslave you, me and every sentient human being who seeks to remain true to the deepest values of Life.
It’s Time To Take The Gaia Hypothesis Seriously June 12 2022 | From: Nautilus / Various
Can a planet be alive? Lynn Margulis, a giant of late 20th-century biology, who had an incandescent intellect that veered toward the unorthodox, thought so. She and chemist James Lovelock together theorized that life must be a planet-altering phenomenon and the distinction between the “living” and “nonliving” parts of Earth is not as clear-cut as we think.
Many members of the scientific community derided their theory, called the Gaia hypothesis, as pseudoscience, and questioned their scientific integrity.
But now Margulis and Lovelock may have their revenge. Recent scientific discoveries are giving us reason to take this hypothesis more seriously. At its core is an insight about the relationship between planets and life that has changed our understanding of both, and is shaping how we look for life on other worlds.
Studying Earth’s global biosphere together, Margulis and Lovelock realized that it has some of the properties of a life form. It seems to display “homeostasis,” or self‐regulation. Many of Earth’s life‐sustaining qualities exhibit remarkable stability.
The temperature range of the climate; the oxygen content of the atmosphere; the pH, chemistry, and salinity of the ocean - all these are biologically mediated.
All have, for hundreds of millions of years, stayed within a range where life can thrive. Lovelock and Margulis surmised that the totality of life is interacting with its environments in ways that regulate these global qualities. They recognized that Earth is, in a sense, a living organism. Lovelock named this creature Gaia.
“Life and Earth have been co-evolving in a continuing dance."
Margulis and Lovelock showed that the Darwinian picture of biological evolution is incomplete. Darwin identified the mechanism by which life adapts due to changes in the environment, and thus allowed us to see that all life on Earth is a continuum, a proliferation, a genetic diaspora from a common root.
In the Darwinian view, Earth was essentially a stage with a series of changing backdrops to which life had to adjust. Yet, what or who was changing the sets?
Margulis and Lovelock proposed that the drama of life does not unfold on the stage of a dead Earth, but that, rather, the stage itself is animated, part of a larger living entity, Gaia, composed of the biosphere together with the “nonliving” components that shape, respond to, and cycle through the biota of Earth.
Yes, life adapts to environmental change, shaping itself through natural selection. Yet life also pushes back and changes the environment, alters the planet.
This is now as obvious as the air you are breathing, which has been oxygenated by life. So evolution is not a series of adaptations to inanimate events, but a system of feedbacks, an exchange.
Life has not simply molded itself to the shifting contours of a dynamic Earth. Rather, life and Earth have shaped each other as they’ve co-evolved.
When you start looking at the planet in this way, then you see coral reefs, limestone cliffs, deltas, bogs, and islands of bat guano as parts of this larger animated entity. You realize that the entire skin of Earth, and its depths as well, are indeed alive.
The acceptance of the Gaia hypothesis was, and remains, slow, halting, and incomplete. There are several reasons for this. One is just the usual inertia, the standard conservative reluctance to accept new ways of thinking. Yet Gaia was also accused of being vague and shifting.
Some complained that the “Gaians” had failed to present an original, well‐defined, testable scientific proposition. How can you evaluate, oppose, or embrace an idea that is not clearly stated, or that seems to mean different things to different people? There was certainly some truth to this.
Gaia has been stated many different ways. Also, it didn’t help that Margulis and Lovelock were more than willing to mix science with philosophy and poetry, and they didn’t mind controversy; in fact, I’d say they enjoyed and courted it.
The truth is, despite its widespread moniker, Gaia is not really a hypothesis. It’s a perspective, an approach from within which to pursue the science of life on a planet, a living planet, which is not the same as a planet with life on it - that’s really the point, simple but profound.
Because life is not a minor afterthought on an already functioning Earth, but an integral part of the planet’s evolution and behavior.
Over the last few decades, the Gaians have pretty much won the battle. The opposition never actually surrendered or admitted defeat, but mainstream earth science has dropped its disciplinary shields and joined forces with chemistry, climatology, theoretical biology, and several other “‐ologies” and renamed itself “earth system science.”
The Gaia approach, prompted by the space-age comparison of Earth with its apparently lifeless neighbors, has led to a deepening realization of how thoroughly altered our planet is by its inhabitants.
When we compare the life story of Earth to that of its siblings, we see that very early on in its development, as soon as the sterilizing impact rain subsided so that life could get a toehold, Earth started down a different path. Ever since that juncture, life and Earth have been co-evolving in a continuing dance.
As we’ve studied Earth with space-age tools, seen her whole from a distance, drilled the depths of the ocean floor, and, with the magic glasses of multispectral imaging, mapped the global biogeochemical cycles of elements, nutrients, and energy, we’ve learned that life’s influence is more profound and pervasive than we ever suspected.
All this oxygen we take for granted is the byproduct of life intervening in our planet’s geochemical cycles: harvesting solar energy to split water molecules, keeping the hydrogen atoms and reacting them with CO2 to make organic food and body parts, but spitting the oxygen back out.
In Earth’s upper atmosphere some of this oxygen, under the influence of ultraviolet light, is transformed into ozone, O3, which shields Earth’s surface from deadly ultraviolet, making the land surface habitable.
When it appeared, this shield allowed life to leave the ocean and the continents to become green with forests. That’s right: It was life that rendered the once deadly continents habitable for life.
The more we look through a Gaian lens, the more we see that nearly every aspect of our planet has been biologically distorted beyond recognition. Earth’s rocks contain more than 4,000 different minerals (the crystalline molecules that make up rocks).
This is a much more varied smorgasbord of mineral types than we have seen on any other world. Geochemists studying the mineral history of Earth have concluded that by far the majority of these would not exist without the presence of life on our planet.
So, on Earth’s life‐altered surface, the very rocks themselves are biological byproducts. A big leap in this mineral diversity occurred after life oxygenated Earth’s atmosphere, leading to a plethora of new oxidized minerals that sprinkled colorful rocks throughout Earth’s sediments.
Observed on a distant planet, such vast and varied mineral diversity could be a sign of a living world, so this is a potential biosignature (or Gaiasignature) we can add to the more commonly cited Lovelock criterion of searching for atmospheric gases that have been knocked out of equilibrium by life.
In fact, minerals and life seem to have fed off each other going all the way back to the beginning. Evidence has increased that minerals were vital catalysts and physical substrates for the origin of life on Earth. Is it really a huge leap, then, to regard the mineral surface of Earth as part of a global living system, part of the body of Gaia?
What about plate tectonics and the dynamics of Earth’s deep interior? At first glance this seems like a giant mechanical system - a heat engine - that does not depend upon biology, but rather (lucky for life), supports it.
Also, although we’re probably still largely ignorant about the deeply buried parts of Earth’s biosphere, it’s unlikely there are any living organisms deeper than a couple of miles down in the crust, where it gets too hot for organic molecules.
Yet, just as we’ve found that life’s sway has extended into the upper atmosphere, creating the ozone layer that allowed the biosphere to envelop the continents, more and more we see that life has also influenced these deeper subterranean realms.
Over its long life, Gaia has altered not just the skin but also the guts of Earth, pulling carbon from the mantle and piling it on the surface in sedimentary rocks, and sequestering massive amounts of nitrogen from the air into ammonia stored inside the crystals of mantle rocks.
“Life itself, once it gets started, can make or keep a planet habitable."
By controlling the chemical state of the atmosphere, life has also altered the rocks it comes into contact with, and so oxygenated the crust and mantle of Earth. This changes the material properties of the rocks, how they bend and break, squish, fold, and melt under various forces and conditions.
All the clay minerals produced by Earth’s biosphere soften Earth’s crust - the crust of a lifeless planet is harder - helping to lubricate the plate tectonic engine.
The wetness of Earth seems to explain why plate tectonics has persisted on Earth and not on its dry twin, Venus.
One of the more extreme claims of the Gaia camp, at present neither proven nor refuted, is that the influence of life over the eons has helped Earth hold on to her life‐giving water, while Venus and Mars, lifeless through most of their existence, lost theirs.
If so, then life may indeed be responsible for Earth’s plate tectonics. One of the original architects of plate tectonic theory, Norm Sleep from Stanford, has become thoroughly convinced that life is deeply implicated in the overall physical dynamics of Earth, including the “nonliving” interior domain.
In describing the cumulative, long-term influence of life on geology, continent building, and plate tectonics, he wrote, “The net effect is Gaian. That is, life has modified Earth to its advantage.” The more we study Earth, the more we see this. Life has got Earth in its clutches. Earth is a biologically modulated planet through and through. In a nontrivial way, it is a living planet.
Now, 40 years after Viking landed on Mars, we’ve learned that planets are common, including those similar in size to Earth and at the right distance from their stars to allow oceans of liquid water.
Also, Lovelock’s radical idea to pay attention to the atmosphere and look for drastic departures from the expected mixture of gases now forms the cornerstone of our life‐detection strategies.
Gaian thinking has crept into our ideas about evolution and the habitability of exoplanets, revising notions of the “habitable zone.” We’re realizing that it is not enough to determine basic physical properties of a planet, its size and distance from a star, in order to determine its habitability.
Life itself, once it gets started, can make or keep a planet habitable. Perhaps, in some instances, life can also destroy the habitability of a planet, as it almost did on Earth during the Great Oxygenation Event (sometimes called the oxygen catastrophe) of 2.1 billion years ago.
As my colleague Colin Goldblatt, a sharp young climate modeler from the University of Victoria, once said, “The defining characteristic of Earth is planetary scale life. Earth teaches us that habitability and inhabitance are inseparable.”
In my 2003 book Lonely Planets, I described what I call the “Living Worlds hypothesis,” which is Gaian thinking applied to astrobiology. Perhaps life everywhere is intrinsically a planetary‐scale phenomenon with a cosmological life span - that is, a life expectancy measured in billions of years, the timescale that defines the lives of planets, stars, and the universe.
Organisms and species do not have cosmological life spans. Gaia does, and this is perhaps a general property of living worlds. Influenced greatly by Lovelock and Margulis, I’ve argued that we are unlikely to find surface life on a planet that has not severely and flagrantly altered its own atmosphere.
According to this idea, a planet cannot be “slightly alive” any more than a person can (at least not for long), and an aged planet such as Mars, if it is not obviously, conspicuously alive like Earth, is probably completely dead.
If the little whiffs of methane recently reported by the Curiosity rover turn out to be the signs of pockets of Martian life on an otherwise generally dead world, this would prove that my Living Worlds hypothesis is wrong, and that life can take on very non-Gaia-like forms elsewhere.
But a living world may require more than temporary little pockets of water and energy as surely exist underground on Mars. It may require continuous and vigorous internally driven geological activity. I believe that only a planet that is “alive” in the geological sense is likely to be “alive” in the biological sense.
Without plate tectonics, without deep, robust global biogeochemical cycles which life could feed off and, eventually, entrain itself within, life may never have been able to establish itself as a permanent feature of Mars, as it did on Earth.
As far as we can tell, around the time when life was starting on Earth, both Venus and Mars shared the same characteristics that enabled life to get going here: They were wet, they were rocky, they had thick atmospheres and vigorous geologic activity.
Comparative planetology seems to be telling us that the conditions needed for the origin of life might be the norm for rocky worlds. One real possibility is that Mars or Venus also had an origin of life, but that life did not stick, couldn’t persist, on either of these worlds.
It was not able to take root and become embedded as a permanent planetary feature, as it did on Earth. This may be a common outcome: planets that have an origin of life, perhaps even several, but that never develop a robust and self‐sustaining global biosphere.
What is really rare and unusual about Earth is that beneficial conditions for life have persisted over billions of years. This may have been more than luck.
When we stop thinking of planets as merely objects or places where living beings may or may not be present, but rather as themselves living or nonliving entities, it can color the way we think about the origin of life. Perhaps life is something that happens not on a planet but to a planet: It is something that a planet becomes.
Think of life as analogous to a fire. If you’ve ever tried to start a campfire, you know it’s easy to ignite some sparks and a little flicker of flame, but then it’s hard to keep these initial flames going. At first you have to tend to the fire, blowing until you’re faint, to supply more oxygen, or it will just die out.
That’s always the tricky part: keeping it burning before it has really caught on. Then it reaches a critical point, where the fire is really roaring. It’s got a bed of hot coals and its heat is generating its own circulation pattern, sucking in oxygen, fanning its own flames. At that point it becomes self-sustaining, and you can go grab a beer and watch for shooting stars.
I wonder if the first life on a planet isn’t like those first sparks and those unsteady little flames.
The earliest stages of life may be extremely vulnerable, and there may be a point where, once life becomes a planetary phenomenon, enmeshed in the global flows that support and fuel it, it feeds back on itself and becomes more like a self‐sustaining fire, one that not only draws in its own air supply, but turns itself over and replenishes its own fuel. A mature biosphere seems to create the conditions for life to continue and flourish.
“Life is something that happens not on a planet, but to a planet.."
A “living worlds” perspective implies that after billions of years, life will either be absent from a planet or, as on Earth, have thoroughly taken over and become an integral part of all global processes. Signs of life will be everywhere.
Once life has taken hold of a planet, once it has become a planetary‐scale entity (a global organism, if you will), it may be very hard to kill.
Certainly life has seen Earth through many huge changes, some quite traumatic. Life here is remarkably robust and persistent. It seems to have a kind of immortality. Call it quasi‐immortality, because the planet won’t be around forever, and it may not be habitable for its entire lifetime. Individuals are here for but an instant.
Whole species come and go, usually in timescales barely long enough to get the planet’s attention. Yet life as a whole persists. This gives us a different way to think about ourselves.
The scientific revolution has revealed us, as individuals, to be incredibly tiny and ephemeral, and our entire existence, not just as individuals but even as a species, to be brief and insubstantial against the larger temporal backdrop of cosmic evolution.
If, however, we choose to identify with the biosphere, then we, Gaia, have been here for quite some time, for perhaps 3 billion years in a universe that seems to be about 13 billion years old. We’ve been alive for a quarter of all time. That’s something.
The origin of life on Earth was not just the beginning of the evolution of species, the fount of diversity that eventually begat algae blooms, aspen groves, barrier reefs, walrus huddles, and gorilla troops.
From a planetary evolution perspective, this development was a major branching point that opened up a gateway to a fundamentally different future. Then, when life went global, and went deep, planet Earth headed irreversibly down the path not taken by its siblings.
Now, very recently, out of this biologically altered Earth, another kind of change has suddenly emerged and is rewriting the rules of planetary evolution. On the nightside of Earth, the lights are switching on, indicating that something new is happening and someone new is home. Has another gateway opened? Could the planet be at a new branching point?
The view from space sheds light on the multitude of rapid changes inscribed on our planet by our industrial society. The orbital technology enabling this observation is itself one of the strange and striking aspects of the transition now gripping Earth.
If up to now the defining characteristic of Earth has been planetary‐scale life, then what about these planetary‐scale lights? Might this spreading, luminous net be part of a new defining characteristic?
Chemicals Are Making Us Sterile And Dumb June 11 2022 | From: Sott/ Various
Over the last seventy-five years, men have seen a sharp reduction in reproductive capacity, and evidence suggests that commonly found chemicals are to blame.
If that news isn't stark enough for the future of humankind, these chemicals are also making us dumber. A recent piece in the New York Times drew attention to an important issue: endocrine-disrupting chemicals in everyday consumer products are killing or disabling sperm and making men sterile.
The numbers are extremely troubling. Scientists say that approximately 90% of sperm in a typical young man are misshapen, meaning they are unable to swim correctly. Additionally, sperm counts have decreased sharply over the last seventy-five years. As one researcher bluntly stated, "Not everyone who wants to reproduce will be able to."
Our grandfathers may not have been able to understand our smart phones, but their ability to produce offspring vastly outpaced our own.
There's a great deal of evidence to suggest endocrine-disrupting chemicals are the major cause of this problem. They're found in plastics, pesticides, and many other products. Quite simply, these chemicals disrupt the proper functioning of hormones.
One study by Canadian scientists found that adding endocrine disruptors to Lake Ontario turned male fathead minnows into intersexual fish (fish with both male and female characteristics), which are unable to reproduce. Unfortunately, it is far from the only study positing a link between chemicals and infertility.
The mayhem caused by these chemicals appears to happen in utero, when endocrine disruptors mimic certain hormones and confuse the biological process that turns a fetus into a male.
Chemical exposure, unfortunately, affects far more than just reproductive health. A recent study discussed in The Atlantic details the damage that certain environmental contaminants - including endocrine disruptors, but also lead, ethanol, mercury, arsenic, and more - can have on the brain. These effects include lower IQs, ADHD, autism spectrum disorder, and more.
"Our very great concern," the authors of the new study write, "is that children worldwide are being exposed to unrecognized toxic chemicals that are silently eroding intelligence, disrupting behaviors, truncating future achievements, and damaging societies."
The authors also note that genetic factors account for only 30 to 40% of all cases of brain development disorders. They suggest that environmental exposures to industrial chemicals are causing a "silent pandemic of neurodevelopmental toxicity."
What are federal regulators doing to deal with the rise in infertility and this "silent pandemic" of brain disorders? Not much. Humans have made, found, or used over 50 million unique chemicals, yet federal regulators have tested only 200. And only five of those were deemed harmful enough to be subject to new regulations.
This isn't simply a case of federal agencies being asleep at the wheel. Sometimes it's plain old corruption, as we'll see in the next piece in this week's Pulse of Natural Health.
Genetics Are The New Eugenics: How GMO’s Reduce The Human Population
& This Major Report On GMO Safety Has Just One Small Problem: Undisclosed Conflicts Of Interest June 10 2022 | From: GlobalResearch / Sott
Last year, we had a series of mergers in the agribusiness’ GMO-corporations worldwide. This has created an alarming concentration of corporate power in the hands of basically three corporate groups.
The first one is Bayer AG of Germany, which made a friendly takeover of Monsanto. The reason for this was that Monsanto became identified in the public mind as pure evil and everything bad about GMO’s, which was accurate.
This became a burden on the whole GMO project. So, Bayer stepped in, which has a friendly image of an aspirin, harmless, nice company, but in fact is the company that invented heroin in the 1880’s and made gas for the ovens of Auschwitz during WWII.
It’s one of the dirtiest agribusiness companies in the world with a series of homicides and pesticides that killed off bee colonies and many other things that are essential to life and to nature.
ChemChina – China State Chemical giant – for some reason took over Swiss Syngenta, which makes weed-killers.
Then, Dow Chemicals and DuPont merged their GMO businesses together.
So, we have three gigantic corporate groups worldwide controlling the genetically-modified part of the human food chain.
As dangerous as the GMO crops are and the more they sell, it is becoming more and more obvious that they are the chemicals that by contract must be applied to those GMO seeds by the corporations.
They demand that if you buy roundup ready soybeans or corn, you must use Monsanto (now Bayer) roundup.
Therefore, this is giving more corporate power to the GMO industry than ever before and that’s an alarming trend. They are putting pressure on the bureaucracy in Brussels.
One example: there was a massive public campaign against the renewal of the license of the European Commission for Glyphosate. Glyphosate is the most widely used weed-killer in the world. Glyphosate is the main ingredient in Monsanto’s roundup. The other ingredients are Monsanto’s corporate secret, but the combination of them is one of the most deadly weed-killers.
The World Health Organization’s body responsible for assessing genetic dangers made a ruling the last year that Glyphosate was a probable cancer-causing agent.
The license came up for automatic renewal last year – a 15-year license. The EU commission for health was prepared to automatically renew it for 15 years. The European Food Safety Authority (EFSA), which is responsible allegedly for the health and safety of European citizens, recommended approval based on a German study by the German Food Safety Agency that was simply lifted 100% from studies given by the private corporation Monsanto!
So, the whole chain was corrupt from the beginning and all the information was rigged. In reality tests have shown that in minuscule concentrations, lower than in recommended levels in Europe and in the US, Glyphosate causes kidney disease, liver disease, and other illnesses that are potentially fatal.
Now, Glyphosate has shown up in urine tests, in urban drinking water, in gardens, in ground water and so forth. And that gets into the system of childbearing women, for example, with embryo. It’s all in this!
The EU commission, despite a million petitions – this is a record setting – and despite recommendations from leading scientists around the world to not renew the license, made a compromise under huge industry pressure and renewed it for 18 months. Why did they renew it for that time?
Because at the end of 18 months, they were told by Bayer and Monsanto that the takeover of those two giant corporations will be completed and Bayer is going to replace Glyphosate with another, likely more deadly toxin, but not so well-known as Glyphosate. So, they simply bought time. And that is just one example.
This agenda of GMO is not about the health and safety; it’s not about increasing crop yields – that’s a lie that has been proven in repeated tests in North America and all around the world.
Crop yields for farmers, using GMO plants, may increase slightly for the first 1-2 harvest years, but ultimately decline after 3-4 years.
And not only that! We’ve been promised by Monsanto and other GMO giants that the use of chemicals will be less, because of these “wonderful” traits that GMO plants resist.
In fact, the weeds become resistant and you have super weeds, which are 5-6 feet in a height and choke out everything. It’s a catastrophe.
So, farmers end up using added weed killers to kill the super weeds. This whole mad playing around with the genetic makeup of nature is a disaster from the beginning.
The real agenda of GMO, which I have documented in great detail in my book “Seeds of Destruction”, comes from the Rockefeller Foundation.
It comes out of the 1920s-1930s Eugenics movement. The Rockefeller Foundation during the 1930’s, right up to the outbreak of World War II when it became politically embracing too, financed the Nazi Eugenics experiments of Kaiser Wilhelm Institute in Berlin and in Munich.
Why did they do this? Their goal was the elimination of what they called “undesirable eaters”. That is called population reduction.
After the war, the head of the American Eugenic Society, who was a good friend of John D. Rockefeller, at the annual conference of the American Eugenic Society said:
"From today, the new name of eugenics is genetics”.
Moreover, if you keep that in mind – genetic engineering, the Human Genome Project and so forth – they all are scientific frauds. Russian scientists have proven that the entire Genome Project utterly disregarded 98% of the scientifically valuable data in favor of 2% that was completely nonsense and a waste of billions of dollars.
Therefore, they have been obsessed with the idea of how to reduce human population in a way that would not be so obvious as simply going out and carrying out mass-sterilization.
Actually, they have done that in Central America together with the World Health Organization by giving certain vaccines that they cooked-up to have abortive effects.
The organization of the Catholic Church became suspicious because the shots were given only to women, not to men. And they found that there was buried in the vaccine an abortive effect that made it impossible for women to conceive and bear children. This is all covert population reduction.
These are the Western patriarchs who believe they are the gods, sitting on the throne with great dignity, controlling mankind. I think they are a bunch of fools, but they have this agenda of genetic manipulation. It’s against nature, it’s chemically unstable.
And I have to congratulate the Russian Federation that they had the courage and the moral concern for their own population to ban GMO cultivation across Russia.
That was a step forward for mankind. I would hope that Russia will use its influence to get China to do the similar thing, because their agriculture is in dire need of some healthy Russian input. But this step by Russia to make a GMO-free agriculture is a great step for mankind.
This Major Report On GMO Safety Has Just One Small Problem: Undisclosed Conflicts Of Interest
Researchers allege undisclosed conflicts of interest on a National Academies of Sciences panel. About a year ago, the prestigious National Academies of Sciences, Engineering and Medicine produced a 584-page report assessing the health, environmental, and agronomic impact of genetically modified crops.
The conclusion: GMOs have so far proved to be neither a disaster nor a triumph. They haven't been shown to pose a threat to human health, as some critics have argued they do; but they also haven't discernibly raised crop yields, as some boosters insist they have.
Not surprisingly, the report did little to "end the highly polarized dispute over biotech crops," concluded New York Times reporter Andrew Martin in an article just after the report's release. He added that both sides of the debate "pointed approvingly to findings that buttressed their viewpoint and criticized those that did not."
And a paper, published in the peer-reviewed journal PLOS-One, ups the temperature of that long-simmering debate.
The authors - Sheldon Krimsky, a professor in the Department of Urban and Environmental Policy and Planning at Tufts, and Tim Schwab, a researcher at Food & Water Watch - found that 6 of the 20 scientists who contribute to NASEM's GMO report had ties to the ag-biotech industry that weren't disclosed in the paper.
Five of them "had patents or industry research funding" while they served on the committee, and another one "reported receiving industry research funding" a few years before.
As Krimsky and Schwab note, the NASEM paper states that the GMO assessment, launched only after face-to-face conversations;
"Determined that no one with an avoidable conflict of interest is serving on the committee."
They also uncovered another undisclosed potential conflict: The National Academies of Sciences, Engineering and Medicine, a nonprofit institution, has had substantial funding from the very companies whose products were assessed in the report:
"The organization's annual financial reports do not give exact figures but note that three leading agricultural biotechnology companies (Monsanto, DuPont, and Dow) have given up to $5 million dollars each to the NASEM."
The National Academies even hosted a 2015 workshop on communicating the science of GMO crops to the public, funded in part by Monsanto and DuPont.
The PLOS-One findings do not invalidate the findings of the GMO assessment, of course. Having a financial interest in an industry does not automatically make a scientist incapable of commenting honestly on that industry's products. Fred Gould, professor of entomology at North Carolina State University and the chair of the committee that wrote the report, defended it in an email.
"The one implicit rule on our committee was that if you wanted something to go into the report, you had to back it up with evidence that was acceptable to everyone on the committee," he wrote.
"No one person could steer the committee with an opinion. I welcome people to scrutinize the accuracy of our report." (Gould was not one of the six committee members found by the PLOS authors to have industry ties.)
In a statement, the National Academies of Sciences, Engineering and Medicine denied that members of the committee violated conflict-of-interest disclosure norms. NASEM maintains a;
"Stringent, well-defined, and transparent conflict-of-interest policy, with which all members of this study committee complied," the statement reads. "It is unfair and disingenuous for the authors of the PLOS article to apply their own perception of conflict of interest to our committee in place of our tested and trusted conflict-of-interest policies."
However, NASEM's published policy on the topic mentions "patents, copyrights, and other intellectual property" and "research funding and other forms of research support" as potential conflicts of interest.
William Kearney, deputy executive director and director of media relations for NASEM, said the group sees such relationships as conflicts only when they're worth at least $10,000. By NASEM's reckoning, none of the committee members violated the group's disclosure policy.
All of that said, the undisclosed relationships uncovered by Krimsky and Schwab raise questions about the NASEM's ability to fulfill its mission of providing "nonpartisan, objective guidance for decision makers on pressing issues." And as Krimsky and Schwab also note, the National Academies' problem with conflicts of interest is long-standing.
Back in 2006, the Center for Science in the Public Interest issued a report finding that nearly a fifth of the scientists appointed to one of the group's panels over a three-year period had "direct financial ties to companies or industry groups with a direct stake in the outcome of that study."
The Drugs May Be The Problem - Inconvenient Truths About Big Pharma And The Psychiatric Industry + Psychologist Speaks Out: Psychiatry Is Misleading Public About Mental Disorders June 9 2022 | From: NaturalBlaze / Sott / Various
I borrowed the title from psychiatrist Peter Breggin’s ground-breaking 1999 book Your Drug May Be Your Problem.
Thousands of Big Pharma whistle-blowers like me, along with millions of other skeptics concerning the alleged safety (now disproven) and alleged efficacy (now disproven) of Big Pharma’s often toxic and often addictive psych drugs, are justifiably concerned with the huge influence that the for-profit, essentially amoral, multinational pharmaceutical corporations have over the medical establishment, including the CDC (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention), the FDA (Food and Drug Administration), the NIMH (National Institute of Mental Health) and academic psychiatry.
Many whistle-blowers that have been trying to expose the frailties and fraudulence of the psychiatric drug industry regard Dr Breggin as a mentor, and increasingly, many survivors of psychiatric drug addiction and neurotoxicity feel the same. His books occupy a significant section in my personal library.
I have spent many hours reading and studying Breggin’s books.
Over and over again, I have confirmed the veracity of his evidence and applied his insights in my past practice of holistic mental healthcare, where I saw hundreds of patients who had been seriously sickened by and addicted to irrational cocktails of psych drugs, which has been prescribed in trial-and-error experimental fashions.
Sometimes, when all the psych drugs and their combinations and dosages of drugs had been tried and failed (usually making the patient worse), brain-disabling and seizure-inducing electroshock, the ultimate psychiatric method of last resort, was added, with the predictable loss of employability, personality and memory – both short-term and long-term.
Sadly, because Breggin has been such a big threat to the profitability of Big Pharma and the practice of psychiatry, he has unfairly been regarded as a medical heretic, and therefore he, his courageous truth-telling and his books have been essentially black-balled by psychiatrists and the medical establishment.
Despite the fact that his ideas are considered heretical in mainstream psychiatry, his books continue to be inspirational and educational for psychiatric patients who know that they have been sickened and/or made worse by the use of brain-disabling drugs and electroshock.
Breggin is a giant among psychiatric whistle-blowers and a huge thorn in the side of the super-wealthy and obscenely profitable multinational psychopharmaceutical corporations (and much of academic psychiatry).
He has been influential with free-thinking physicians and feared by establishment types ever since his first ground-breaking book was published in 1991.
That book was titled Toxic Psychiatry: Why Therapy, Empathy and Love Must Replace the Drugs, Electroshock and Biochemical Theories of the ‘New Psychiatry’.
Last year was the 25th anniversary of Toxic Psychiatry’s publication and I dedicated a recent seminar that I did in St Paul, MN to him. It needs to be emphasized that Breggin’s books are virtually banned books in polite medical establishment circles. They are rarely found on mainstream book-seller’s store shelves, and they are absent from hospital libraries that are designed for physician education.
“We are apt to shut our eyes against a painful truth… For my part, whatever anguish of spirit it might cost, I am willing to know the whole truth, to know the worst, and to provide for it.”
- Patrick Henry (1775)
“It would be good for humankind and bad for the fishes if all the drugs were thrown into the sea.”
- Dr. William Osler
“One of the first duties of the physician is to educate the masses not to take medicine…The good physician treats the disease; the great physician treats the patient who has the disease… The person who takes medicine must recover twice, once from the disease and once from the medicine.”
- Dr. William Osler
“Prozac and its successor antidepressants cause sexual dysfunction in as many as 70% of people taking them.”
- Dr Loren Mosher
Among the approximately 2 dozen books Dr Breggin has written during his long career as author and practicing psychiatrist (he is still curing patients at age 80) is his Brain-Disabling Treatments in Psychiatry: Drugs, Electroshock and the Role of the FDA (1997, revised in 2008).
That book exposed the corrupted pseudoscience and out-and-out bribery that has enabled the psychopharmaceutical industry to convince the CDC, the FDA, the NIMH, and academic psychiatry (all of which have enormous power in essentially every medical school and major medical clinic in the nation), to thrive by foisting their potentially addictive, potentially brain-damaging and potentially dementia-inducing synthetic psych drugs (and their potentially brain-damaging electroshock “treatments”) onto an unsuspecting, indoctrinated and often naive healthcare industry (and the brain-washed populace).
Pharmaceutical money in the hundreds of millions are showered upon those supposedly independent groups every year.
Corporate, for-profit “science” has not been recognized as pseudoscience and therefore has been spreading, thanks to the propaganda that is repeated endlessly in the popular media that overwhelms the accurate, unbiased neuroscience research that is published (but not read by most physicians) in relatively obscure journals.
Non-corrupted “pure” science that doesn’t rely on Big Pharma money can only be done if the influence of big money isn’t a factor.
And the journal articles written about that science are being written by conscientious and under-funded research scientists who haven’t been bought or co-opted by the pharmaceutical corporations that are collectively known as Big Pharma.
The full title of Dr Breggin’s 1999 book, co-authored with Dr David Cohen, is Your Drug May Be Your Problem: How and Why to Stop Taking Psychiatric Medications.
Psychiatrist William Glasser wrote the following in the forward to the first edition:
"Nowhere does the false medical thinking (that there is a drug cure for almost all common diseases) do more harm than in the modern psychiatric argument that mental illness is easily diagnosed and then cured by a side-effect-free drug.
Nowhere is the correct psychiatric thinking more evident than in the books by Peter Breggin. In them he explains clearly that patients with mental illnesses are in almost all instances suffering from their inability to connect with important people in their lives and need help in making these vital connections.
He supports safe, drug-free counseling as a more effective way to help people, and I enthusiastically agree with this premise."
Psychiatrist Alberto Fergusson wrote:
"This book is one of the most important things that has happened to psychiatry and especially to so-called ‘psychiatric patients’ during this century.
Having worked for more than 20 years with so-called schizophrenics – the main victims of the abuse by prescribed psychiatric drugs – I can say that Breggin and Cohen must be praised for the courage they have had to unmask many pseudo-scientific conclusions frequently present in supposedly scientific literature.”
Psychiatrist Douglas C. Smith endorsed the book with this:
"One hundred years from now, people will read current psychiatric textbooks with the same incredulity we have about blood-letting and snake oil.
Your Drug May Be Your Problem will be remembered as the turning point and as the beacon that showed the way out of these dark days of widespread psychiatric drugging. Breggin and Cohen provide us with critical information we need to know in order to make informed decisions about psychiatric drugs, including when and how to stop taking them.
They present it all within a coherent philosophy of life and health that makes the routing use of psychiatric drugs obsolete. If you have reached that inevitable point of being disillusioned with your psychiatric drug, this book will be your best friend and guide.”
In 2008, another of Breggin’s ground-breaking books was published. It was titled Medication Madness: A Psychiatrist Exposes the Dangers of Mood-altering Medications. The liner notes say:
"Medications for everything from depression and anxiety to (so-called) ADHD and insomnia are being prescribed in alarming numbers across the country, but the “cure” is often worse than the original problem.
“Medication Madness” is a fascinating, frightening and dramatic look at the role that psychiatric medications have played in 50 case histories of suicide, murder, and other violent, criminal and bizarre behaviors…
“Psychiatric drugs frequently cause individuals to lose their judgment and their ability to control their emotions and actions. The book raises and examines the issues surrounding personal responsibility when behavior seems driven by drug-induced adverse reactions and intoxication.
“Many categories of psychiatric drugs can cause potentially horrendous reactions. Prozac, Paxil, Zoloft, Adderall, Ritalin, Concerta, Xanax, lithium, Zyprexa and other psychiatric medications may spellbind patients into believing they are improved when too often they are becoming worse.
Psychiatric drugs drive some people into psychosis, mania, depression, suicide, agitation, compulsive violence and loss of self-control without the individuals realizing that their medications have deformed their way of thinking and feeling.
The book documents how the FDA, the medical establishment and the pharmaceutical industry have oversold the value of psychiatric drugs. The book serves as a cautionary tale about our reliance on potentially dangerous psychoactive chemicals to relieve our emotional problems and provides a positive approach to taking personal charge of our lives.”
The Tragic Story of the Soteria Project and the Plot to Kill it (A Conspiracy Between Big Pharma, the NIMH and Academic Psychiatry)
“Psychiatry has been almost completely bought out by the drug companies… We’re so busy with drugs that you can’t find a nickel being spent on [non-drug] research.”
- Dr Loren Mosher
Psychiatrist Loren Mosher (who earned degrees from both Harvard and Stanford) was the highly esteemed founder of the experimental “Soteria Project: Community Alternatives for the Treatment of Schizophrenia” from 1971 to 1983.
Five years before his untimely death in 2004, Dr Mosher endorsed Breggin’s Your Drug May Be Your Problem. He wrote:
"Confronting current psychiatric drug prescribing practice head-on is a daunting task and we owe Drs Breggin and Cohen a vote of thanks for openly speaking the truth.
Despite what the pharmaceutical companies would have us believe, we don’t need ‘a better life through chemistry.’ This book will help debunk this myth and provide practical advice on how to avoid psychiatric drugs and get off them.”
The Soteria Project proved that patients with first onset psychotic breaks could actually be cured without the need for coercive, in-patient psychiatry or the so-called “anti-psychotic/major tranquilizer” drug treatments that were considered the standard of care in all of America’s in-patient psychiatric facilities.
One only has to recall Jack Nicholson’s psych ward in One Flew Over the Cuckoo’s Nest where everybody was forced to take the authoritarian Nurse Ratched’s Thorazine at “Medication Time”.
Neither Nurse Ratched, the psychiatrists nor the treatment staff working on Randle McMurphy’s ward had any idea that the antipsychotic drugs that were routinely administered commonly caused permanent iatrogenic brain damage, including tardive dyskinesia, tardive dementia, Parkinson’s disease, brain shrinkage and sexual dysfunction, not to mention a high incidence of the following antipsychotic drug-induced signs and symptoms: akathisia, depression, suicidality, homicidality, disability, unemployability, homelessness, loss of IQ points, chronic constipation, dry mouth, premature death, and general feelings of zombification.
Thorazine, and its sister “first generation” anti-psychotic drugs like Mellaril and Haldol, and every other so-called anti-psychotic drug ever made since then (including the second generation/“atypical” antipsychotics (and even the SSRIs) that wouldn’t come to market until the 1990s, have been found to cause diabetes, obesity, gynecomastia, pituitary dysfunction, cardiac rhythm disturbances, sudden death, etc.
Soteria’s lucky patients had been randomized into the Soteria Project and therefore most of them avoided being falsely labeled as life-long chronic schizophrenics.
Most importantly, most of them didn’t wind up as permanent patients on life-long psych drugs.
If it hadn’t been for the existence of the Soteria Project, they would have instead been sent to a typical coercive Southern California insane asylum, where they were told that they had a non-existent chemical brain imbalance and therefore had to be on dependency-inducing, brain-altering and brain-damaging psychiatric drugs for the rest of their lives.
Because of the luck of the draw many Soteria patients were cured of their temporary psychosis at far less costs of care and without the brain damage.
Some of the Soteria patients went on to lead normal lives following their discharge. In contrast, the vast majority of the patients who had been randomized into the “insane asylums”, wound up chronically drugged with dangerous, untested (for safety) cocktails of drugs, often for the rest of their lives (which were destined to be shortened by 25 years because of the drugs).
Tragically, especially for the millions of future mis-diagnosed (and therefore mis-treated) so-called “chronic schizophrenics” since then, the Soteria Project was sabotaged by Dr Mosher’s own National Institute of Mental Health.
The obviously unwelcome positive findings that were coming out of the Soteria Project were accurately seen by the establishment types in the NIMH, Big Pharma and Big Psychiatry as an economic threat to their industries, and they had to act to subvert the project. Scandalously, the project was defunded in 1983.
Psychology Professor Tells Truth About Psychiatry - "The Emperor Wears No Clothes"
In a posthumously published book (2004), Dr Mosher and his co-authors describe the highly successful innovative, non-drug therapeutic approach that was given to Soteria’s patients by the young, caring, altruistic, but non-professional staff.
The book was titled Soteria: From Madness to Deliverance. It told the story of the noble experiment that managed to alleviate the temporary mental suffering of some otherwise doomed fellow humans who would have been put at risk of permanent life-long drug-induced disabilities rather than given a chance at a cure.
A good description of the project can be read at Robert Whitaker’s Mad In America website.
"Soteria is the story of a special time, space, and place where young people diagnosed as ‘schizophrenic’ found a social environment where they were related to, listened to, and understood during their altered states of consciousness.
Rarely, and only with consent, did these distressed and distressing persons take ’tranquilizers’. They lived in a home in a California suburb with nonmedical caregivers whose goal was not to ‘do to’ them but to ‘be with’ them.
The place was called ‘Soteria’ (Greek for deliverance), and there, for not much money, most recovered. Although Soteria’s approach was swept away by conventional drug-oriented psychiatry, its humanistic orientation still has broad appeal to those who find the mental health mainstream limited in both theory and practice.”
One can appreciate the anguish that Mosher and all the committed and enthusiastic non-professional healers felt when the NIMH pulled the plug on the experiment. Mosher became disillusioned with the APA and eventually resigned.
Loren Mosher’s 1998 Letter of Resignation from the APA: “I want no part of it anymore.”
Here are excerpts from Mosher’s letter of resignation from the APA, a professional trade and lobbying organization to which he had been a long-time member. For good reason, he called the APA the American Psychopharmaceutical Association.
He unintentionally outlines in his resignation letter the well-known strategy of how dysfunctional organizations often try to get rid of their best people (especially the creative and talented ones who also happen to be a threat to the less competent and ingrained upper management types whose positions of power, influence and seniority may be at risk).
Making life miserable for promising up-and-coming employees is commonly orchestrated by threatened superiors by demoralizing the subordinates into quitting the organization.
Such cowardly attacks can avoid controversy and legal entanglements. Mosher felt the pressure and logically resigned, saying “I want no part of it anymore”. Here is some of Mosher’s resignation letter:
"The trouble began in the late 1970s when I conducted a controversial study: I opened a program — Soteria House - where newly diagnosed schizophrenic patients lived medication-free with a young, nonprofessional staff trained to listen to and understand them and provide companionship.
The idea was that schizophrenia can often be overcome with the help of meaningful relationships, rather than with drugs, and that such treatment would eventually lead to unquestionably healthier lives.
“The experiment worked better than expected. Over the initial six weeks, patients recovered as quickly as those treated with medication in hospitals.
“The results of the study were published in scores of psychiatric journals, nursing journals and books, but the project lost its funding and the facility was closed. Amid the storm of controversy that followed, control of the research project was taken out of my hands.
I also faced an investigation into my behavior as chief of the National Institute of Mental Health’s Center for Studies of Schizophrenia and was excluded from prestigious academic events.
By 1980, I was removed from my post altogether. All of this occurred because of my strong stand against the overuse of medication and disregard for drug-free, psychological interventions to treat psychological disorders.
“I soon found a less politically sensitive position at the Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences in Maryland. Eight years later, I re-entered the political arena as the head of the public mental health system in Montgomery County, Md., but not without a fight from friends of the drug industry.
The Maryland Psychiatric Society asked that a state pharmacy committee review my credentials and prescribing practices to make sure that Montgomery County patients would receive proper (read: drug) treatments.
In addition, a pro-drug family advocacy organization arranged for more than 250 furious letters to be sent to the elected county executive who had hired me. Fortunately, my employers were not drug industry-dominated, so I kept my position.
“Why does the world of psychiatry find me so threatening? Because drug companies pour millions of dollars into the pockets of psychiatrists around the country, making them reluctant to recognize that drugs may not always be in the best interest of their patients.
They are too busy enjoying drug company perks: consultant gigs, research grants, fine wine and fancy meals
“Pharmaceutical companies pay through the nose to get their message across to psychiatrists across the country. They finance symposia at the two predominant annual psychiatric conventions, offer yummy treats and music to conventioneers, and pay $1,000-$2,000 per speaker to hock their wares.
It is estimated that, in total, drug companies spend an average of $10,000 per physician, per year, just on “education”.
“And, of course, the doctors-for-hire tell only half the story. How widely is it known, for example, that Prozac and its successor antidepressants cause sexual dysfunction in as many as 70% of people taking them?…
“Recently, it was dues-paying time for the American Psychiatric Association, and I sat there looking at the form. I thought about the unholy alliance between the APA and the drug industry.
I thought about how consumers are being affected by this alliance, about the overuse of medication, about side effects and about alternative treatments.
I thought about how irresponsibly some of my colleagues are acting toward the general public and the mentally ill. And I realized, I want no part of it anymore.”
The demise of the Soteria Project is just another of the multitude of daily examples of amoral, non-human, sociopathic corporations doing what is best for their bottom line and not what is best for the people that are targets of their dangerous products. We are all poorer for their actions.
Psychologist Speaks Out: Psychiatry Is Misleading Public About Mental Disorders
Dr. Toby Watson, a clinical psychologist is the former Chief Psychologist for the State of Wisconsin Department of Corrections, and the past International Executive Director of the International Society of Ethical Psychology and Psychiatry (ISEPP).
He is an outspoken critic of psychiatric industry's claim that mental disorders are biological or medical conditions despite the fact there are no scientific or medical tests to back up this claim.
He has submitted written testimony and research to the FDA on the dangers of SSRI antidepressants and Electroshock; he has testified before the Congress of Mexico against psychotropic drugging of children and for 15 years has educated the courts and people about the harmful outcomes of psychiatric treatment, including how psychotropic drugs can cause violent and suicidal behavior.
A Quick Review Of Fake Medical Diagnostic Tests + Author Exposes The “Vaccine Deep State”- A Massive Criminal Fraud And Embezzlement Ring Inside The CDC June 8 2022 | From: JonRappoport / NaturalNews
Over the years, during my investigations of deep medical fraud, I’ve uncovered diagnostic tests that are wrong-headed, misleading, and fallacious.
1: Antibody test. This is given to detect the presence of a specific germ in a human. However, prior to 1985, a positive test was generally taken as a sign of good health: the patient’s immune system detected the germ and defeated it.
However, after 1985, public health agencies and doctors reversed field. They claimed a positive test showed the person was ill or was going to become ill. No true science backed up this claim.
In fact, a vaccine purportedly produces antibodies and, therefore, is said to confer immunity - but the very same antibodies, generated naturally by the body, signal illness. This is absurd.
2: The PCR test. The Polymerase Chain Reaction tests for the presence of virus in a patient. It takes a tiny sample, which technicians assume is a genetic piece of a virus far too small to observe, and amplifies it many times, so it can be identified.
But in order to cause disease in a human, a huge quantity of virus (easily observed without the PCR) needs to be present. Therefore, a PCR test-result indicates nothing about disease - except that medical personnel couldn’t find enough virus in a person, to begin with, to assume the person was ill or would become ill.
3: MRI brain imaging. As I reported this morning, a significant bug in the software had been discovered in 2015. The software, not medical personnel, is responsible for creating the brain images. Therefore, 40,000 published papers relying on MRI results have been invalidated.
4: All tests resulting in a diagnosis of any of the 300 officially certified mental disorders. There are no definitive tests. No blood, saliva, hair tests. No genetic assays. No brain scans. All so-called mental disorders are diagnosed on the basis of consulting menus of behaviors. This is pseudoscience.
5: All tests designed to assess the effectiveness of vaccines. The only marker is: does the vaccine produce antibodies in a human. But antibodies are only one aspect of the immune system. They aren’t the whole picture. There are numerous studies that reveal vaccinated persons coming down with the disease against which they were supposedly protected.
Food for thought: “Publications by the World Health Organization show that diphtheria is steadily declining in most European countries, including those in which there has been no immunization. The decline began long before vaccination was developed.
There is certainly no guarantee that vaccination will protect a child against the disease; in fact, over 30,000 cases of diphtheria have been recorded in the United Kingdom in fully immunized children.” (Leon Chaitow, Vaccination and Immunization, p. 58.)”
6: Unsupported claims from public health officials. No tests at all. For example, at the height of the so-called Swine Flu epidemic, in the fall of 2009, the CDC secretly stopped counting cases in America.
Why? Because the overwhelming percentage of blood samples taken from the most likely Swine Flu patients, sent to labs, were coming back with no trace of Swine Flu or any other kind of flu.
In other words, the epidemic was a dud and a hoax. Based on this vacuum of evidence, the CDC went on to estimate that, in America, there were 22 MILLION cases of Swine Flu.
But don’t worry, be happy. Keep your mouth shut and obey all doctors’ orders.
Author Exposes The “Vaccine Deep State”- A Massive Criminal Fraud And Embezzlement Ring Inside The CDC
One of the most explosive books you’ll ever read that documents the shocking criminal enterprise known as the CDC - including details of fraud, cover-ups and embezzlement - is called Master Manipulator - The Explosive True Story of Fraud Embezzlement and Government Betrayal at the CDC by James Ottar Grundvig. You can find the book at this Barnes & Noble link.
The book is published by Skyhorse Publishing, which I consistently find to be the single most courageous publisher of truth books in America. Time and time again, so many of the best titles exposing fraud, corruption and criminality inside the “status quo” are published by Skyhorse.
The foreward for Master Manipulator is written by none other than Sharyl Attkisson, and the introduction is penned by Robert F. Kennedy, Jr. who states:
"This is a story of how CDC used a con man to gull the public and ended up getting conned itself! Poul Thorsen is a world-class villain whose manipulation of health data gave CDC and big pharma what they wanted: a report clearing thimerosal of any possible role in the autism crisis.
His story merits a book length expose because the fraud he casually helped orchestrate has had a monumental impact on the health of millions of children globally."
Master Manipulator is a must-read for anyone hoping to be truly informed about the depths of criminality and fraud inside the CDC, “science” and the vaccine industry. One section in particular is especially noteworthy.
It’s called the “Vaccine Deep State.” I’m reprinting part of that section of the book below. Buy the book yourself at Barnes & Noble to read more. (RELATED: Follow more news about the deep state at DeepState.news.)
The Vaccine Deep State
The monolith of the CDC-FDA-NIH is supposed to be separated by a divide with the big pharma vaccine producers. But since the NIH rejected the Swedish scientist’s brief that all thimerosal should be removed from vaccines in 1992, there has been little to no separation of powers, policies, messaging, or enforcement between government oversight and industry manufacturers.
The separation of church and state doesn’t exist anymore in the vaccine industry, not with Vaccine Court squashing all comers, the Dick Armey “Lilly Rider” slipped into the 2002 Homeland Security Act, and the FDA’s approval to double the doses of aluminum adjuvants in several vaccines.
Vaccines today are part of a program rife with ROT and deception.
In a September 2007 hearing by the Committee on Health, Education, Labor and Pensions for “Thimerosal and Autism Spectrum Disorders: Alleged Misconduct - this was a case of one hand washing the other.
It read: While the five studies in question may have varying connections to the CDC and/or vaccine manufacturers, their value to consideration of an alleged link between vaccines and autism is a matter for the experts of the ISR Committee, and not for Congress.
What the findings got wrong by one half of the government to keep Congress in its place, since they were not qualified to review scientific data, as good as the “experts” that false assertion was nothing more than a ruse, a smokescreen.
What Congress needs to do is evaluate the human side of this tragedy and ongoing fraud. It has nothing to do with science - no scientific expertise is required, just the nose to follow the money.
It has everything to do with corruption, cover-up, relentless greed, pulling the ripcords on golden parachutes, shielding vaccine makers from harm, all while exposing millions of babies, children, and people around the world to great harm.
Congress needs only to examine agendas, follow the email trails, and begin to pull the weeds that have infested the CDC, FDA, and NIH lawn, removing all of the ROT as they should have done in 1990 with the Agent Orange finding.
Had they done that, then maybe Coleen Boyle would have become a librarian instead of the director of NCBDDD, and Diana Schendel would have done good collaborative studies instead of the studies that had a fixed objective to show no association, and maybe Poul Thorsen wouldn’t have been invited to come to the CDC as a visiting professor or been able to secure funding for the cooperative agreements because the “hunt for good data” never would have taken place.
Why is it so hard for mainstream media, independent journalists, and government officials on both sides of the aisle to grasp the dangers of micro small toxins?
If they believe that the unseen greenhouse gas particulates and molecules can superheat the world and change climate, why is it so hard to believe that traces of mercury and aluminum in vaccines have harmed so many once promising, healthy children for the past two decades?
If a grown man can die from a tiny amount of venom in a bee sting, then why is it so hard to believe that trace amounts of metals in babies who weight from seven to twenty-five pounds can have adverse reactions to being injected with toxins, especially when all of their bodies - from the central nervous and immune systems to the brain and lungs - are under development?
“Less is more” is a motto that our politicians need to take up with the Vaccine Deep State and rein it in. If they cannot do it, don’t have the will to do it, don’t have the balls to do it, or won’t expend the political capital to do it, a tipping point will soon one day force there hand.
When will that occur? When 1 in 40 babies are born on the spectrum? One in 25 babies born? How about 1 in 10?
Will the rate of autism incidence have to soar to that sky high number for our government to react and belatedly realize that the autism epidemic has been real all along, and its long-over due to do something about it?
The next generation, who will be born over the next decade, is awaiting your call to action. Will you act?
New Zealand Doctors Speaking Out On Deaths Following 'Vaccinations' - “Let’s Make Our Police And MPs Put A Stop To This Now!”& A Primer On The WHO, The Treaty, And Its Plans For Pandemic Preparedness + Monkeypox Was A Table-Top Simulation Only Last Year June 7 2022 | From: TheExpose / ThePulse / TheEpochTimes / Various
Recently New Zealand Doctors Speaking Out with Science (“NZDSOS”) published an open letter on the need to investigate deaths following vaccination, of which “an unredacted version is being prepared for the Police.”
NZDSOS is a group of doctors, dentists, pharmacists and veterinarians and has formed alliances with other groups both locally and internationally: “We are not alone. We are one of many.”
“We appeal AGAIN to the Police, headed by Andrew Coster, and our MPs, to intervene to protect the People,” NZDSOS states in their letter titled ‘Deaths Following C-19 Vaccination’.
"There is a shockingly large burden of deaths and injuries following the Covid-19 vaccines, of itself and compared to any other treatment or vaccine in modern times.
We report many cases that DEMAND proper investigation, as befits any medication lacking safety studies.
Our surveillance systems have been disabled in order to hide the extent of harm. Adverse event reporting is NOT COMPULSORY, and this alone undermines any attempt to portray the injections as safe.
Children and young people are dying and suffering particularly cardiac injuries (though many healthy elderly have died too), whilst their risk from covid-19 is particularly low. We believe we are being lied to. We present many cases halfway down this post."
The Health Forum volunteers have backgrounds in healthcare, science and information technology, and have received training and support from epidemiology and database professionals.
“The volunteers who collate the reports work hard to verify their accuracy, and it is often months for the complete or important details to be obtained,” NZDSOS’s letter states.
"The Citizen’s Database is the result of an alarming lack of official response to the clear pattern of significant harm from the Pfizer injection program.
Children and adults of all ages continue to die and be injured in appalling numbers around the world and here at home.”
“It is absolutely essential that some sort of register is kept since the product is experimental, reporting systems around the world were already showing very alarming signals even before our NZ rollout began, and these have continued to do so.
Most astonishingly, it is not mandatory for health workers to report vaccine side effects here in NZ.
In fact, it is true to say that we are lacking an effective regime of pharmacovigilance entirely for this single reason only, given that this IS an experimental drug trial,” NZDSOS’s letter notes.
At the time of writing, the Citizen’s Database had recorded nearly 500 deaths in New Zealand post-Covid injections.
At the end of their open letter, NZDSOS lists about a third of these deaths.
“Note just how many dead people are young, children even, and suffer sudden, unexpected deaths, typically from blood clots affecting brain or heart,” writes NZDSOS.
After listing several reasons why this is happening, including a section titled ‘Blood Money?’, NZDSOS answers the question: Put it all together and what have you got?
NZDSOS concludes: “There is an evolving humanitarian crisis, and the government, police, vaccine industry and most doctors are lost at sea. For God’s sake, people, let’s make our police and MPs put a stop to this now!”
About halfway through their letter NZDSOS dedicated a section directed to the Police (see below).
To The New Zealand Police, Who Have the Actual Patient’s Names, We Say This:
It is not enough to hide behind apparently controlled, failed or corrupted government institutions.
You are here to defend the public good. Period. You are supposed to know wrong from right; lies from truth.
You have ignored 3 open letters from our legal colleagues discussing vaccine harms, and alleging serious vaccine contamination.
Evidence we have submitted that alleges the same and suggesting criminal dereliction by the Medsafe regulator has been denied by Police commanders, who say it does not reach a standard representing harm.
Yes, it is all indeed “preposterous”. They shelter behind Medsafe’s responsibility to investigate but they refuse to act in the face of it’s inaction. As we have said before, your vaccinated staff belong to the wider citizenry receiving these contaminated products.
We are alleging death by regulatory failure, as you know. You will see in the summarised death reports (representing a third of over 450 available) that there are some allegations of professionals and Police deviating from the usual processes that should follow a possible death from medical treatment.
Of course, the unredacted list we give you is absolutely confidential except as needed for your formal investigations.
If one human being can behave in a compromised way in organisations where control and intimidation come down from on high, it is very likely – inevitable even – that many others will too, thus enabling a system-wide collusion that may not be obvious to individual actors, who see themselves ‘just a cog in the wheel’.
Some of these people do feel a personal or collective guilt, so then an instinct to press on, to keep quiet, enabled by their superiors and being in far too deep to pull back or speak out by this stage.
We have spoken to a few workers who are convinced their lives would be at risk if they go public, even with whistle-blower protection laws.
A few claim they have precedents for these views, which is truly shocking for us to hear. May these people have a safe arena in which to tell their stories soon.
Plenty of evidence has gone to file number 220215/0669. Here is some more. We allege fraud on the PCR test. This evidence is now a year old but Dr Jessica Rose, a statistician, has just used the Wayback machine to show real-time scrubbing of incriminating evidence of pre-planning.
Here at home, through Official Information Act requests; by following the course of individual reports made to CARM; and by questioning individuals involved, we say there is enough deception, denial, obfuscation and opacity to suspect cover-ups of evidence of harms, even down to the of deleting injury reports made by patients directly to Medsafe and MoH itself.
We know that the MoH pre-screens reports of injury and deletes some before sending the rest on to the Centre for Adverse Drug Monitoring (CARM), a private organisation headed by Professor Michael Tatley at Otago University.
Both he and MoH each say the other has final responsibility for attribution of vaccine to the injury, but there are other individual players, committees and apparent ‘black box’ mechanisms to complicate things further.
If you wanted, you could simply interrogate the government’s Covid Immunisation Register (CIR) and cross-check against the Register of Births and Deaths. Or we will do it if you can get us access to the raw data. But we see you are busy recruiting your new “Covid enforcers” to start 1st September.
Wouldn’t it be better to train more detectives to investigate all these deaths, and find any criminals responsible? Or are they somehow protected?
The above are a few extracts from a lengthy letter filled with important information. Please read the full letter, ‘Deaths Following C-19 Vaccination’, HERE, especially if you are in New Zealand or have friends or family that live there.
A Primer On The WHO, The Treaty, And Its Plans For Pandemic Preparedness
The World Health Organization (WHO), whose constitution defines health as ‘a state of physical, mental and social well-being, not merely the absence of disease or infirmity,’ has recently orchestrated remarkable reversals in human rights, poverty reduction, education, and physical, mental and social health indices in the name of responding to the Covid-19 pandemic.
WHO proposes to expand the mechanisms that enabled this response, diverting unprecedented resources to addressing what in terms of history and disease are rare and relatively low-impact events.
This will greatly benefit those who also did well from the Covid-19 outbreak, but has different implications for the rest of us. To address it calmly and rationally, we need to understand it.
Building a New Pandemic Industry
The World Health Organization (WHO) and its Member States, in concert with other international institutions, is proposing, and currently negotiating, two instruments to address pandemics and widely manage aspects of global public health.
Both will significantly expand the international bureaucracy that has grown over the past decade to prepare for, or respond to, pandemics, with particular emphasis on development and use of vaccines.
This bureaucracy would be answerable to the WHO, an organization that in turn is increasingly answerable, through funding and political influence, from private individuals, corporations and the large authoritarian States.
These proposed rules and structures, if adopted, would fundamentally change international public health, moving the center of gravity from common endemic diseases to relatively rare outbreaks of new pathogens, and building an industry around it that will potentially be self-perpetuating.
In the process, it will increase external involvement in areas of decision-making that in most constitutional democracies are the purview of elected governments answerable to their population.
WHO does not clearly define the terms ‘pandemic’ and ‘public health emergency’ that these new agreements, intended to have power under international law, seek to address.
Implementation will depend on the opinion of individuals – the Director General (DG) of the WHO, Regional Directors and an advisory committee that they can choose to follow or ignore.
As a ‘pandemic’ in WHO parlance does not include a requirement of severity but simply broad spread – a property common to respiratory viruses – this leaves a lot of room for the DG to proclaim emergencies and set the wheels in motion to repeat the sort of pandemic responses we have seen trialed in the past 2 years.
Responses that have been unprecedented in their removal of basic peace-time human rights, and that the WHO, Unicef and other United Nations (UN) agencies have acknowledged to cause widespread harm.
Watch + Share This Critical Video on IHR Amendments + WHO's Global Pandemic Treaty
We must not let unelected WHO officials gain control with unfettered authority to make health decisions for the world + usurp every nation-state's sovereignty.
This has potential to be a boon for Big Pharma and their investors who have done so well out of the last two years, concentrating private wealth whilst increasing national indebtedness and reversing prior progress on poverty reduction.
However, it is not something that has just appeared, and is not going to make us slaves before the month is out. If we are to address this issue and restore societal sanity and balance in public health, we need to understand what we are dealing with.
Proposed International Health Regulations (IHR) Amendments
The IHR amendments, proposed by the United States, build on the existing IHR that were introduced in 2005 and are binding under international law.
While many are unaware of their existence, the IHR already enables the WHO DG to declare public health emergencies of international concern, and thereby recommend measures to isolate countries and restrict movement of people.
The draft amendments include proposals to:
Establish an ‘emergency committee’ to assess health threats and outbreaks and recommend responses.
Establish a ‘Country review mechanism’ to assess compliance of countries with various recommendations / requirements of WHO regarding pandemic preparedness, including surveillance and reporting measures. This appears to be modeled on the UN’s human rights country review mechanism. Countries would then be issued with requirements to be addressed to bring them into compliance where their internal programs are considered inadequate, on the request of another State party (country).
Expand the power of the WHO DG to declare pandemics and health emergencies, and therefore recommend border closures, interruption and removal of rights to travel and potentially internal ‘lockdown’ requirements and send teams of WHO personnel to countries to investigate outbreaks, irrespective of the findings of the emergency committee and without consent of the country where the instance is recorded.
Reduce the usual review period for countries to internally discuss and opt out of such mechanisms to just 6 months (rather than 18 months for the original IHR), and then implement them after a 6-month notice period.
Empower Regional Directors, of which there are 6, to declare regional ‘public health emergencies,’ irrespective of a decision by the DG.
These amendments will be discussed and voted on at the World Health Assembly on May 22-28, 2022. They only require only a simple majority of countries present to come into law, consistent with Article 60 of the WHO constitution.
For clarity, this means countries such as Niue, with 1,300 people, have an equal weight on the voting floor as India, with 1.3 billion people.
Countries must then signal intent to opt out of the new amendments within 6 months.
Once approved by the WHA, these measures will become legally binding.
There will be heavy pressure applied to governments to comply with the dictates of the WHO DG and the unelected bureaucrats that comprise the organization, and thereby also the external actors who are influential in WHO decision-making processes.
Proposed WHO Pandemic ‘Treaty’
The WHO proposes a new ‘instrument’ to allow it to manage pandemics, with force of a convention under international law.
This has been formally discussed within WHO since early 2021, and a special session of the WHA in November 2021 recommended it go to a review process, with a draft to be presented to the World Health Assembly meeting in Q2 2023.
This proposed treaty would give WHO powers to:
Investigate epidemics within countries,
Recommend or even require border closures,
Potentially recommend travel restrictions on individuals,
Impose measures recommended by the WHO which, based on Covid-19 experience, may include ‘lockdowns,’ prevention of employment, disruption of family life and internal travel, and mandated masks and vaccination,
Involve non-state actors (e.g., private corporations) in data gathering and predictive modeling to influence and guide pandemic responses; and in implementing, including providing commodities for, the response;
Impose censorship through control of, or restrictions on, information the WHO considers to be ‘mis-information’ or ‘dis-information’, which may include criticism of the measures WHO imposes.
Notably, it envisions the setting up of a large entity within WHO to support permanent staff whose purpose is to undertake and enforce the above measures.
This sounds very similar to the ‘GERM’ entity proposed recently by Mr Bill Gates, a wealthy US software developer with major pharmaceutical investments, who is the second largest funder of the WHO and one of a number of ‘billionaires’ who have greatly increased personal wealth during the Covid-19 response.
“The World Health Organization has started drafting a Global Pandemic Treaty on pandemic preparedness that would grant WHO absolute power over global biosecurity, such as the power to implement digital identities / vaccine passports, mandatory vaccinations, travel restrictions, lockdowns, standardized medical care and more.
This Pandemic Treaty, if implemented, will change the global landscape and strip you and me of some of our most basic rights and freedoms.
Make no mistake, the WHO Pandemic Treaty is a direct attack on the sovereignty of its member states, as well as a direct attack on your bodily autonomy.”
The proposed treaty would prioritize vertical structures and pharmaceutical approaches to pandemics, reflecting approaches by Gavi and CEPI, two organizations set up in the past decade in parallel to the WHO.
It would create another bureaucratic structure on pandemics, not answerable directly to any taxpayer base, but imposing further support, reporting and compliance requirements.
Process, Acceptance and Implementation
These two mechanisms for increasing direct WHO control of pandemics have strong backing from private sector funders of the WHO, and from many national governments, starting with Western governments who adopted Covid draconian measures.
To come into practice they must be adopted by the WHA and then be agreed, or ratified, by national governments.
The proposed IHR amendments modify an existing mechanism. A simple majority of States present at the WHA voting against them at the May 2022 meeting would also reject them, but this appears unlikely.
To prevent their application, sufficient individual countries will need to signal non-acceptance or reservations after the coming WHA and WHO DG’s notice of adoption, so probably before the end of November 2022.
With regard to the proposed treaty, a two-thirds majority at the 2023 WHA will be required for its adoption, after which it will be subject to national ratification by processes which vary according to national norms and constitutions.
Funding for the large increase in bureaucracy proposed to support both mechanisms will be necessary – this may be partially diverted from other disease areas but will almost certainly require new, regular funding.
Other mechanisms in parallel are already being discussed, with the World Bank also proposed as the home for a similar bureaucracy to manage pandemic preparedness, and the G20 mulling their own mechanism.
It is unclear whether these would be tied into the WHO’s proposed treaty and IHR mechanisms or be presented as a ‘rival’ approach.
The G20 task force of the WB and WHO suggest a $10.5 billion additional annual budget for pandemic preparedness is required.
With such potential financing on offer, and the promise of building powerful institutions around this pandemic preparedness agenda, there is going to be much enthusiasm and momentum, not least from institutional staff and the global health community in general, who will sense lucrative employment and grant opportunities.
THE PLAN shows the official agenda of the World Health Organization to have ten years of ongoing pandemics, from 2020 to 2030.
This is revealed by a WHO virologist, Marion Koopmans. You will also see shocking evidence that the first pandemic was planned and abundantly announced right before it happened.
While all this depends on money being available, a refusal of countries to fund may not be sufficient to prevent it, as there is considerable private and corporate interest in the treaty and related proposals.
The same entities that benefited heavily financially from the Covid-19 response will also stand to benefit from an increased frequency of similar responses.
Whilst pandemics are historically rare, the existence of a large bureaucracy dependent on their declaration and response, coupled with the clear gains to be made by influential funders of the WHO, raise a strong risk that the bar to declaring emergencies, and imposing human rights restrictions on States, will be far lower than before.
Independent States are not however directly subject to the WHO, and adopting these amendments and treaties will not automatically allow the WHO to send teams across borders.
Treaties must be ratified according to national processes and constitutions. If accepted by the WHA, it will however be difficult for individual States to avoid compliance unless they are particularly influential on the WHO itself.
International financial agencies, such as the IMF and World Bank, can also exert considerable pressure on non-complying States, potentially tying loans to implementation and commodity purchase as the World Bank has done for the COVID-19 response.
The IHR amendments also allow measures to be taken such as interrupting international travel that can be economically very harmful to small States, irrespective of the State providing permission.
Powerful States that are highly influential on the DG election may also in practice be subject to different levels of implementation than smaller ones.
There seems at least two feasible scenarios for preventing the adoption of the two new mechanisms.
Firstly, the populations in democratic donor States, who have most to lose in terms of autonomy, sovereignty and human rights and whose taxes will predominantly fund these institutions, can stimulate open debate leading to decisions of national governments to reject the treaty at the WHA, and/or otherwise refuse to ratify.
Secondly, large blocs of countries could refuse to ratify or subsequently comply, making the treaty and IHR amendments unworkable.
The latter is conceivable if, for instance, African nations perceive all this as a form of neo-colonialism that needs to be fought in the name of independence.
The Spanish Flu (1918-19), killed 20-509 million people. Most died due to secondary bacterial infection, as this was before availability of any modern antibiotics.
The 1957-58 influenza outbreaks that killed about 1.1 million people each
The 1968-69 influenza outbreak that also killed about 1.1 million
Swine Flu in 2009-10 killed about 120,000 to 230,000.
Lastly, COVID-19 (2020-22) is recorded by WHO as contributing to the death of several million, but most in old age with other severe comorbidities, so actual figures are difficult to assess. As this indicates.
Pandemics have therefore been rare – once per generation.
For context, cancer kills many more people each year in Western countries than Covid-19 at its height, tuberculosis kills 1.6 million people every year (much younger than Covid-19) and malaria kills over half a million children annually (barely affected by COVID-19).
However, as pandemics are very loosely defined by WHO, it Is not unreasonable to assume that a large bureaucracy dependent on pandemics to justify its own existence, and heavily invested in surveillance for new strains of virus, will find reason to declare far more pandemics in the future.
COVID-19 is the first pandemic in which mass lockdowns, including border closures, workplace closures and prolonged school closures, have been used on a large scale.
It is worth remembering that 1969 is remembered for the Woodstock music festival more than the ‘Hong Kong flu,’ a pandemic that targeted young people more than Covid-19.
Human rights and economic health did not suffer such declines in any of these prior events.
These new approaches used in the Covid-19 response have resulted in wide disruption of supply lines and healthcare access, increases in early marriage / enslavement of women, mass loss of education of children, and increases in current financial inequality and educational (so future) inequality.
Many low-income countries have increased debt and undergone recession, which will reduce future life expectancy, while child deaths have increased, including from former priority diseases such as malaria.
It provides some support for low-income country health systems where local technical expertise is lacking.
It has country offices in most countries, 6 regional offices, and a global office in Geneva. It is a hierarchical organization, with the Director General (DG) at its head. It has a few thousand staff (depending on definition) and a budget of roughly $3.5 billion a year.
The WHO is controlled in theory by the member nations (most UN members, and a couple of others), on a one country-one vote basis through the World Health Assembly, that usually meets annually.
As example, India, with 1.3 billion people, has the same power on the voting floor as Nuie, with 1,300 people. The WHA elects the DG through a 4-yearly vote that is often heavily accompanied by lobbying by major countries.
WHO funding was originally nearly all derived from member countries, who contributed to the ‘core’ budget. WHO would then decide on priorities for expenditure, guided by the WHA. In the past 2 decades, there has been a significant change in funding:
1. A rapid increase in private funding, from individuals and corporations. Some is direct, some indirect through parallel international health organizations (Gavi, Cepi) that are heavily privately funded. The second largest contributor to the WHO budget is now a private couple in the United States heavily invested in the international pharmaceutical sector and in software / digitization services.
2. The budget has moved from mainly core funding, to mainly ‘directed’ funding, in which the funder specifies the area in which the funding can be used, and sometimes the actual activities to be undertaken. The WHO therefore becomes a conduit for their funds to undertake their intended activities. Both country private funders heavily use this directed approach.
The WHO therefore retains under overall control of an assembly of countries, but day-to-day priorities are increasingly directed by single countries and private interests.
Former strong rules on conflict of interest regarding private sector involvement are less externally obvious now, with WHO working more closely with private and corporate sector entities.
Monkeypox Was A Table-Top Simulation Only Last Year
Elite media outlets around the world are on red alert over the world’s first-ever global outbreak of Monkeypox in mid-May 2022 - just one year after an international biosecurity conference in Munich held a simulation of a “global pandemic involving an unusual strain of Monkeypox” beginning in mid-May 2022.
Monkeypox was first identified in 1958, but there’s never been a global Monkeypox outbreak outside of Africa until now - in the exact week of the exact month predicted by the biosecurity folks in their pandemic simulation.
��BREAKING—The first confirmed case of #monkeypox in the United States this year just confirmed in a Boston individual who recently travelled to Canada, officials said, as concern rises over the spread of the infectious virus in multiple countries, now US.https://t.co/W0OXFYemYTpic.twitter.com/jwJgbJ8G8q
Epidemiologists Jennifer Nuzzo and Bill Hanage are on the scene - but still no word from them as to whether they see anything strange about the first-ever global Monkeypox outbreak occurring in mid-May 2022, a year after they acted as advisers on an international biosecurity simulation of a global Monkeypox outbreak occurring in mid-May 2022.
The global Monkeypox outbreak - occurring on the exact timeline predicted by a biosecurity simulation of a global Monkeypox outbreak a year prior - bears a striking resemblance to the outbreak of COVID-19 just months after Event 201, a simulation of a coronavirus pandemic almost exactly like COVID-19.
Event 201 was hosted in October 2019 - just two months before the coronavirus was first revealed in Wuhan - by the Gates Foundation, the World Economic Forum, Bloomberg, and Johns Hopkins.
As with the Event 201, the participants at the Monkeypox simulation have thus far been stone silent as to their having participated in a pandemic simulation the facts of which happened to come true in real life just months later.
One person who was present at both Event 201 and the Monkeypox simulation is George Fu Gao, director of the Chinese Center for Disease Control. At event 201, Gao specifically raised the point of countering “misinformation” during a “hypothetical” coronavirus pandemic.
Here’s Gao at Event 201 right next to our very own Avril Haines, Director of National Intelligence - technically the highest-level intelligence official in the United States. Look at these cuties.
Doesn’t that make you feel all warm and fuzzy? Phew. Making Kim Philby jealous.
That said, I won’t sit here and debate wild conspiracy theories that there might be anything unusual about a global pandemic occurring just months after a simulation of a global pandemic of exactly that kind, followed shortly after by the first-ever global outbreak of an even-more-obscure virus just months after a simulation of an outbreak of exactly that kind.
If you want to be a good person and make a six-figure salary - or be friends with people who make six-figure salaries - then do as your government tells you:
Sit down, shut up, stay home, save lives, take your shots, show your papers, and muzzle your kids.
What really happened in the first 90 days of the jab rollout? How many adverse events and different health problems?
How many deaths? The first tranche of documents were released March 1, 2022, and it proves beyond any shadow of a doubt - we’ve been sold down the river!
How much of what the media consider as “fake news” right now would end up later on as the accurate account of an event?
In short, what gives them the authority to determine what is factual and truthful when their own journalistic standards and ethics include telling their readers mere half-truths for a while, i.e. when it is in the best interest of other institutions they are still working with in the interim?
The Los Angeles Times reports:
“For much of the 1960s, the CIA provided the Tibetan exile movement with $1.7 million a year for operations against China, including an annual subsidy of $180,000 for the Dalai Lama, according to newly released U.S. intelligence documents.
The money for the Tibetans and the Dalai Lama was part of the CIA’s worldwide effort during the height of the Cold War to undermine Communist governments, particularly in the Soviet Union and China. In fact, the U.S. government committee that approved the Tibetan operations also authorized the disastrous Bay of Pigs invasion of Cuba.
The documents, published last month by the State Department, illustrate the historical background of the situation in Tibet today, in which China continues to accuse the Dalai Lama of being an agent of foreign forces seeking to separate Tibet from China."
The CIA’s program encompassed support of Tibetan guerrillas in Nepal, a covert military training site in Colorado, “Tibet Houses” established to promote Tibetan causes in New York and Geneva, education for Tibetan operatives at Cornell University and supplies for reconnaissance teams."
Is the mainstream confirmation of the Dalai Lama as a CIA asset now can be considered the whole truth, or is there something more to the story?
“To “dispel” the Dalai Lama supporters’ doubts, the representatives of the Tibetan leader claimed in an interview with The New York Times on October 2, 1998 that “the subsidy earmarked for the Dalai Lama was spent on setting up offices in Geneva and New York and on international lobbying.”
However, the devil is in the detail.
Verkhoturov emphasizes that the denial was intended for those unfamiliar with the documents and facts. The documents say that in 1963 the CIA allocated considerable funds for the Dalai Lama’s entourage in Dharamsala, India, where his residence was located. There were no offices at Geneva and New York at the time.
Furthermore, soon the role of the CIA in the 1959 Tibetan Uprising and the formation of the government in exile also surfaced.
The US government viewed Tibet as a potential bulwark against China since 1949, when Chinese Communist leader Mao Zedong declared the creation of the People’s Republic of China (PRC).
“According to Memorandum for the 303 Committee (1968), the so-called CIA Tibetan program was partially initiated in 1956 “with the cognizance of the Committee, is based on US Government commitments made to the Dalai Lama in 1951 and 1956.”
“The program consists of political action, propaganda, paramilitary and intelligence operations, appropriately coordinated with and supported by [less than 1 line of source text not declassified],” the document read.
The declassified memorandum stated that in September 1958 the 303 Committee approved the “CIA covert support to Tibetan resistance” - just a year before the all-out uprising in the region erupted.
According to the publicist, the Dalai Lama’s exile opened the door to the CIA’s covert program aimed at recruiting and training the Tibetan leader’s followers and supporters in reconnaissance operations, sabotage, guerilla tactics, data encoding and radio operator skills. According to some estimates, about 170-240 Tibetans had undergone this special training.
The Memorandum for the Special Group (1964) reveals that the CIA planned to create a spy network in Tibet, including “approximately 20 singleton resident agents… two road watch teams in Tibet to report possible Chinese Communist build-ups, and six border watch communications teams.”
Verkhoturov believes that this spy activity could have targeted China’s nuclear program and the country’s first nuclear tests on October 16, 1964.
However, China’s Cultural Revolution - a sociopolitical movement that took place in the People’s Republic of China from 1966 until 1976 - dealt a heavy blow to the Tibetan spy network and eventually brought an end to the espionage activity in the region.
As a result, the budget of the CIA’s Tibetan program decreased to $1,165,000 in 1968.
According to Jonathan Mirsky, a historian of China, the CIA program finally ended with President Richard Nixon’s visit to China in 1972.
Still, in the early 1970s the CIA continued to allocate funds directly to the Dalai Lama, however, the amount of these subsidies remains shrouded in secrecy.
“In 1999, I asked the Dalai Lama if the CIA operation had been harmful for Tibet,” Mirsky wrote in 2013, ‘Yes, that is true,’ he replied. The intervention was harmful, he suggested, because it was primarily aimed at serving American interests rather than helping the Tibetans in any lasting way. ‘Once the American policy toward China changed, they stopped their help,’ he told me, ‘Otherwise our struggle could have gone on’.”
Indeed, there’s more to the story and so, we need to continue exposing the false idols right at their own home turf.
Beyond the Dalai Lama’s engagement with the CIA, his conviction to his own teachings has come to question when he was caught wearing a Rolex while he preached about the great scourge of materialism in this world.
“What Kind Of Man Wears Rolex?
When you think of Political figures who wear a gold Rolex you might think of U.S. Presidents, Dwight Eisenhower, Lyndon Johnson or Bill Clinton, or even former U.S. Vice President Dick Cheney.
When people think about Civil Rights Leaders who have worn yellow gold Rolex watches, they might think about Dr. Martin Luther King Jr., or Jesse Jackson.
One man who might surprise people with wearing a Yellow Gold Rolex President, is no other than His Holiness, The Dali Lama of Tibet."
“As mentioned, The Dalai Lama typically goes out of his way to make certain his watches never appear to be fancy or ostentatious.
His holiness does so, by typically putting them on inexpensive stretchable Speidel Twist-O-Flex watch bands. In this recent photo, we see the Dalai Lama with Prince Charles, and the Dalai Lama is wearing a yellow gold Rolex Day-Date with a cobalt blue dial."
From another site glorifying his love for watches…
“The Second War was still going on, and the Allies wanted to make a road over Tibet from Assam, in India, to China.
So two American military representatives came with a letter from President Roosevelt and a box containing a gold watch. A Patek Philippe. I was very excited. It was a very beautiful, very smart model. I still have it and it still works.
The watch is most likely a Patek Phillipe Perpetual Calendar Ref. 1526 from around 1942. No doubt it has been opened and dismantled more than once in it’s lifetime."
"Besides this cherished first watch, His Holiness has also been photographed in public wearing a Rolex Day-Date and this two tone Rolex Datejust with a jubilee bracelet. I can only speculate what his collection might be worth should it ever go up on auction."
What about the holiness of his preachings on vegetarianism and non-violence?
Well, the CIA didn’t just finance his rebellion against China, the agency also trained and supplied arms to those who were willing to fight for him, according to Newsweek:
“In the midst of this cold-war playground was Gyalo Thondup, who helped choose the first batch of trainees from Kalimpong. But the big brother kept his younger sibling - the Dalai Lama was then in his early 20s - in the dark about the spook business.
“I didn’t inform His Holiness about my contacts with the CIA and Indian intelligence,” says Gyalo Thondup. “This was very dirty business.”Under a full moon in October 1957, the first two-man team of CIA-trained Tibetans took off from an old World War II grass airstrip in East Pakistan, near Dhaka. They rode in a B-17 “sanitized” of all markings.
The parachutists were Athar Norbu and another Tibetan named Lhotse - “Tom” and “Lou” to their handlers. They were equipped with everything from dried beef to radios, from signal mirrors to folding-stock submachine guns.
They landed smack on target, 60 miles from Lhasa, and quickly hooked up with the local resistance leader, Gompo Tashi Andrugtsang, an influential trader whose legendary Khampas had been battling the Chinese for years.
The ragtag resistance waged a desperate struggle. In early 1958 many guerrillas were surrounded by 1,000 Chinese soldiers with artillery.
“All our leaders were wounded, including Gompo Tashi,” says one survivor. “We kept hoping the CIA would drop us some weapons, but they never came.
… Help was on the way. In 1958 more than 30 Tibetans began training secretly at Camp Hale, not far from Leadville, Colorado. Here about 300 Tibetans in all - assigned names like “Jack,” “Rocky” and “Martin” - were schooled in the black arts of covert warfare, from spy photography and sabotage to Morse code and mine-laying.
“We had great expectations when we went to America; we thought perhaps they would even give us an atom bomb to take back with us,” said one trainee, Tenzin Tsultrim.
Enjoying the benefits of conniving with a certain entity while feigning ignorance of what crimes that same entity has committed is the height of one’s hypocrisy.
It’s not only that one practices what one preaches, but the same must clean his own house first before he ventures out into the world, and begin finding faults against another.
“This week it was reported that a five-year old Tibetan girl had been allegedly raped by two Tibetan adult males in the settlement of Mundgod, South India. As shocking as the alleged crime was the revelation that the Mundgod camp officer and settlement officer had encouraged the father of the child not to pursue criminal charges against the men.
Why? Out of fear of shaming HH the Dalai Lama and the Tibetan people. Sadly, I and others living in the Tibetan community in exile were not surprised to learn this."
- HuffPost web cached article, “Not in the Name of the Dalai Lama: Tibetan Reaction to Child Rape Reveals a Deeper Malaise”
Kalu Rinpoche says that he was molested by elder monks…”sexually abused by elder monks,” and when he was 18 his tutor in the monastery threatened him at knifepoint.
“It’s all about money, power, controlling. And then I became a drug addict because of all this misunderstanding and I went crazy.”
A gang of older monks who would visit his room each week... This was hard-core sex, he says, including penetration.
“Most of the time, they just came alone,” he says. “They just banged the door harder, and I had to open. I knew what was going to happen, and after that you become more used to it.”
It wasn’t until Kalu returned to the monastery after his three-year retreat that he realized how wrong this practice was. By then the cycle had begun again on a younger generation of victims, he says. Kalu’s claims of sexual abuse mirror those of Lodoe Senge, an ex-monk and 23 year old tulku who now lives in Queens, New York.
“When I saw the video,” Senge says of Kalu’s confessions, “I thought, ‘Shit, this guy has the balls to talk about it when I didn’t even have the courage to tell my girlfriend.’” Senge was abused, he says, as a 5-year-old by his own tutor, a man in his late twenties, at a monastery in India.
False idolatry and false institutions are two great scourges on this planet. Both have created a strong, opaque barrier between the mind and the Truth it is seeking.
The only way to know the Whole Truth and free humanity at last is to launch a great rebellion against them both.
Be prepared for what the mainstream media are doing right now, which is to publish some chosen truths to regain the people’s trust, as they start filtering the social media networks for “fake news”.
The Question That Fluoridation Promoters Can’t Answer June 5 2022 | From: FluorideAlert / Various[Archivum]
During 2016, I asked this question to many fluoridation promoters and have yet to receive an adequate scientific answer.
I asked it in several audiences in New Zealand and also to promoters at a council hearing in Naples, Florida and at a debate in Cortland, New York with Johnny Johnson and Steve Slott. Neither Johnson nor Slott, otherwise very vocal on promoting fluoridation, had an answer.
“What primary scientific studies (not bogus reviews conducted by pro-fluoridation agencies) can you cite that gives you the confidence to ignore or dismiss the evidence that fluoride damages the brain as documented in over 300 animal and human studies (including 50 IQ studies).”
If proponents cannot provide an adequate scientific answer to this question: fluoridation should be halted immediately.
On Nov 22, 2016, Michael Connett, JD, asked this question to the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), on behalf of FAN, Food & Water Watch, Organic Consumers Association, American Academy of Environmental Medicine, International Academy of Oral Medicine and Toxicology, Moms Against Fluoridation, and several individual mothers, in a petition calling on the EPA to ban the deliberate addition of fluoridating chemicals to the drinking water under provisions in the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA).
The EPA has 90 days to reply, and if they fail to provide a satisfactory reply then they can be taken to Federal Court.
How you can take this further?
We are requesting that each one of you to ask this question of any promoter of fluoridation – and keep asking it throughout 2017 until you can get an answer. Send that answer to us.
Based on responses we have seen so far we anticipate that there will be no satisfactory answers. In our view, there is no scientific evidence that could justify ignoring the large number of scientific studies that fluoride damages the brain and thus no justification for continuing this unethical and reckless practice of deliberately adding fluoridating chemicals to the drinking water.
This in essence will be our 2017 campaign. Very simple, very direct and very important. We hope that you will support this in two ways: a) ask this showstopper question in as many creative ways as you can and as many times as you can, and b) support FAN financially.
Five More Ways to Take Action:
1. Send a letter-to-the-editor to your local newspapers
Neuroscience Says Listening To This Song Reduces Anxiety By Up To 65 Percent + The Miracle Of 528 Hz Solfeggio And Fibonacci Numbers June 4 2022 | From: Inc / Various
Sure to both stir your soul and calm your nervous system.
Everyone knows they need to manage their stress. When things get difficult at work, school, or in your personal life, you can use as many tips, tricks, and techniques as you can get to calm your nerves.
So here's a science-backed one: make a playlist of the 10 songs found to be the most relaxing on earth.
Sound therapies have long been popular as a way of relaxing and restoring one's health. For centuries, indigenous cultures have used music to enhance well-being and improve health conditions.
Neuroscientists out of the UK have specified which tunes give you the most bang for your musical buck.
The study was conducted on participants who attempted to solve difficult puzzles as quickly as possible while connected to sensors. The puzzles induced a certain level of stress, and participants listened to different songs while researchers measured brain activity as well as physiological states that included heart rate, blood pressure, and rate of breathing.
According to Dr. David Lewis-Hodgson of Mindlab International, which conducted the research, the top song produced a greater state of relaxation than any other music tested to date.
In fact, listening to that one song - "Weightless" - resulted in a striking 65 percent reduction in participants' overall anxiety, and a 35 percent reduction in their usual physiological resting rates.
Equally remarkable is the fact the song was actually constructed to do so. The group that created "Weightless", Marconi Union, did so in collaboration with sound therapists. Its carefully arranged harmonies, rhythms, and bass lines help slow a listener's heart rate, reduce blood pressure and lower levels of the stress hormone cortisol.
When it comes to lowering anxiety, the stakes couldn't be higher. Stress either exacerbates or increases the risk of health issues like heart disease, obesity, depression, gastrointestinal problems, asthma, and more.
More troubling still, a paper out of Harvard and Stanford found health issues from job stress alone cause more deaths than diabetes, Alzheimer's, or influenza.
In this age of constant bombardment, the science is clear: if you want your mind and body to last, you've got to prioritize giving them a rest. Music is an easy way to take some of the pressure off of all the pings, dings, apps, tags, texts, emails, appointments, meetings, and deadlines that can easily spike your stress level and leave you feeling drained and anxious.
Of the top track, Dr. David Lewis-Hodgson said, "'Weightless' was so effective, many women became drowsy and I would advise against driving while listening to the song because it could be dangerous."
So don't drive while listening to these, but do take advantage of them:
Climate Intervention: A Government Cover-Up Of Epic Proportions June 3 2022 | From: WND / Various
A few years ago I addressed how CIA Director John Brennan gave a historic speech to the Council on Foreign Relations, confessing something few thought they would ever hear: the federal government’s explicit and intentional climate intervention via operations like stratospheric aerosol spraying or injections, or SAI.
What I didn’t explain is that SAI is a ginormous federal geo-engineering cover up that is now being exposed, and yet not a single mainstream media outlet has reported on it. Let me explain.
“Albedo modification would work by lacing the atmosphere with tiny particles or aerosols that would reflect sunlight and mimic natural processes.
For example, in 1991 the volcano Mount Pinatubo in the Philippines spewed 20 million tons of sulfur dioxide into the stratosphere, which spans altitudes from 10 to 50 kilometers.
There, the sulfur dioxide produced aerosols that reflected enough sunlight to reduce global temperature by an estimated 0.3°C for 3 years.
Albedo modification might also work by using aerosols to seed cloud formation in a lower atmospheric layer called the troposphere.”
The U.S. Senate pushed the DOE to pursue albedo modification action a couple months before CIA Director Brennan gave his blessing to stratospheric spraying as a government operation that “potentially could help reverse the warming effects of global climate change.”
What’s crazy about all that government endorsement is that the February 2015 NAS report, on which the feds base their entire toxic rain operation;
“Warned explicitly that albedo modification shouldn’t be deployed now because the risks and benefits were far too uncertain.”
What are those risks? Here are just three grave consequences that we know about:
Drought: The team under Chien Wang, a co-author of the NAS study and a senior research scientist at MIT’s Center for Global Change Science and the Department of Earth, concluded that albedo modification would lead;
“To dangerous changes in global weather: Precipitation would also decline worldwide, and some parts of the world would be worse off. Europe, the Horn of Africa, and Pakistan may receive less rainfall than they have historically.”
Loss of blue sky: According to a report by the New Scientist, Ben Kravitz of the Carnegie Institution for Science explained, “Releasing sulphate aerosols high in the atmosphere should in theory reduce global temperatures by reflecting a small percentage of the incoming sunlight away from the Earth.
However, the extra particles would also scatter more of the remaining light into the atmosphere. This would reduce by 20 per cent the amount of sunlight that takes a direct route to the ground, and it would increase levels of softer, diffuse scattered light,” making the sky appear hazier.
Hazards to human health and other earth life: The gravest of all consequences of atmospheric aerosol spraying is that, simply put, what’s sprayed above us settles down upon us and in us, as well as other life on earth.
The U.S. government’s own National Center for Biotechnology Information, or NCBI, released a report in January 2016, the goal of which was “Assessing the direct occupational and public health impacts of solar radiation management with stratospheric aerosols.” The NCBI concluded:
“Our analysis suggests that adverse public health impacts may reasonably be expected from SRM via deployment of stratospheric aerosols.
Little is known about the toxicity of some likely candidate aerosols, and there is no consensus regarding acceptable levels for public exposure to these materials.
There is also little infrastructure in place to evaluate potential public health impacts in the event that stratospheric aerosols are deployed for solar radiation management.”
No wonder the co-author of the study on “Climate Intervention,” Dr. James Fleming, called geo-engineering like SAI: "Untested and untestable, and dangerous beyond belief."
Another colleague and co-author, Dr. Raymond T. Pierrehumbert, the Louis Block professor in geophysical sciences at the University of Chicago, and Sweden’s King Carl XVI Gustafn, chairman in environmental science at Stockholm’s Universitet, took it one step further. He warned;
"The nearly two years’ worth of reading and animated discussions that went into this study have convinced me more than ever that the idea of ‘fixing’ the climate by hacking the Earth’s reflection of sunlight is wildly, utterly, howlingly barking mad.”
(That is why Dr. Pierrehumbert prefers to call albedo modification by the name “albedo hacking.”)
Dr. Pierrehumber added: “The report describes albedo modification frankly as involving large and partly unknown risks. It states outright that albedo modification ‘should not be deployed.'”
So, why are the U.S. Senate and CIA director disregarding the dire and passionate warnings of scientists like Dr. Pierrehumbert and Dr. Fleming by demanding that the Department of Energy proceed with trials on geo-engineering? In the words of Dr. Pierrehumber, are they “wildly, utterly, howlingly barking mad”?
Is it a mere coincidence that the very government agencies that are spraying our stratosphere with toxic chemicals were the actual sponsors of the NAS report? The NAS itself confessed:
“The study was sponsored by the National Academy of Sciences, U.S. intelligence community, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, and U.S. Department of Energy” (italics mine).
Isn’t that like your right hand quoting your left hand so that your right hand can grab what it’s already holding? Is the NAS report another government push and ploy to collaborate and cite “scientific proof” to justify its clandestine climate agenda?
Why else would the CIA and U.S. Senate be proceeding in climate aerosol spraying when the very scientists preparing the study warned, “Stop! Don’t do it! It’s crazy and dangerous!”
The most colossal and tragic of all government cover-ups is the fact that the feds have been waging climate warfare for more than 30 years, lacing our clouds and stratosphere with dangerous nano-particles, including environmental sulfates, black carbon, metallic aluminum and aluminum oxide aerosols.
The truth is, for decades, the feds have been covertly and overtly running sky criminal operations behind (above!) our backs, leaving humans and the rest of the planet life as lab rats of their toxic cocktail fallout.
Geoengineeringwatch.org reported that a 1978 750-page congressional report was recently discovered with a mountain of information going back decades that “confirms the ongoing extensive involvement of our government in climate modification/weather warfare.
This document also confirms the involvement of foreign governments around the globe, even governments that would otherwise have been considered ‘hostile to US interests.'”
Why hasn’t a single mainstream media outlet reported on the CIA and DOE’s march forward with SAI when the scientific community has explicitly and repeatedly warned against it?
Why are geo-engineering researchers being stonewalled by government and media?
And why in hell are watchdogs on both the left and right dodging the feds’ intentional and hazardous climate intervention, when they seek to uncover government cover-ups and conspiracies with the most scant of evidence?
Dane Wigington, the lead researcher for GeoengineeringWatch.org and a fierce fighter for government geoengineering transparency, was absolutely right when he wrote: “How big does the climate engineering elephant in the room need to be before it can no longer be hidden in plain site?
How much more historical proof do we need of the ongoing climate engineering / weather warfare before the denial of the masses crumbles?
When will populations around the globe bring to justice all those responsible for the ongoing and rapidly worsening worldwide weather warfare assault?”
Is it a mere coincidence that, in October 2015, the feds put a universal “gag order” on agency employees in “The National Weather Service,” the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration” and the “U.S. Dept. of Commerce”?
Is it a mere coincidence that the Obama administration spent more taxpayer monies for legal prosecutions of government whistleblowers than all other U.S. presidents combined, resulting in 31 times the jail sentences?
It’s time to blow the lid off the climate bullshit of governments!
That is why my wife, Gena, and I encourage citizens everywhere to do their own research on geo-engineering and then write their government representatives to demand action. We also encourage the support of the Legal Alliance of pro-bono lawyers now amassed as a united front to fight the geo-engineering government cover-up in court.
To read or learn more immediately, I highly recommend the work and website of Dane Wigington. GeoEngineeringWatch.org is loaded with great research on the many facets of climate intervention.
Energy Follows Thought June 2 2022 | From: Omnithought / Various
We have all heard this phrase but I would like to go into a bit of depth as to what it means to raise it up a bit above a catch phrase or platitude.
It is a fundamental tenet of esoteric thought. Genesis tells us that "In the beginning the Earth was null and void and darkness was upon the deep". The first question that should bring to mind is "what is the deep?"
Comment: This article sounds a bit religious but the message is more a spiritual one, rather than of the 'God' of any given theology.
We’ll get to that in a moment. This nothingness then stirred and God said "Let there be Light", and divided light from the darkness. It was an act of pure spiritual will through the use of the divine mind. We haven’t actually divided the light from the darkness (its obvious source) only the idea has actually been created. A thought either created or accessed by the divine mind.
The mind created the idea before the will was able to manifest it, empowered by the desire to see it manifest. This is "the deep." The astral or desire plane is always associated with liquid and usually water.
It is interesting also that instead of just doing it we see that God crystallized this idea or thought form in a mantra or word of power; "Let there be light," and then created a physical plane change through his desire.
Thus the first manifested result of the omniscient being at the center of our system is organized sound, or vibration, and after that all that will ever be in the world is a product of vibration. The word Logos is used to describe this entity in manifestation and literally means "word".
Now why is any of this important? This first act of creation out of the mind of God is repeated in every other creative act on every level in every plane and it is used by you and I to create our world. We have talked about resonance and how we attract into our reality the things we think about most, but when we conceive of an idea and build a better mouse trap we are the creator in the microcosm.
Nothing is created without first being imagined. There has to be that moment when the creator says “wouldn’t it be cool if…” in this case the rest would be “there was light”. The image making faculty of consciousness is the mind. When we visualize and idea we are creating an image.
The energy and potential of the thought form is based on the ability of the consciousness that created, accessed, or simply organized it. We do this constantly but with little result because we are not very good a focusing our minds. The idea may just pass.
If the desire is strong enough then it is brought into physical “reality”. It is and always has been energy and has simply been organized at different levels until it has fully crystallized. The will of God creates through the love of God as do you and I.
The organizing force in this process of creation is mind. It may be the universal mind or the mind of an individual creator of some level of consciousness like that of a Logos or a human being. The process is the same. Creation is governed by the intelligence of the system.
The third ray of mind or intelligent activity gives birth to the four subsidiary rays of aspect. Only in manifestation are these aspects realized. The trinity itself stands in its potentiality even in the divine plane of Adi as the supposedly un-manifested self.
When we imagine or visualize something we are building in mental matter. Although it is interwoven with desire, another necessary aspect of the process, the mind is always the organizing force. If we are effective at visualizing what we want to “see” come about we will be more effective at bringing it about.
Visualization is an important aspect of meditation because of this. We are learning to create and through training we are taught to visualize in accordance with the things that the teacher see’s and knows as fact. The creative process and the ability to make changes are being used along proven lines and will be improved greatly.
We will eventually find our way but time can be gained through a guided and monitored approach to occult meditation. There are pitfalls that can be avoided on the way.
What we need to keep in mind is that there is a collective human consciousness that is creating all the time as well.
Groups and subgroups of subconscious and super-conscious entities creating in mental and astral matter and this is what decides the directions our in which societies move.
There is a unique way that each nationality approaches life because of its group identity. It is responsible for the beautiful colorations in cultural expression throughout the world and the thought provoking effect that is the result of some one individual swimming upstream.
It is fairly easy for us to create in line with the over-riding dream of our society and the planet herself, but to create something extraordinary requires much more personal power. These are the people we say are on a mission and will not be denied.
Their vision is so clear and the desire so strong that nothing will deter them from seeing is brought to a reality. This is why the training in business can produce, once a redirection of focus is triggered, a student of the spiritual sciences that will excel in these endeavors as well.
This is the reason for goal orientation and all of the attention that gets in business training. We want to be more effective in bringing about change on the physical plane and the only way to do that is to learn to focus our minds and visualize first.
The first creation is not done on the physical plane.
Everything we see in the physical world was first created on the mental plane. The energies were organized by the mind and brought to be through activity fired by desire. Think about the word “emotion” for a moment and how we express ourselves in this area of our lives.
We can be “moved” or “affected” by a person or a situation or even a song.
Emotions are what move us to move. If you want it bad enough you’ll go get it. It is not enough by itself but neither is the mind.
We have to be harmless in our intentions and balance and align all aspects of ourselves to our real purpose, and then we can create true beauty.
Gandhi once said “be the change you want to see in the world”.
Columbus, Ohio, actually won $50 million in DOT grant money to turn their city into a "Smart City" calling it "SmartColumbus." The city of Columbus will receive an additional $90 million in pledges from public and private sector partners.
"Smart PGH's" tag line at the end of the above video is chilling, "If It's Not For All, It's Not For Us". As "Smart PGH's" documents reveal, 'smart city' surveillance spies on All of Us.
The City of Pittsburgh sees the confluence of transportation and energy as the key to U.S. Department of Transportation’s (USDOT) Smart City Challenge. To meet the challenge, we will develop an open platform and corresponding governance structure to improve the safety, equity, and efficiency of our transportation network and its interaction with the energy and communications networks.
By building on existing technology deployments and increasing fixed and mobile sensors over a number of major “Smart Spine” corridors that connect with primary commercial centers and amenities, Pittsburgh will collect, analyze, visualize, and act on information to improve mobility for residents.
The non-proprietary nature of our platform allows the City of Pittsburgh and its partners to set an open, national standard for a municipal service delivery platform, which enhances industry and supports innovation.
According to the SCC, 'smart spines' use advanced technology like real-time adaptive traffic signals and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V) communication at intersections.
"Smart PGH" is working with Uber to spy on customers. (see page 4)
It appears that "smart cities" are part of the government's "Vision Zero" program, see page 6 of SCC's 'Enabling Hierarchy' diagram. Also on page 6, under the subject 'Data Collection Network' they mention, "Social Media Assets" otherwise known as social media spying. (more on that below)
In addition, we [Smart PGH] would like to work with Pittsburgh Bike Share, Uber, Lyft, and others to move towards more robust V2V communications that allow Port Authority buses, City fleet, bike share bicycles, ride-sharing services, etc. to become safer by sensing one another on Pittsburgh’s streets. Bicycle tracking has already begun, Ford Motor Company has given Palo Alto, $1.1 million to equip bicycles with GPS devices.
Joshuah Mello, the city’s chief transportation official, said the main draw of the new smart-bike system, operated by Motivate and sponsored by Ford, is that it will be part of a network growing in Bay Area cities from San Jose to San Francisco, “making it one of the largest systems in the entire world.”
What he should say is, this makes it one of the largest bicycle surveillance systems in the entire world! What follows, are some of the most chilling intrusions of government spying to date. Govt spying on social media.
To address Vision Element #9, SmartPGH will deploy our “Citizens as Sensors” effort aimed at extracting relevant data from social media. Scrubbing these sites and app will provide information on what people are doing in different places across Pittsburgh, data that can be used to infer behavior and data that can detect changes in behavior due to physical modifications made by SmartPGH and the City of Pittsburgh.
Pittsburgh can more easily detect if the modifications it is making are producing the desired changes or if they are leading to unanticipated outcomes or unhappy residents.
For example, changes to the number of check-ins citizens make to restaurants and retail establishments following the parking rate change can provide evidence of how much this change has impacted dining and shopping behaviors, providing valuable feedback not just on residents emotional reactions but also the wider economic impact of such decisions.
"At a different level many users volunteer information to Web 2.0 sites as a convenient way of making it available to friends and relations, irrespective of the fact that it becomes available to all."
Govt to spy on staircases, sidewalks, bicycles, trails, buses and trains.
Moreover, residents utilize the city's unique system of 712 public staircases, 40 miles of on-street bike infrastructure, 31 miles of trails, and numerous sidewalksand on a daily basis.
Companies like Sidewalk Labs, make a profit out of spying on pedestrians.
The Port Authority of Allegheny County operates a comprehensive transit network in the city, which includes 18.4 miles of busway, 26.2 miles of light rail, 72 local bus routes and two funiculars.
Power companies and the govt collaborate to spy on everyone.
Pages 22 & 23:
The City of Pittsburgh is in conversation with Duquesne Light and partner-company DQE Communications regarding the use of their extensive network of dark fiber. Most of the network capacity is currently “dark” and available for use by partners including the City of Pittsburgh.
To make the most of their network, Duquesne Light recently built a wireless communication infrastructure to support the increased data-flow between their electric meters and the company’s centralized operating center.
This effort has evolved into a high-capacity, resilient, wireless network covering the entirety of the City of Pittsburgh and the surrounding 817-square-mile service territory.
The grid of microgirds will spy on everyone's health, electrical and gas usage.
The grid-of-microgrids is designed to connect critical infrastructure like hospitals, universities, and data and telecommunications centers. Other partners in the effort include the UPMC health system, NRG energy, Duquesne Light and People’s natural gas.
Govt spying on Pittsburgh residents is frightening.
PennDOT’s Western Regional Traffic Management Center includes a fully integrated Centralized Software System, a Media Partner room that broadcasts live on-air reports of traffic conditions, and, a state of the art video wall capable of displaying 160 video images.
The center monitors and/or controls ITS devices on 12 freeway corridors, including many within Pittsburgh's limits.
These devices include: 293 CCTV cameras, 37 Highway Advisory Radio transmitter locations, 86 Highway Advisory Radio signs with beacons, 200 Microwave Traffic Detectors, 24 Dedicated Short Range Communication (DSRC) radios, 93 Digital Wave Radar Vehicular Detector units and many more specific ITS-related items.
List of govt agencies spying on residents:
Allegheny County
Penn DOT and the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania
Southwestern Pennsylvania Commission
Port Authority of Allegheny County
Pittsburgh Parking Authority
Port of Pittsburgh Commission
Pittsburgh Bike Share
Utilities including energy distribution, water, and natural gas
University Partners, particularly University of Pittsburgh and Carnegie Mellon University
Major freight operators in Pittsburgh
Representatives of the Business and Philanthropic Communities
Citizens and Community Stakeholders Industry partners
The model for the WPRDC is unique because it is designed to be extensible and inclusive, able to host datasets from any municipality, non-profit, or researcher with data to share. By bringing together various levels of government, civil society, and academia around information resources, we have begun to improve our region’s capacity for innovation and evidence-driven policy-making.
The WPRDC’s web resources provide machine-readable data downloads and APIs of key administrative data on topics such as property assessment, building inspection, public health, crime, and asset management.
Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window
Surtracs' Econolite specializes in spying on motor vehicles. They also invented 'autoscope' surveillance cameras in the early 1990's. Fyi, Surtrac's Autoscope Vision (AV) also spies on bicyclists.
AV delivers stop bar vehicle and bicycle detection, advanced vehicle detection, bicycle differentiation, traffic data collection, and HD video surveillance.
Surtrac boasts, about they're newly-developed, full-field-of-view object-feature tracking. In other words, the government can track an individual vehicle or bicyclist throughout an entire city!
There are plans to integrate Surtrac with the Port Authority of Allegheny County bus fleets’ using 'Clever Devices'. (more on that below)
2.Citilog, is a mirror image of Econolite but specializes in spying road sensors that are imbedded in every road, highway tunnel and bridge.
4.Wavetronix, can track an individual vehicles speed, even if they change lanes. Wavertronix also knows the type of vehicle you're driving, watch the video below to find out more.
Ardern And The Necessity Of Kindness + Countering “The Great Reset”: “Exit Globalization”, Refuse “Digital Tyranny” And “Global Governance” May 31 2022 | From: HatchardReport / GlobalResearch / Various
Last Friday Jacinda Ardern received an honorary doctorate from Harvard University, hitting out in her acceptance speech against keyboard warriors spreading disinformation:
"When facts are turned into fiction, and fiction turned into fact, you stop debating ideas and you start debating conspiracy.”
"His mind slid away into the labyrinthine world of doublethink. To know and not to know, to be conscious of complete truthfulness while telling carefully constructed lies…to repudiate morality while laying claim to it,…to believe that the Party was the guardian of democracy."
Ardern continued with a sordid use of imagery worthy of Orwell:
"In my mind, when I read something especially horrific on my feed, I imagine it’s written by a lone person, unacquainted with personal hygiene practices, dressed in a poorly fitted superhero costume – one that is baggy in all the wrong places.”
Ardern said her speech was about kindness, presumably that special brand of kindness that is hard to recognise. As Hamlet said after berating his mother “I have to be cruel to be kind”.
Was Ardern’s brand of kindness at work when she famously deleted in a single night 33,000 comments on her feed informing her of personal stories of the adverse effects of Covid vaccination?
Ardern might just as well have entitled her speech: “I have sat on my hands and refused to read my emails. I insist that other MPs do the same. I am the sole source of truth. The world needs this.”
The historical antecedents of the rejection of protestors, writers, and intellectuals as irrelevant, dirty, and dangerous spreaders of disease and disinformation certainly escaped Ardern and probably most Harvard graduates. The 1930s don’t feature much in modern curricula.
As all cause mortality rises, as another new study shows the immune system of the vaccinated exhibits dangerous antibody instability, as infections and hospitalisations among the vaccinated overtake the unvaccinated, we no longer need to speculate about where this is going.
History tells us that it will end badly for many. An outcome of which Ardern appears to be determined to remain ignorant and condemn as conspiracy without discussion - by government decree.
But of course, it is much worse than mere ignorance, as Sir Walter Scott said:
"Oh what a tangled web we weave, when first we practice to deceive.”
Ardern is a master ofdisinformation, coercion, and suppression.
Her continuing (but thankfully waning) popularity is a reflection of her practice of controlling the media through continuing large cash grants and revenue from saturation Covid vaccination advertising (aka old fashioned bribery).
As a result, New Zealanders are dying in greater numbers not only unaware that this may have anything to do with Covid vaccination but actually told by the government that it does not and cannot.
The cardiac wards are overflowing, but governments are not letting on. In the history of mass poisoning, there is no parallel in the world.
When Is a Crime Not a Crime?
When the government says so. This happens when the government and the medical profession not only cannot be held accountable for their actions but wilfully exploit this loophole to the full.
We have reached the apogee of the era of unaccountably disregarded consequences for which Ardern is the unapologetic international poster child.
Ardern’s Harvard speech reportedly generated emotional rapture. She received a standing ovation. What does that mean for our future and the future of the world?
Countering “The Great Reset”: “Exit Globalization”, Refuse “Digital Tyranny” And “Global Governance"
The Great Reset is a multi-faceted Global and Globalist approach to controlling, manipulating, enslaving, starving and eventually digitizing humans into transhumans under a Great Tyranny.
We have to resist any Globalist attempt to take our submission to this global fraud a step further – towards a Great Reset – which they might as well call a Global Reset.
Because that’s what it is letter by letter, when reading and analyzing Klaus Schwab’s book, “Covid-19 – The Great Reset”.
In the video below, Klaus Schwab discusses the transition from humans to transhumans with Google Co-founder Sergey Brin:
"Can you imagine that in 10 years, when we are sitting here, we have an implant in our brains, and I can immediately feel [what you are feeling] because you all will have implants.
I can remeasure your brainwaves, and I can immediately tell you how some people react [emotionally] to your answers. Is it imaginable?”
It is of utmost importance that We, the People, realize that the Reset bells are tolling since quite a while.
An effective option of countering the Great Reset is people worldwide collectively exiting Globalisation, the Global Concept of a Global Government and a Global, centrally directed economy and society.
Adopting the concept of:
Local production for local consumption with local money and local public banking via a sovereign local central bank – and trading with think-alike nations, bilaterally and multilaterally, according to comparative advantages, to reach to the extent possible “win-win” outcomes” – may be a solution.
Famine – the Hunger Game, is the name of the game which the elite-cabal is rolling out at warp speed.
Humanity, we the people, must pay special attention to this strategy of submission and fear.
We must depend as little as possible on international food trade.
Independence from international supply chains of food, fertilizers and other agricultural inputs, is crucial.
Produce locally, is a principal question of survival.
As long as we do not understand, that our western so-called intellectuals do not grasp that writing letters to compromised, not to say “bought” western politicians, for example, to German Chancellor Scholz, not to deliver German weaponry to Ukraine to fight against Russia – we have not understood who is commanding the chessboard.
As long as newspaper articles accuse the black-green Austrian Government of not doing anything against rampant inflation, we have not understood that a (western) worldwide double-digit inflation is part of the Great Reset’s plan, and that the western coerced and corrupted Governments - like Austria, a symbol for the rest of the corrupted European Union - go along with it.
As long as we do not understand that everything is planned, has been planned by a long but utterly determined hand – and that all what seems coincidence is not coincidence, but is connected, because it is planned, has been planned for decades, probably for a century or more, we have not understood anything.
And we are not only sold to and dominated by the most powerful and financial elite, the monster money corporations, like BlackRock, Vanguard, State Street and Fidelity, but we are totally enslaved by and to them.
Because our politicians, the so-called democratically elected “leaders” (sic), who are paid by our taxes and who run the theatre in our (western) world, are either voluntarily or in one way or another coerced to follow their imposed script.
The World Economic Forum’s “Young Global Leaders”
We have to understand that these puppets that have been put at the helm of our western governments, the likes of Emmanuel Macron (France), Olaf Scholz, successor to Angela Merkel (Germany), Karl Nehammer (Austria), Mark Rutte (Netherlands), Magdalena Andersson (Sweden), Mette Frederiksen (Denmark), Mario Draghi (Italy), Pedro Sanchez (Spain), Scott Morrison (Australia), Jacinda Ardern (New Zealand), Justin Trudeau (Canada), Alberto Fernandez (Argentina); Gabriel Boric (Chile); Shinzo Abe (Japan) – and many more – were not democratically elected by the people, as you are made to believe.
They are all students or “scholars” of Klaus Schwab’s “Young Global Leaders” academy. They are groomed politicians appointed by powerful financial interests.
As such they were all preselected by Klaus Schwab, acting on behalf of powerful financial interests and put into their positions under the guise of elections.
Today’s computerized election fraud is so sophisticated and perfect, that the commons – us – are unable to understand it, let alone successfully fight it.
Back to the Globalists. Finally, the heads of the International Monetary Fund (IMF), Kristalina Georgieva; of the World Bank, David Malpass; the World Trade Center (WTO), Dr. Ngozi Okonjo-Iweala, and, finally, of WHO (World Health Organization), Dr. Tedros Adhanom Ghebreyesus, they are all compromised to the Globalist Agenda, to UN Agenda 2030.
Dr. Tedros, former Head of GAVI, the Vaccine Alliance, headquartered just next door to WHO, in Geneva, was appointed byBill Gates, who also created GAVI. In preparation for things to come, Dr. Tedros, was eventually approved by WHO’s General Assembly in 2017.
For those who do not know, the WHO was created in 1948 by Rockefeller and subsequently integrated into the UN system. The WHO is also unique among the so-called UN agencies, in as much as the organization receives the bulk (between about two thirds and three quarters) of its budget from “private” contributions, i.e., a majority from pharma-trustfunds.
In 1948, at WHO’s inception, the organization’s future role of becoming the world’s health dictator, through a so-called “Pandemic Treaty” that may eventually overrule all 194 WHO-member nations’ Constitutions, was already planned.
The Pandemic Treaty would disempower countries’ health sovereignty, leading to a global health tyranny. We are not there yet, but preparatory discussions and negotiations are ongoing by member countries’ representatives and health ministers to force this treaty through World Health Assembly approval by 2023, so as to make it effective by 2024.
This Pandemic Treaty must be resisted by Us, The People, if we want to have a chance to gain back power over our lives and our destiny. We must organize in spirits, minds and on the ground.
Make no mistake, the Pandemic Treaty is intimately connected to the Hunger Game being played out on us, Humanity. Always remember, every act of oppression and misery descending upon us, is connected. If you don’t see it immediately – look for it.
Look for it, not in the lie-prone mainstream, but in alternative media. It may mean more work, than the comfort of watching the evening news. But remember, freedom doesn’t come for free.
All the above heads of states, and many more, as well as the leaders of prominent UN agencies were put into their position by the WEF (World Economic Forum), and the financial elite behind the WEF.
Most, if not all of them, have gone through Klaus Schwab’s (WEF’s CEO forever) “academy” for Young Global Leaders.
What do they get in return for obeying? Maybe a placebo instead of a potentially deadly vaxx – if they get a jab at all? But most importantly, they get protection from the most powerful on this earth. They may be guaranteed a safe-haven in Paradise, in case the cabal’s dream collapses.
At Klaus Schwab’s School for Young Global Leaders, they have learned dictatorship and tyranny. They now freely execute it, despite massive peoples’ opposition and protests.
They know, they have the backing of enormous powers, of the world’s (financial) super powers, those that control the UN and all its specialized agencies, as well as all the UN member states.
For example, as the Ukraine war is devastatingly distracting people’s attention from what is going on behind the scenes in preparation of total tyranny, Canada’s Justin Trudeau, Klaus Schwab’s Wunderkind, is allegedly quietly working towards implementing: (i) a system of digital IDs; (ii) a Universal Basic Income (UBI); (iii) a Federal Vaxx Mandate; (iv) an Asset Seizure Law; (v) a Social Credit System; (vi) a Biometric Access System (collecting and recording biological data from humans, for example through QR [Quick Response]-coding); and of course, (vii) Extreme Censorship.
We have to find alternatives to our wasteful lives of the past, and to the terror-life planned by the elite-cabal, the Deep State, the world’s largest financial carnivores.
On 1 May 2022, the NY Times reports that:
“Dozens of countries have thrown up trade barriers in the past two months to protect scarce supplies of food and commodities, but experts say the policies will only exacerbate a global food crisis.” – Of course, such propaganda exacerbates the drive for food hoarding, thus, leading to food shortages.
An effective alternative to Globalization – which is propagated from all angles of our globe – is the simple axiom, mentioned above, and, due to its importance, repeated here:
"Local Production for Local Consumption, with Local (CASH) Money, through a Public Banking System and Local Sovereign Central Banking – and Cross-Border Trading with Thinkalikes, based on Comparative Advantages.”
The focus must be on self-sufficiency and on food production to avoid massive famine and starvation – which is part of the plan. Always be aware, there are no coincidences.
Famine – obedience – submissiveness – fear – and population Reduction. They are all connected.
"The Bankers will ensure we stay in debt. The Pharmaceutical Companies will ensure we stay sick. The Weapons Manufacturers will ensure we keep going to war. The Mass Media will ensure we are prevented from knowing the Truth.
The Government will ensure all of this is done legally. Once you understand this, you will understand everything."
Dr. Reiner Fuellmich explains the WEF + UN’s goals of achieving a One World Government by means of a One World Digital Currency system
“Ultimately, they want to control the world.” – Dr. Reiner Fuellmich explains the WEF + UN’s goals of achieving a One World Government by means of a One World Digital Currency system.
As to food shortages, in the west, especially Europe and the US, at least a third, in some countries more, of all food is being shamefully wasted, thrown away, often for fake expiration dates; and in supermarkets, because after the first or second day, some vegetable food items do no longer keep the “sparkling” sales-attractive “freshness”, while they are still totally consumable.
As an interim step to local production for local consumption (LP4LC) and to counter Reset measures, let us store as much unperishable food (lots of grains and dried food) as possible. It keeps for years and can be stored by people wo do not have their own gardens. In the medium to longer run, LP4LC may be community based, bypassing supermarkets and food corporations.
The same or similar waste prevails in restaurants. In Switzerland, I was told by restaurant staff, that they risk being fired, if they give left-over food away to the poor, after closing of the restaurants. They must throw it in the garbage.
Imagine! Another horrendous inhumane act of snake-capitalism. That’s what we have to keep in mind and eradiate from our lives. And we will make or own Reset, the People’s RESET.
Introducing The Reset: The Great Reset Docuseries
In episode one of The Great Reset Docuseries, we introduce The Great Reset. We provide the background of the World Economic Forum and its chairman, Klaus Schwab, along with the other global elites who assisted in the birth of the organization.
We explore the organizations that compliment each other, working alongside the WEF to plan and enact a new form of global governance through The Great Reset.
The cabal – Gates and Co., as well as the huge, interconnected global food producers, own ever more ag-production land which eventually allows them to dictate what we are to eat and not to eat. Already in 2019, the WEF declared: “You will be eating replacement (artificial) meats in 20 years.” See this.
There are good health reasons to eat less red meat, but not those fake environmental reasons advanced and propagated by Bill Gates and the Green Agenda.
By those corporate Green Capitalists, who are every year in January for the WEF’s Davos meeting literally congesting the Zurich airport with their private jets – as if this was not enough, they let themselves being flown by helicopter from Zurich to Davos (some 150 km, less than 100 miles) – altogether with this sole event releasing a multiple of CO2 into the atmosphere of what a million cows produce in a year.
The rule of reducing the use of hydrocarbon as “mobility-fuel” does not apply to the elite-cabal.
They know very well that their imposed immobility – through ever-more astronomical fuel prices, taxes, and eventually outright “legal” restrictions – have nothing to do with saving the planet, but only with repression, fear – submission – outright tyranny – and transfer of more monetary resources, assets, from the bottom and the middle to the top.
Once in Davos, the elite preach a fully Green Agenda to the plebs.
They hire Swedish 19-year-old Greta Thunberg, to talk about environmental protection and “shame on you!” – propagating things, she has no clue about. But it sells, because the Soros-et all-paid propaganda, again, is strong enough to persuade those, who are too comfortable to dig for the climate change and environmental truth on their own.
In Conclusion
The name of Our Game, the People’s Game, ought to be a massive waking up into an alternative lifestyle, quite different from what we have been living in western luxury and comfort.
Taking conscience and detach:
From current Government oppression;
From obedience to our lying, manipulating traitor governments; and
Create alternative independent sovereign societies.
Our western national Constitutions have been quietly disabled, suspended, mostly by emergency laws or otherwise by quietly or even clandestinely passed decrees, about which most people have never been informed.
Most western countries are already living in a pre-state of tyranny that steadily tightens the grip around our societies’ necks, depriving us of ever more what otherwise would have been Constitutional Rights – leaving Us, the People, powerless against government oppression.
Immobility of the commons, is what the cabal, the Cult of Darkness wants.
Immobility at will of a global health institution, i.e. WHO, that under a new Pandemic Treaty, still being worked out and negotiated, with planned effectiveness in 2024, may declare worldwide lockdowns, mask wearing, social distancing, work from home, forced vaxxing and much more – thus, overriding national laws.
In other words, WHO, a Rockefeller creation, may soon decide over life and death.
In Henry Kissinger’s infamous words, “Who controls the food supply controls the people; who controls the energy can control whole continents; who controls money can control the world” – and slightly expanded, “Who controls health, decides over life and death.”
Remember:
Increasing fuel prices are planned;
Increasing inflation is planned;
Food shortages, famine, death by hunger – are planned;
Wars and annihilating conflicts are planned;
Massive bankruptcies and consequential misery are planned;
More plandemics, lockdowns and mask-humiliations, are planned;
Supply chain disruptions are planned;
Shortages of everything are planned;
Production interruptions and stoppages of vital industries are planned; and
Much more is planned – and connected.
Be aware - all what disrupts society, reduces population, causes discomfort and misery - and of course, anything that causes fear, reduces physical and psychological resistance.
Electronic Torture + 21st-Century Bio-Hacking And Bio-Robotizing
May 30 2022 | From: ElectronicTorture / Various
Electromagnetic torture, Microwave torture, Electronic murder, Electromagnetic murder, Microwave murder, Organized murder, Cooked alive, Electronic mind control, Electronic mind reading, Brain zapping, People zapper.
What is electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder? In short - "soft kill" techniques to interfere with and kill, by the Cabal and their minions - those who get in their way.
Electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder is about harrasment, torture and murder using electronic weapons based on radio waves.These weapons have been very refined and can cause effects comparable to many illnesses and/or injuries.
These weapons are not science-fiction but used today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.
Mark Rich, known for his website Thehiddenevil has put up a new site with much more background information www.NewWorldWar.org.
Must read for targets and people who are seeking the truth: SurveillanceIssues
What is Electronic Mind Control / Electronic Mind Reading / Brain Zapping / Synthetic Telepathy / Remote Neural Monitoring?
Electronic mind control is about forcing thoughts into your brain using invisible radio waves (this can be done long range). Your attackers can make you think about a certain person at a certain moment, force a song into your brain (so you will start humming / singing it).
Your attackers can also make you stand up and walk to your kitchen. If you do not know about this then you will be just following the thoughts that were planted into your brain. In other words: You are robotized.
Electronic mind reading is about reading your thoughts using invisible radio waves (this can be done from long ranges). Already it has become 'easy' to decode received brain signals into words spoken to oneself without talking.
At the moment they also make progress with decoding images from what you look at (as seen by you through your eyes).
This is not science-fiction but done today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.
Stalking, Electronic Torture, Shooting with Directed Energy Weapons From the Sky
A video and two victims reporting the horrible details. Like many other victims they can only conclude that the attacks also are coming from military aircraft.
Microwave weaponry systems like the Active Denial System are used in tandem to deliver physical attacks designed to stress targets, torture them physically, and turn their homes into places of extreme distress. Hoping to drive the target from their home or workplaces.
The pain is unbelievable. It involves tones, harmonics, hissing, stabs, blows, voice to skull transmissions, induced dreams (nightmares), burning sensations in the body and head, internal burning sensations inside of the body and head, crawling sensations on the body (phantom touch), electronic rape, induced and unwanted urination or orgasms, holographic inserts, and many other horrible tortures. My thoughts seem to be scanned every second. -
(Carolyn Palit) I thought I was dying. I thought that I would spontaneously combust into flames. Either it came from a base in the hills, or Commander Solo*, or it came from the heavens. It attacked me for two years. -
Some of his attacks are coming from the direction of the houses of the defendants that he has named in a law suit against these kinds of attacks. But . . . mostly . . . the attacks come from . . . "straight up."
More Information about Electronic Weapons Attacks, Including Mind Control and Mind Reading
On the STOPEG.com website www.stopeg.com there is an CBS News video of the Active Denial System (ADS), a microwave laser weapon. Although the DoD wants us to believe this is a safe weapon (that is why they showed it to us), experts agree it is not!
This video shows a big installation, but there are many kinds of laser weapons. Some are very big and mounted in trucks, ships, aircraft, or even in satellites. But there are also much smaller, portable versions, that can be very effective.
Of course military and secret services have equipment based on the most advanced technology available. Their equipment is not available to the public. But now advanced commercial devices are being shown on the internet giving an idea of how easy it must be for the attackers to cook, burn (torture) a person.
One is a portable (hand-held) laser, the S3 Spyder III Arctic laser. Although it may appear not very sophisticated, imagine someone pointing this at your back when you are in a restaurant or at the movies. To look at people through wall take a look at the XAVER 400 Compact, Tactical Through-Wall Imaging System.
Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing
Rohinie Bisesar, the strikingly beautiful and accomplished financial services analyst and York University MBA with no previous criminal record was charged with first-degree murder in the sudden stabbing death of a young woman.
While Rohinie Bisesar is considered by mind-control activists in Canada to be a possible victim of neuro-experimentation, the new frontier of absolute human control being covertly explored by military / Intelligence agencies (as per the accounts of victims, scientists, and whistleblowers), for a long while it was not clear to activists whether her defense attorney, David Connally, had indeed conveyed to Ms. Bisesar that there are others in Canada familiar with the symptoms of neuro-experimentation, sympathetic of her situation, and interested in helping her. Read More: 21st-Century Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing in the Case of Rohinie Bisesar: Breakthrough as Defense Attorney Confirms Her Receipt of Letter from Human Rights Activists
Many targets wonder how they can be attacked so easily when they move to a different location, e.g. a family member, friend, or go to a hotel. The attackers stuff their portable laser weapons and through-wall imaging devices into their suitcases, book rooms close to yours, and often will attack you from two different angles to confuse you.
In case you prevent them to attack the body area the want to attack, e.g. by putting your back against an outside wall of the hotel, they call in military aircraft that will blast you with very high power microwave (HPM) bursts, cooking your inside. (this happened several times to me, last time on July 6, 2011, while staying in a hotel in Westkapelle, Netherlands, the aircraft arriving around 1 am about 15 minutes after they concluded they could not perform the attacks on my back).
Many people have a problem thinking that others can read their mind, their thoughts. Again, the advanced technology used by military and secret services is not available to the public, but today more and more commercial devices are becoming available.
One company delivering a mind reading headset is Emotive, for USD 299,-. With this device you can control your games, your tv set, etc. with you mind! They also have an API (programming interface) to create your own mind reading application. Even rudimentary electro-pulse mind reading technologies are publicly reported in the media
I cannot emphasize enough that not all but many attacks are from the sky. When driving your car they may burn your back (from the sky or from some equipment in your own car) when another car is driving behind you and make it go away when the car goes away.
If they do this every time then you probably will think it has to do with the car behind you. When driving your car, walking outside, riding your bike, they may burn your head and make many people you look at scratch their head.
Sometimes people are part of the sick network but many others may just have been beamed the same way you are, having no clue about what is going on (your attackers want you to attack other people, they don't care about anything because they are psychopaths, murderers. child abusers).
Another warning is for a much more confusing type of attack: electronic mind control.
In this case your attackers will plant thoughts into the brain of people surrounding you. Of course these thoughts relate to your life in one way or the other.
They may even plant your (!) thoughts into the heads of people surrounding you. If you do not know about this then you may start to think that these people can read your mind, which can be very depressing. I wrote several article about electronic mind control, if you are a target and do not know about this capabilities you may want to read this.
If you are hearing voices you may be a mental case but it is also possible that you are a target of (highly illegal) mind control activities by some sick bastards.
In your country secret services including military are developing weapons that make you hear voices and covertly testing these weapons on random human beings or groups of people.
Some terms used to describe this phenomenon:
Voice-to-skull
Microwave hearing
Silent sound
Perhaps the most easy (and cheap) way to attack a person this way is by the Audio Spotlight.
This device makes you hear words etc. spoken by a someone, but the persons around you do ot hear this.
Youtube video on AudioSpotlight, Subvocal Speech and Microwave hearing:
Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List
[Published: February 26, 2009. Updated: February 28, 2009, April 11, 2009, June 10, 2009, June 13, 2009, June 25, 2009, September 6, 2009, December 24, 2009]
Almost anybody can become a (temporary) target of these horrible electronic weapons. Please read what can be done so you are prepared. This is not science fiction but happening right now in our 'democratic' society.
Below is a list of all possible attacks by electronic weapons that I know of by experience. I know more attacks exists. Female targets write about sexual attacks, others mention continuous ringing in the ears, etc. I may add these later. I decided to keep this list personal, i.e. in this blog I write down only what has/is being done to me, not what is being done to others.
Electronic Weapons
These attacks are done by the following kind of electronic weapons:
Directed Energy Weapons (laser weapons), like ELF (very low frequency), ultrasonic, lasers, (high power) microwave weapons
Through-wall vision
(Sub-vocal) Mind-reading
Microwave hearing/Silent Sound (letting you hear sounds/things in other ways then hearing by the ear)
On the internet already a lot of symptoms and attacks by these weapons can be found. Most of these lists do not detail these attacks and that is exactly what I am trying to do here. In my opinion it is not enough to read that such a weapon gives you a burning feeling, instead the horrible details must be exposed!
Description of a (continuous) high intensity microwave weapon attack:
This weapon makes your skin really burn like a very heavy sunburn and cooks your inside, you really feel being cooked alive, you are heated like meat in a microwave oven, with intensities that exceed those of a microwave oven.
Gal is coming out of your throat and fluids inside your body evaporate making you instantly burp. In case of high intensity there is also a burning sensation on the other side of the body, where the beam, of approximately 10-30 cm diameter leaves the body.
If they cook you long enough cooked body cells explode inside you, when aimed at your upper body, lung cells explode / are destroyed and reducing lung capacity immediately noticed when walking stairs or running.
The burning sensation and the cooked-inside feeling will go away after 5-30 minutes or 1-2 days depending on the duration and intensity, it may take a day or more to recover from high power microwave bursts with durations of 5-60 seconds (but can you recover from these amounts of irradiation?).
A cup of milk is heated and starts evaporating after 5-10 seconds. The electronic weapons aimed at you can make you burp or fart within 1-3 seconds, hence the intensity of electromagnetic irradiation is not only used to torture a person but murder as well.
Covert and Intended-to-Notice (or Noticed) Electronic Harassment / Torture
Electronic harassment is called covert if the target does not know about these weapons and methods. If you do not know about these weapons you may think you have all the bad luck in the world, you will wonder what strange things are happening to you, to your body, and accept you do not control your life anymore.
If intended-to-notice (or noticed), electronic harassment is torture in its most horrible form. What would you do if your body is made to react every time to events occurring in your life, e.g. by making you burp or fart, your legs are cooked every night, your ankle is cooked during daytime when working behind your computer, your knee is beamed to cause maximum pain, etc.
Some examples:
To delay you:
They make you go the toilet to urinate when you want to leave your house
They cook your legs before running
They burn and cook your body high power to prevent you doing you work
Note that this delaying is often done together with gang stalking methods like cars blocking your road, phone calls when you are to leave your home, etc.
To make things worse:
They make you sneeze extra times when you have a cold
They cook your throat become sore when you have a cold
They attack your eyes until red with blood
The cook your legs after running
They cook or burn where you have pain already
To torture you:
They cook and burn your body everywhere
They cook your family, your children, friends, …
Note that this torture is often done together with gang stalking methods like synchronizing saw machines, honking horns of cars, screaming birds (pigeons, crows), etc.
The Maximum Pain Business, Beyond Imagination Horror and Cruelty Without Evidence
Special methods have been developed to make you think you have a heart problem, erection problem, toothache, etc.
For the ones exposing these horrendous crimes they developed methods to inflict maximum pain, e.g. by cooking such a person alive with a high power microwave weapon, or burning the skin of the target or making the target burp or fart every few minutes to events occurring in the life of the target (including e.g. opening a website on a computer, saving a file, cars passing by the window, etc. ).
Some authors refer to the development and use of these weapons as the pain business. I would like to make a correction, please call it the maximum pain business.
After accepting that there are really such sick and disgusting creatures actually developing and applying these methods and torture, you also have to accept that it is not about just pressing a button, but also about the way how this torture is applied.
Zapping your eyes red to make you look bad, cooking biceps to prevent you from swimming, cooking your throat to prevent you from singing, inducing heart problems and toothaches to prevent you working or sports. More horror, these methods and procedures could not have been highly developed without being tested on humans, on real persons.
And again more horror, these methods are often used with gang stalking (organized stalking) methods.
Like they cook your ankle with insane intensities making your foot very painful, and when you go outside all kinds of people with leg problems are crossing your path, people limping, in a wheelchair, sometimes even someone without a leg.
Or, they start sawing wood somewhere and when the saw enters the wood cook your body with high intensity microwave.
This torture is applied 24/7, not once every hour but more like once every minute/every 5 minutes. Horrible torture that can be called torturing a person to death.
Special Case: The Heart Attack
Damaging your body can be done in several ways. One vital organ is the heart. They can attack the heart very effective with:
Microwave weapons, cooking the heart area slowly
High Power Microwave (HPM) weapons, cooking the heart area in a second
Ultrasonic weapons, pressurizing the heart area
Heart frequency manipulation weapons
These weapons can damage your heart in a split second, you may not survive such a attack, but can also be used to slowly damage your heart. Slowly cook your heart area so will get a strange feeling and in fact your heart is really damaged.
This makes the Heart Attack Gun that the CIA was forced to admit having
look positively archaic: During Senate testimony in 1975 into illegal activities by the CIA, it was revealed that the agency had developed a dart gun capable of causing a heart attack
Then there is also the frequency manipulation attack, your heart may feel pulsing, blobbing like crazy.
Cook heart area from the front, often together with a cook beam from left behind. Slow damage, horrible feeling
Flash your heart with very high power microwave. Instant damage.
Pressurize your chest, even takes your breath away if applied with enough power
Pulsate your body/heart area with low frequencies
These effects will give you a very realistic heart attack or heart problem feeling feeling. Your heart may start pounding very loud, may feel very painful, the heart area may feel strange, cooked.
If applied with enough power, this really damages your heart and heart area. Your heart is cooked like meat in a microwave oven.
Can you recover from these attacks? In general they will not murder you or leave evidence, your heart may feel very painful for several days after they stop their attacks.
It can take weeks until all pain in the area has disappeared. I am not sure about permanent damage caused by these attacks.
Can you die from such an attack? Yes, if the intensity of the beam is high enough your heart can be damaged or temporarily disturbed in such a way that you will die.
How can you recognize a ‘normal’ heart problem from a ‘induced’ heart problem? You yourself are the best judge of what you feel. If you believe something really is wrong with your heart then visit a doctor. If you are certain your heart is attacked then avoid visiting a doctor as this will confirm a heart problem in case you collapse or die, case closed.
Impossible to Protect Yourself
The human body appears to be extremely vulnerable to electromagnetic irradiation of all kind of frequencies. The human body also is a electromagnetic transmitter and sensitive (radio) equipment can pick up and decode the signals that are generated e.g. when speaking, thinking.
In contrast to a knife or a bullet, electromagnetic signals are not blocked by walls, compare your cell phone.
Limited protection is possible using sheet metal, metal plates, water, vacuum, but if you really are a target the attackers increase intensities (if necessary to insane levels), change frequency, attack from different angles etc.
Also remember that these weapons can hit a person without hitting the person sitting next to this person. They can be aimed and the diameter of the beam can be made small enough to hit only the target.
Anybody Can be a Target
Electronic weapons make it very easy to eliminate persons, to get persons (temporarily) out of the way, to murder persons, etc. all without evidence, and most of the time even the target does not know he is zapped, cooked, burned with electronic weapons. The ones owning and controlling this technology now can get everything they want in a very easy way.
They can get their football player into the national team by temporarily cut out the competitor for the same position in the team.
This could be done with other means as well but it is very easy with electronic weapons. Just cook a person’s ankle and foot during the night and the damage is done. To influence a tennis match you could cook a player by heating the body with microwaves (compare microwave oven).
He will just feel overheated and sick and loose the game.
These are just two examples to demonstrate what can be done. You can imagine almost anybody can become a target. Some people because they are more visible then others, because they have something the sick network wants, because they know something the sick network does not want to be exposed, because they are too intelligent for the sick network, ust for personal reasons because may be they made a remark about someone, etc.
The Phoenix Program Continues Today
The Phoenix Program was a program designed, coordinated, and executed by the United States Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), United States special operations forces, US Army intelligence collection units from MACV, special forces operatives from the Australian Army Training Team Vietnam (AATTV), and the Republic of Vietnam's (South Vietnam) security apparatus during the Vietnam War.
The Program was designed to identify and "neutralize" (via infiltration, capture, counter-terrorism, interrogation, and assassination) the infrastructure of the National Liberation Front of South Vietnam (NLF or Viet Cong).
The CIA described it as "a set of programs that sought to attack and destroy the political infrastructure of the Viet Cong". The major two components of the program were Provincial Reconnaissance Units (PRUs) and regional interrogation centers. PRUs would kill or capture suspected NLF members, as well as civilians who were thought to have information on NLF activities.
Many of these people were then taken to interrogation centers where many were allegedly tortured in an attempt to gain intelligence on VC activities in the area. The information extracted at the centers was then given to military commanders, who would use it to task the PRU with further capture and assassination missions.
The program was in operation between 1965 and 1972, and similar efforts existed both before and after that period. By 1972, Phoenix operatives had neutralized 81,740 suspected NLF operatives, informants and supporters, of whom between 26,000 and 41,000 were killed.
Electronic Weapons Can Kill a Person
Besides using electronic weapons to monitor, drive into suicide, cause temporary injuries, they can also be used to kill a person.
Killing is possible by sending wrong signals to the heart making it pulse in abnormal ways, or by increasing intensity and cooking the heart area, damaging the heart slowly. Very high power laser weapons or HPM (= High Power Microwave) weapons can damage your heart in a second.
Although little is known at this time about the effects of long term irradiation, it is not difficult to imagine that this will cause all kinds of diseases as electromagnetic irradiation destroys your DNA (cell with damaged DNA are called cancer). Again all these horrible things can be done, and are done today, without evidence.
How do You Know You are a Target of Electronic Harassment?
It is often very difficult to distinghuish between normal body behaviour and induced body behaviour if there no signs of burning or cooking. For example, would you know the difference between normal diareah and induced diareah?
Yes, you are able to decide what is not normal by comparing your diareah with previous experiences.
It may start and disappear very sudden, may cause other effects like water bubbles leaving your anus, etc. Also, the diareah may be linked to a certain event, like picking up your child, appearance in court, etc.
Always ask yourself what it is you are feeling, did you feel this before? Does it go away when you turn your body 180 degrees? Does it go away when you walk in the streets or drive your car? You are the best judge of what you are feeling.
Your Car May be Tagged
When you are a target you will experience harassment everywhere every time. If you have a car they will tag your car (these are words I learned from a ’so-called target’).
This means they will equip your car with electronic weapons not only to monitor you but also to cook and/or burn your body while driving.
They may also harass the target covert and use the following beams:
Sleep beam, to make the driver very sleepy
Eye beam, slowly cooking they eyes, so tears come out and visibility reduces
Just to confirm, all this is done to cause the (mental or physical) death of the target.
Harassment from (Neighbour) Houses, Cars, Handbags, Airplanes, Satellites
Most of the electronic harassment comes from close neighbor houses. When you walk in the the streets you are probably attacked by electronic weapons (directed energy weapons) from houses (they may be remote controlled or controlled by operator at these locations.
If there are no locations for their equipment, they use these weapons from their cars. You may also be hit from airplanes. This is not difficult to believe if you accept a reach several hundreds of meters. Some targets write about satellites being the source of their electronic harassment. In general I do not believe this is true.
Example of Current State-of-Technology:
You can be hit by very accurate equipment. For example, when you are running on the streets or in the woods you may be ’shot’ with a very high power microwave weapon in your calf from an airplane. The intensity can be such that this causes instant injury.
Your calf is cooked within a split second and your muscles almost instantly tear apart. Making running / walking almost impossible.
Electronic harassment can also be done from small devices carried in e.g. shopping bags in shops or on the street.
You need only a small battery to give the target a single burst that makes him burp or fart. This is enough to depress the target: nowhere safe from this horrible harassment.
Satellites probably play a big role in exchanging information about a target, e.g. you can have a subvocal speech decoding PC in the house next to target, but it is more easy (and safe) to transfer the undecoded information to a central computer system, and return the decoded words. But it may be done on site, PC’s have enough power today to do this decoding themselves.
You May be Attacked by Persons (Family, Friends, co-Workers) Who are Covertly Attacked by Electronic Harassment
The aim of the attackers is to drive the target insane. To speed up things they aim their electronic weapons covertly at family, friends, co-workers, etc. to make them react in several ways to what the target is doing or saying.
Some (easy) methods used to covertly attack other persons:
Scratch beam, to make a person scratch his head
Sneeze beam, to make a person sneeze
Cough beam, to make a person cough
Urge to urinate beam, to make a person go to the toilet
Examples:
They beam persons around the target on the head so everywhere around the target people are scratching their heads
They beam the target’s head very hard and then beam the head of a friend so that this friend will start scratching his head immediately very visible for the target to see
When the target and partner are in the same, then every time the target opens a website on his PC (not visible for the partner), they beam the throat of the partner causing the partner to cough almost immediately
When the target is beamed in the stomach during work, they make a co-worker sneeze at the same time
When the target is beamed in the stomach, they beam her child in the stomach as well, making the child cry and saying it has stomach pain (this is confirmed by multiple victims)
Once again illegal and (beyond imagination) horrible crimes by our national secret services.
Elite and Secret Services Control our Politicians
It is not amazing that these weapons exist, I studied computer science myself, if you have enough money it is not that special. It is also not amazing that there are actually sick and disgusting creatures walking around free applying this kind of electronic harassment to cause the physical or mental death of a person.
What is amazing is that a lot of high ranked politicians and other influential persons are fully aware of the existence and use of these weapons but do not speak out. What does this say about these persons? I believe you can say that the idea we live in a democracy has disappeared completely.
Elite and Secret Services are Trapped by Their Crimes in Vicious Circles of More Violence Against the People of the World
The ones facilitating, outsourcing and performing this cruel electronic harassment and torture is not just a group of people, these attacks are very well designed and applied by people trained to cause maximum pain but leave no evidence.
The ones I am referring to are our secret services, including military. They are tightening their grip on society, not because they have to protect us against the terrorists in the world, but because they are getting more and more afraid what will happen when the truth about them is exposed.
They are trapped in some sort of vicious circle. To maintain themselves they must commit more and more horrible crimes. And to avoid their crimes are exposed they have to perform new horrible crimes, etc. etc.
So here we have the elite, creating wars to maintain themselves, and their armies, the secret services both trapped in their own lies and deceit. And the horror for us, the people of the world is that we will be taken from (created) threat to (created) war because that is the only way out for the (criminal) elite and (criminal) secret services.
People Cookers and Secret Services
I introduced the word people cookers in 2007 for the creatures facilitating, outsourcing, performing electronic harassment and electronic torture. Main reason is of course that people cooking comes closest to what they are doing.
Most of the harassment and torture is done by microwave irration which causes heating of the skin and your inside just like a microwave oven cooks meat.
There are no words to justify these illegal and horrendous crimes. The ones involved are disgusting creatures, an author called them ‘the failed human beings’ and that is just what they are. They were born human, choose the wrong path in life and degenerated into pieces of shit.
I believe people cooking and gang stalking (organized stalking) are the perfect example of how sick our national secret services have become. They now commit the perfect murder, in their language meaning murder without evidence. And they now steal, torture and murder just because it has become so easy to steal, torture and murder.
Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List - December 24, 2009
Below is the list of all (most) effects I experienced from these horrible electronic weapons. Few times I may not correctly describe the source of the effects. It is sometimes difficult to point to microwave or ultrasound.
Both can be very damaging. High Power Microwave cooks your body cells while high power ultrasound simply destroys your body cells. But in the end the result is the same, a damaged body.
MIND-READING
Subvocal speech
Special equipment is used to detect muscle contractions like the ones a person uses when speaking out loud. When spoken to itself these muscle movements can be detected by advanced equipment and translated into words and sentences. As most people talk to themselves when ‘thinking’ this resembles mind reading.
How it is applied
They read your subvocal speech and react to it
Feeling
Unbelievable at first, then you get depressed because the last thing you thought was private appears not to be private anymore. Then you accept that you probably are even more popular and watched then the big stars in the world and sometimes use it to deceive the bastards. Horrible torture
Why it is applied
To drive you insane
Seeing through your eyes
Although some targets claim that they can see what you see. I have not (yet) experienced this. But they do everything to suggest that they can do this. E.g. on the highway you are bursted with the burp beam every time a favorite model car passes in the opposite direction. They are looking at you from some camera build inside your car or from another car. They are looking at your eyes to see what you are looking at. I experienced a few times I was bursted BEFORE I saw the favorite car. A lot of research in this area is going on, I will keep you updated.
HEARING VOICES
Voice-to-skull
Special advanced equipment is used to beam voices, or in fact any sound, into your head.
How it is applied
They make you hear voices that you should not hear. For example, they let you hear voices from people far away very clear as if they are standing next to you. This an amazing experience. There are a lot of reports of people who claim they are attacked by voices
Why it is applied
To drive you insane
HEAD
Top of your head beam
The top of your head is very sensitive. They will burn the top with some laser or microwave weapon
How it is applied
They put the beam on your head and wait for you to move
Feeling
Can be very painfull if applied with enough intensity. You cannot do much with this beam on your head. Horrible torture
After effects
If applied with high intensity it may take several days for the painful feeling to disappear
Why it is applied
Prevent you from working, doing your thing
Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause brain damage, tumors
Scratch beam
They just beam your head somewhere. The normal reaction is your will start scratching your head.
How it is applied
Mostly applied when other people can see you. If they do this everytime with the same people they may wonder whats wrong with you. They also apply this and have random people scratch their heads and then burn you
Feeling
Not very painfull, mostly a short pulse, although they may keep the beam on your head and remove it after you start scratchin your head
Why it is applied
Drive you out of your mind, drive you into attacking other people
Headache beam
This beam gives you a headache. It is some kind of high intensity low frequency beam. The headache appears suddenly and also disapears suddenly
Feeling
Can be very painful
Sickness/Alcohol beam
The feeling is that you feel a little bit dizzy, see thing a little foggy.
How it is applied
They may apply this when you drink your first glass of beer, wine, etc. or when you have a cold, or are sensitive to hay fever
Cooking
They put the microwave beamer on your head and your head is heated. They may do this after you drink a glas of wine, but also after you turn on the central heating of your appartment. You will feel hot, sick, slow.
Ear short burst
Your ear is bursted, the idea is to hit your eardrum. With your eardrum cooked/damaged you have a strange feeling.
Ear continous beam
Your ear is beamed for very long time just to present you pain, they want you to move.
Feeling
It appears your eardrum and surrounding area is very sensitive. This is very painful.
Eye blur
Your eye is bursted and you have instant blurred vision. Often your eye will start tearing
How it is applied
Some kind of miocrowave burst, see also Phasr and other similar military weapons used to blind the enemy
Feeling
Not really painfull but you cannot do much as you are used to two eyes.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from working
Should you worry
Yes, this is very damaging for your eyes
Eye sting
Your eye is bursted with some kind of laser beam
Feeling
Like they drive a needle into your eye. Very painful
Why it is applied
Stress discomfort
Just below eye, tremble
They beam at they area below your eye and the flesh below it starts trembling. They can do this in shops and through wall
Burn (beard) hair
They burn away hair at certain locations, e.g. your moustache hair just below your nose holes to create the illusion of a leaking nose
How it is applied
This is just a laser hair removal procedure, like performed in many beauty parlors
Sneeze burst
You are bursted and must sneeze. This is a tinglin sensation that can make you sneeze in an instant
How it is applied
You can turn your head in the other direction or hold your hand before your nose to make sure the attack is caused by electronic weapons
Why it is applied
To make your body react to something
Runny nose
You have a runny nose but do not have a cold. You may start thinking you have some kind of strange cold but you have not. Once you are out of the beam, the runny nose disappears.
How it is applied
I am not sure if this is done only by electronic weapon or by a combination of some drug and electronic weapon
Cough burst
Your throat is bursted with a high intensity burst and you start coughing instantly. This coughing does not look like normal coughing. You will have a sore throat immediately afterwards.
Dry cough
Like something fluid/moisture sticks in your lungs, or sometimes your throat. When you breath you hear/feel a rasping sound. You must cough very hard to throw it out.
Toothache
Using a low frequency beam they induce a toothache, this really is a horrrible feeling. It is like a true toothache but now when you move out of the beam it disappears.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from doing anything, just plain torture
Sore throat
Your throat is sowly cooked and you will almost immediately notice less volume and after some time pain while speaking
How it is applied
They can do this in just one or two hours by aiming a high power beam at your throat.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from speaking loud, prevent you to sing
Blackout beam
This is very high intensity burst on your head. There is no pain but it feels like the result having been hit on the head very hard. You feel a bit dizzy and your ears are ringing
UPPER BODY
On top of shoulder
A very painfull beam on the top of your shoulder
Why it is applied
Just torture
Cook chest/lungs
I call this beam: through-body-beam. You are really cooked by this beam. If applied with enough intensity you will feel a burning sensation on the back (where it enters), then feel the beam cook your insde, then you start burping, then you feel a burning sensation on the other part of your body where the beam leaves your body
How it is applied
This beam can be applied everywhere, form the house next to yours, from cars. When they beam you outside the intensity often is higher as they want to make sure are hit properly
Feeling
You feel like being microwaved. Very painfull, horrible torture
Cooking
They put the microwave beamer on your body for a long time and you have the feeling you are cooked alive which in effect is a very accurate description of what is being done
Feeling
You feel like being cooked alive, horrible torture
Burp beam
This is a low power sophisticated version of the chest/lungs cook beam. It is difficult to locate the source direction.
How it is applied
It takes approx. 2-3 seconds to make you burp, make your body react to events. They also may apply low intensity, so you get an irresistable urge to burp but cannot
Feeling
Horrible torture
Why it is applied
To make you suffer. This applied sometimes once every five minutes, but sometimes also several times a minute to let your body react to events like cars passing your window, etc. Horrible torture.
Heart attack incl. extra beam from left behind
This is a low frequency high power beam aimed at your heart, mostly from a position somewhere in front of you. To maximze the effect they simultaneously beam you from the left behind position with a microwave cook beam.
How it is applied
As they may apply the from behaind beam for a long period your flesh around the heart area may get cooked and the whole area may feel painfiul and stiff
Feeling
This really gives you the feeling of having a heart problem, and in fact you have! The difference is that this one is applied by murderers. Horrible torture
After effects
It may take several days before you recover (if they stop the beam)
Should you worry
Yes, your heart is vital
Heart attack high power burst
This is a very high power burst of very short duration, 1 second or less, that will give you immediately an extremely painful heart (area). This beam is really amazing: I believe it can kill you in an instant
How it is applied
They can do this through wall anytime
Feeling
Horrible torture
After effects
It may take several days before your body recovers and it all feels normal again
This may be done seperate from other heart attacks. Your heart may start feel pulsing funny, the feeling is very massive, it also feels like bubling, like the heart lost control of normal operation and just pulses somewhat
How it is applied
Not only frightening but also very painful
Pressure beam
They put a pressure beam on your chest this will take your breath away and you may think your are having a heart problem. This can have various intensities
Back burning
They burn the skin of your back. This can be low intensity or high intensity. The feeling is you have a sun burn, in case of high intensities it will also color your back a little red.
How it is applied
This almost instant skin cooking. Refer to ADS (Active Denial System) for details
Why it is applied
Present pain. To move you out of the way, to make you leave the swimming pool, etc.
Electric shower
This is an overwhelming effect. This is like a shower but not with water but with electronic pulses.
Heating
The temperature of your body is increased giving you the feeling you have a flu or some kind of illness.
Spleen beam
Beaming in your side gives you the idea you have spleen pain
How it is applied
They often do this during high intensity sport activities. The idea is to make you belive you have real spleen pain and will stop your exercise
ARMS
Biceps
They cook your biceps to reduce their power , make them feel painful when you load them during e.g. swimming. This may be done to prevent you from doing your sports.
muscle weakening in hand
They beam your hands. The result is that you can not hold a pen between thumb and finger like you used to, also you can not put you fingers against each other (like making a cup with your hand). They may do this to prevent you from working or doing your sports e.g. swimming.
LOWER BODY
Stomach cooking
They put a beam on your stomach and the stomach begins to bubble like something is cooking inside.
How it is applied
They often do this at night.
Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause stomach cancer, tumors
Kidney damage
With some kind of ultrasound beam they attack your kidneys. The feeling is like you have been kicked over and over in your sides. This is like the feeling that is described by patients that have their kidney stones crushed by ultrasound.
Intestines cooking, urge to defecate
They cook your intestines and you feel you have to fart but cannot.
Fart beam
They cook your intestines and it will start bubbling. After some time you will have to fart
blind gut attack
they cook the area around your tail bone. After a short period, depending on the intensity this may take 60 seconds or more, you will feel horrible cramps.
Feeling
This pain makes you crawl on the floor. Horrible torture
After effects
It takes at least one hour before the horrible cramps get a litle less painful.
How to detect
With normal cramps you will have other parts of your body react as well, like heavy sweating. In this case there is just intense pain.
Diarreah
They cook your intestines and you have a very strong feeling to go to the toilet. By continously beaming you have very heavy diarreah
Why it is applied
Keep you out of important events, e.g. A lawsuit where you havve to defend yourself
Erection termination
This beam makes your erection go away, if you are a man of course. This can be done in 20-30 seconds. Depending on the direction of the beam your intestines may start bubbling though not very loud
Urge to urinate
They beam your lower body so you will feel the urge to urinate. It is difficult to ignore and there will come a moment you will have to do this when the beam continues.
UPPER LEGS
Block burst
The feeling is that your movement is blocked. You must take care not to fall or make a strange move
KNEE
Short beams
This will cause pain to your knee
High intensity beaming
The put the beamer on your knee and make sure it stays there for hours. The location may vary ut just above the knee cap can cause a lot of pain. This will result in very much pain and a very sensitive knee.
How it is applied
After a few days your knee hurts a lot when walking. They may apply this also when biking to make you think something is wrong with your knee
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
LOWER LEGS
Calf cooking
They apply low intensity, low power beam to your legs, e.g. When you are in bed. Your muscles, legs feel stif the next morning. They may start cooking the calfs after you finished running, and after some time before you want to go running to prevent you from running
How it is applied
What happens when you increase load on cooked muscles? They tear apart
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
Calf bursting
This beam is in fact a very high power burst and can cook your calf from hundreds of meters in a split second. If you are running your cooked muscles will tear apart and you have instant injury. See also Heart attack high power burst. You may notice the following feeling: a needle going in and out of your calf within a second
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from runningm, other sports
Shin cooking
They cook the skin of your shin with very high intensities. When you are running, the shin injury is a well-known. They may start cooking the skin of of your shin after you finished running, and after some time (days) before you want to go running to prevent you from running
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
Heel muscle
The cook your heel muscle. This muscle does not contain much nerves so it is difficult to detect before the damage has been done. Then you will think back and remember there was something wrong the previous day or days.
Feeling
Walking can be painful.
Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports
Ankle
They cook your ankles, just to cause you pain. You feel the beam and it is difficult to keep your leg in the same position because of the pain. This is often a applied for a long period of time, several hours.
Feeling
Very painful
After effects
May take several days to disappear when applied with high intensities
Foot
They beam very hard in the center of your foot
Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture
Foot insane
They burst the center of your foot with max power very short burst beam, only once while walking even in a crowded place. This causes insane pain and you may fall immediately, because the foot is not functioning anymore.
Feeling
Extremely painful, horrible torture
Toes
They pick a single toe and beam it for several days in a row
Feeling
Painful
Toes insane
They burst your toes with with max power very short burst beam, and do this several times. This causes insane pain.
How it is applied
They may do this while riding your bike, horrible torture
Foot block
Ultrasonic beam to block the movement of a foot. If you are not prepared for this block you may fall.
BODY
Shaking
Your whole body starts shaking like being in a aircraft in bad weather. The frequency is around 5 Hz. The intensity may amaze you.
Scratching
They apply a scratch beam to any part of your body. This beam is very hard to resist. Before you know it you may start scratching yourself like crazy
Feeling
Horrible torture
LEG
Tremble apart
Some high power acoustic beamer is aimed at your leg and after some time your leg feels non-cooperative, not part of your body anymore
MOOD
Sleepy feeling
They beam you with a frequency that makes you really feel sleepy. You will start yawning and cannot keep your eyes open. This efect starts very suddenly and often ends very abrupt.
How it is applied
They may also do this by devices built into your car
Nausea
Not a very pleasant feeling but not veru disturbing or damaging
See the world turning
You feel dizzy and see the world turing like when you are very very tired. This effect is not really very real. The moment you are out-of-the-beam you are not turning anymore. Still it is amazing that this can be done.
fatigue attacks
Force awake
With this well-known beam they will keep you awake, prevent you from sleeping. This way they wear you out, may be the next day you have an important meeting or must finish important work.
Sweating, nauseous, vomit feeling
You start sweating suddenly, you feel dizzy, you think you may have to vomit. When applied with enough intensity you will start to vomit, you will need at least 30 minutes to recover a little bit from this attack, but it will take hours before your body is acting a bit like before the attack.
How it is applied
They may do this when you are with a friend. Google: navy vomit beam
Feeling
Horrible torture
SLEEP
Induce dreams
You have strange dreams about things but the dreams are not like dreams you had before. The dreams may refer to very recent events in your life, like a person you met, a movie yu saw, it is another form of reacting to events in your life
How it is applied
Some people in your environment might tell you they have wild dreams that night trying to get you talking about your experience
The only way to save the world is to stop your national secret services. Breaking laws and violating human rights in horrible ways has become a way of life. They are responsible for most problems in your neighborhood, in your city, in your country, in the world. Make them responsible for what they are doing.
Let them account for in detail, force them to open up their organizations for thorough investigations. Stop their funding if they do not co-operate. Replace directors and staff immediately by normal people for starters.
The Flawed Germ Theory; Unfortunately The Basis Of Modern Medicine
May 29 2022 | From: Tbyil / Various Ever wonder why modern medicine is not helping the populations of the western world to become healthier? Maybe the foundation for health is wrong.
Pasteur's germ theory of disease has helped forward the one germ for one disease concept that has raised Big Pharma to the wealthy business of developing drugs for one germ to purportedly cure one disease while causing autoimmune and chronic diseases to flourish from destroyed immune systems.
Germ phobia, here comes the flu, get your flu shots or you may wind up as one of the 36,000 who manage to die from it each year according to the CDC. It's never more, never less - 36,000 deaths each flu season. Isn't there something fishy about that?
Then get out the antibiotics for every case of the sniffles. Don't forget the pharmaceutical antiviral Tamiflu, expensive, not so effective, and dangerous. The germ theory has turned out to be great for the pharmaceutical business model.
Now we have those nasty mosquitoes carrying the Zika virus, which has no real history of being problematic. So spray everything and everyone with toxic chemicals that do cause disease. And let's not forget those new vaccines. Over a billion dollars of government money has been recently set aside for Zika virus research and vaccines.
Why the Germ Theory is Flawed
The following quote is used by Dr. Robert O. Young in his book Sick and Tired?: Reclaim Your Inner Terrain:
“If I could live my life over again, I would devote it to proving that germs seek their natural habitat - diseased tissue - rather than being the cause of the diseased tissue; e.g., mosquitoes seek the stagnant water, but do not cause the pool to become stagnant.”
- Dr. Rudolph Virchow (Father of Pathology 1821 - 1902)
Pasteur was the original scammer of the germ theory, not considered a worthy scientist by his peers. But he had good press. Media bias and corruption are nothing new.
Other scientists, especially Claude Bernard, claimed the inner terrain, which includes overall and organ specific pH levels and all facets of the immune system countered Pasteur's one germ for one disease theory with claims of pleomorphism within damaged or diseased tissue, which the Medical Mafia and Big Pharma refused to acknowledge.
Pleomorphism was proven when Royal Raymond Rife's universal microscope in the late 1930s revealed structural changes in microbes, up to 16, according their host's environment.
Microbes can start out as benign then alter themselves to survive if one's inner terrain is unhealthy.
In other words, inflammation and tissue degeneration with acidic pH levels attract pathogenic microbes or encourage existing ones into morphing as pathogenic microbes if already present and harmless or even beneficial.
The germ theory hoax is the basis of modern pharmaceutical medicine and killing good food with pasteurization and irradiation.
Not only do our highly acidic junk and processed foods with add sugars promote acidic pH levels under 7.3, so do overworking, stress, and anger.
The combination of our environmental toxic load and inadequate nutrition lead to the stagnant pools within our tissues that become the breeding grounds for existing or new pathogenic microbes to thrive.
Detoxing and seeking fresh whole foods with the proper supplements offer more disease protection from germs than all the vaccines in the world.
Vaccinations offer the following tradeoffs for thwarting germs: Death, lifelong disability, or most commonly autoimmune disease vulnerability.
Haven't you noticed? Autoimmune diseases and allergies have risen with the rise in vaccination schedules.
There have been studies in the USA among Amish children and in Europe among those raised on small dairy farms that demonstrate how being exposed to germs at an early age exercises the immune system and make it stronger, thus rendering natural immunization.
This is where rude, crude, over the top and hilarious George Carlin comes in:
Another Reason to Not Trust the CDC's Fear Mongering
Sharyl Attkinson was the news producer for CBS's Washington Bureau. During the Swine Flu “pandemic” of 2008-9, she was intent at getting to the truth of just how much of an epidemic it really was.
Sharyl, who is now independent with her own website and her book Stonewalled in circulation, questioned the authenticity of the CDC's reportage on incidents of Swine Flu.
After being stonewalled by the CDC with her Freedom of Information (FOI) requests for detailed statistics on the Swine Flu, she and her CBS Washington Bureau news staff did an end around – they went directly to state health departments and discovered only a very few flu cases, mostly single digit numbers, tested positive for Swine Flu.
Those numbers were not nearly enough to justify claims of a level 6 pandemic, considered the most severe and dangerous international pandemic level.
Then the CDC attempted damage control by announcing they had stopped counting because there were millions of Swine Flu cases and they couldn't keep up with it.
Wow, if the first lie doesn't work then tell a bigger one, even if it doesn't make any sense at all. This incident forced Sharyl out of mainstream news. Can't question the CDC on mainstream TV.
You're better off sticking with alternative media and holistic health approaches for establishing a stronger immune system by lessening your toxic chemical load and increasing your nutritional level with organic foods and supplements.
Inflation: The Most Evil Threat = Governments Robbing Their Citizens
May 28 2022 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various Inflation, is an invisible, secret tax that not even 1% of common people understand. It is dangerous and most of the time a fatal disease.
If not under control in time, it can destroy society. No government is willing to accept responsibility for causing inflation. They always find an excuse; such as greedy businessmen, selfish trade unions, spendthrift consumers, Arab sheiks that have raised the price of oil, bad weather, or anything else that seems plausible.
Related: Forgotten History: US Bankers Financing US Enemies - And Why It Is Important Now Although all these can temporarily produce higher prices for individual items; they cannot produce continuing inflation for one very simple reason; None of the above alleged culprits possesses a printing press, to turn out pieces of paper called money; None can legally authorise a bookkeeper to make entries on ledgers that are the equivalent of those pieces of paper.
Over time, the result will be an immensely lower standard of living, resulting from the declining purchasing power and increasing commodity prices. Real wages will be much lower, as employers will not readily increase wages to keep up with inflation.
Under a paper system without backing, the entire monetary system is controlled by the political class, which has the power to allocate capital or to deny it.
This implies that the people heading the world’s capital markets, rather than acting as capital allocators, have become mere speculative marionettes, whose strings are controlled by the well connected and the influential.
Inflation is a printing press phenomenon. The two important basic questions are:
Why do governments increase the quantity of money?
Why do they produce inflation when they understand the potential harm?
If the quantity of goods and services available for purchase – for short-term ‘output’ – were to increase as rapidly as the quantity of money, prices would tend to be stable.
Prices may fall gradually, as more became available, while people keep their wealth in the form of money. Inflation occurs when the quantity of money rises more rapidly than output and the more rapid the rise in the quantity of money, the greater the rate of inflation.
Output is limited by the physical and human resources available, and by the improvement in knowledge and capacity to use them. At best the output can grow only fairly slowly. The same is the case, although always temporarily and for a brief period of time, for money backed by a commodity. While, paper money has no limitation as does commodity-backed money.
Inflation is a Monetary Phenomenon:
In short; Inflation is primarily a monetary phenomenon, produced by a more rapid increase in the quantity of money than in output. Excessive monetary growth produces inflation, caused by governments. – In general, inflation is worse than a financial crisis.
Taxpayers’ money is spent for nothing without reform in sight; Increase in unemployment, as businesses go bankrupt. – Bankers that caused the 2008 financial crisis were bailed out with people’s money and their managers were left in charge who in turn were taking on even more risks with taxpayer’s deposits in order to rake up even larger bonuses.
Eventually these schemes will result in a massive inflation, never witnessed before. The debt is structural; it’s irresolvable, there is no way to repair this economy.
Inflation is Legalised Theft:
Inflation is nothing more than legalised theft by your government; inflation is only two percent, is what the Statistics suggest. But these numbers don’t show the truth. Today’s real inflation rate is probably closer to 9 %, maybe even higher.
Who knows? All published inflation data are a blatant lie, as these numbers are made up to suit the government.
Showing lower inflation in statistics looks better. The theft committed by governments is concealed.
When central banks print reserves far in excess of domestic savings, the result is inevitably inflation. The more they print, the more capital is available forinstitutions – central banks – to invest.
This creates massive asset inflation, in the price of assets, as central bankers buy – bonds, stocks, and real estate – to push economies upwards all around the world. – Instead of triggering an immediate currency flight, as seen in Argentina or Zimbabwe, this inflation has produced an investment-generated boom.
If additional government spending was financed either by taxes or by borrowing from the public, that would not lead to more rapid monetary growth. In this case the government would have more to spend, while the public would have less.
But the easy way out is increasing the quantity of money, because that’s more attractive since the public doesn’t understand the severe implications, and it seems like magic, like getting something for nothing! But the fact of the matter is that the holders of the money pay for the extra spending, as the extra money raises prices when it is injected into the economy.
Moreover, inflation indirectly yields extra revenue by automatically raising effective tax revenues, as income from the people goes up to compensate for inflation, and people are consequently pushed into higher tax rate brackets.
Additionally, there is the benefit of paying off debt with less valuable currency – less purchasing power – as less valuable units are paying for original units that were more valuable.
Reduction of Monetary Growth:
The cure for inflation is the reduction in the rate of monetary growth, as this is the cause of inflation. Eventually it is a curable disease. Although the bad effects – a temporarily lower economic growth, and higher unemployment would be felt first, the good effects – a lower to zero inflation – would come later.
This would result in a healthier economy, with the potential for rapid noninflationary growth.
But as usual there is the lack of a true desire to cure the addiction of free money, resulting in this disease. In a sense people enjoy inflation. Although they would like to see the prices of goods they buy go down, or at least stop going up, they are more than happy to see the prices of the things they own or sell go up.
Inflation is Destructive:
One reason inflation is so destructive is because while some people benefit greatly, other people suffer. Society is divided into winners and losers. The winners regard the good things that happen to them as the natural result of their own foresight, prudence, and initiative.
They regard the bad things; the rise of prices of goods purchased, as caused by forces outside their control. Almost everyone will say they are opposed to inflation.
What they generally mean is that they are opposed to the bad things that have happened to them due to certain effects of inflation.
The paper value of homes is rising. With a mortgage, the interest rate generally is below the rate of inflation. As a result of this, inflation in effect is paying off the mortgage interest payments as well the principal. This effect is an advantage to the home owner, as his equity in the house goes up rapidly. The flip side of the coin is that an interest rate below inflation results in a loss for savers.
As inflation accelerates, rather sooner than later, it is causing so much damage to the fabric of society, by creating so much injustice, and suffering.
The Side-Effects:
Everywhere one looks it is repeatedly published that unemployment and slow growth are cures for inflation; that all alternativemeasures taken will result in more inflation or higher unemployment, which is nonsense. The truth is that slow growth and high unemployment are not cures for inflation. They are the side-effects of a successful cure of a diseased economy.
The general signal of increasing demand will be confused with the specific signals reflecting changes in relative demands.That is why the initial side effect of faster monetary growth is the appearance of prosperity and greater employment.
– When it is discovered that the rise in wages does not coincide with higher demand, the flaw in the system is discovered. Wages and prices are higher not because of higher demand, but primarily to allow for the rises in the pricesof goods they buy.
Subsequently people are off on a price-wage spiral that itself effectively is inflation, and by no means the cause of it. If monetary growth does not speed up faster, the initial stimulus to employment and output will be replaced by the opposite; both will go down in response to the higher prices and wages.
By the way; governments can actually not create jobs, they can only steal from people and give it to others.
If it were politically profitable and feasible to generate a 10% inflation rate, the temptation would be great if inflation indeed reached this level, to raise it to 11, or 12 or 15 %. Zero inflation is a politically feasible objective; 10% is not.
This is the verdict of experience. Nevertheless, central bankers create excessive quantities of money, as they tell us the world needs more inflation to fight deflationary forces, which basically is nonsense as the deflationary forces are the result of the increase of monetary supply.
The Best Solution to Create Inflation:
Moreover, if they want to create inflation, there is no need for excessive money printing. They can create inflation instantly byraising the price of gold, which is the easiest way to create inflation.
A higher dollar price for gold is practically the definition of inflation. The Fed would just declare the price of gold to be, say, $5,000 an ounce and make the price stick using the gold in Fort Knox – assuming it is still there? – Their printing press would maintain a two-way market.
The Fed could sell gold when it hits $5,050 an ounce and buy gold when it hits $4,950 an ounce. That’s a 1% band around the target price of $5,000 an ounce. The band and the use of physical gold would make the target price stick.
A higher price for gold is the same as a lower value for the dollar. The world of $5,000-per-ounce gold also means $10 per gallon gas at the station and $40 for a movie ticket. Nothing happens without consequences.
Santa Claus Doesn’t Exist:
Inflation, in contrast to what economic leaders lead us to believe, is not equivalent to Santa Claus. It can’t bring gifts to everyone. All it does is shift the benefits of the economy around. In the immortal words of President Obama: “inflation spreads the wealth around a little.”
Inflation penalises wage earners, savers, and retirees to the benefit of asset owners. It benefits debtors at the expense of creditors. There’s no net increase in the nation’s wealth. One group is merely taxed for the benefit of the other. This is sold as a benefit to the country by governments. They have to sell it to the people because without inflation they won’t be able to pay their bills.
However, wealth cannot be created by a printing press. This will cause price inflation, asset inflation, credit collapse – or a mixture of all three. Everyone knows this. Nevertheless, our leaders pretend otherwise.
If credit is expanded in excess of savings, it historically always ends in a collapse. So there should be no surprise. When creditors begin to ask the critical question: Can these debts really be financed? Will we get our savings back? If credit has been expanded radically beyond savings, as is the case today in the developed world, the answer is always NO.
It is true that dramatic increases in the money supply eventually lead to inflation. But the key word here is “eventually.” Sometimes it can take a while. The extent of the delay depends on general conditions, and a very important concept known as “monetary velocity.”
Inflation and deflation are not purely products of how much money is in the system. They are products of how fast this moneyis moving through the system.
When banks are lending, businesses are borrowing, and consumers are spending, money changes hands quickly. Under these conditions, the monetary velocity is high.
Conversely, when banks don’t lend the money, businesses are hunkered down, and consumers are saving or paying down debt, money does not change hands quickly. It moves slowly. If the economy grinds to a near halt, as is the case today, eventually money stops changing hands completely.
Inflation is not purely from an increase in the money supply. Sufficient monetary velocity is required to spur a general and persistent increase in the price of goods and services. Without velocity – if money doesn’t move through the system – there is no reason for prices to rise.
The point is that it’s not just about how many units are being printed. It’s about where those units go and how fast they are moving through the system.
The end game may indeed be accelerating monetary velocity.
The cumulative effect on the rise in prices and a spectacular loss of faith in the system will result in a decline in the desire for owning dollars will plummet, and that means hyperinflation.
How Much Money is in Circulation?
Ever wondered how much money exists? This video compares the world’s richest people, the biggest companies, physical currency, the gold market, the stock market, global debt, and more to give you a sense of the quantity of money that actually exists.
Tesla’s Anti-Gravity Research In Use In Dozens Of Secretive Military Projects
May 27 2022 | From: WakingTimes / Various Doctor Richard Boylan, and numerous others have already let the cat out of the bag when it comes to anti-gravity space flight, so why do Boeing and Lockheed, two of America’s largest military industrial contractors, and the recipient of trillions in tax payer ‘black budget’ dollars still hide that they are operating at least 12 anti-gravity aerospace platforms?
It seems that Boeing hides this advanced aerospace technology because it would prove what many free energy enthusiasts have said about Nikola Tesla – that he discovered anti-gravity, and learned how to utilize it as an abundant, if not free, energy source.
Objects can even be levitated easily with anti-gravity, and its numerous applications are just beginning to be understood by the public at large.
The late genius and inventor even explained the fact prior to his death. William R. Lynewrites in Occult Ether Physics (Creatopia Productions), that a lecture Tesla prepared for the Institute of Immigrant Welfare (May. 12, 1938), dealt with his Dynamic Theory of Gravity.
Tesla said in his lecture that he had developed, “one of two far-reaching discoveries, which I worked out in all details in the years 1893 and 1894.”
Indeed, Tesla held a patent in 1928, for a flying machine which resembled both a helicopter and an airplane and is thought to have run with the benefit of anti-gravity.
Boeing has loosely revealed that they have already developed this technology in a veiled admittance that “it is working on experimental anti-gravity projects that could overturn a century of conventional aerospace propulsion technology.”
And Ben Rich, once the CEO of Lockheed Martin, admitted on his deathbed that “aliens were real,” and the “US military already travels to the stars, ”explaining where this technology could have been sourced, aside from terrestrial beings like Tesla.
This means that for more than 130 years we have been kept in the dark about a known free energy source so that the powers-that-be can profit from our ignorance. Every time you see a ‘rocket ship’ go up in space, it is essentially no different from the false flag attempts orchestrated by six media companies controlling the media to alter your perception of reality.
So Where Did All that Research Go?
Theodore C. Loder, PhD, posits in one paper that since the 1950’s (known to some as the brain drain era) almost all research into anti-gravity seems to have disappeared.
None other than Professor Hermann Oberth, considered by some to be one of the fathers of the space age (and who later worked in the US with Wernher von Braun, the Army Ballistic Missile Agency and NASA), stated the following in 1954: “It is my thesis that flying saucers are real and that they are space ships from another solar system.”
Perhaps of more interest to our present discussion on the secrets Boeing and Lockheed have kept, Oberth states:
“They are flying by the means of artificial fields of gravity. . . . They produce high-tension electric charges in order to push the air out of their paths, so it does not start glowing, and strong magnetic fields to influence the ionized air at higher altitudes. First, this would explain their luminosity . . . Secondly, it would explain the noiselessness of UFO flight.”
Indeed, you can see the crumbs of government contractor’s special operatives at work when you look into the work of John Hutchison.
He discovered, “highly-anomalous electromagnetic effect which causes the jellification of metals, spontaneous levitation of common substances, and other effects,” which echo Tesla’s findings. These strange effects were later dubbed the Hutchison effect.
As is usually the case when silencing the curious, a Vancouver businessman, George Hathaway heard of the Hutchison effect around 1980, and hired an engineer from Boeing Aerospace to work with the Canadian government to form a company that would promote technology developed from the effect. They called this company Pharos’ Technology. You likely haven’t heard of what they have created since then.
12 Special Aerospace Platforms Incorporating Anti-Gravity Technology
Dr. Boylan explains:
“At this time, I am aware of the existence of 12 kinds of special-technology advanced aerospace platforms [mil-speak for craft], all incorporating antigravity technology in some form.
These 12 are: the Northrop Grumman B-2 Spirit Stealth Bomber, the F-22 Raptor advanced stealth fighter, and its successor, the F-35 Lightning II advanced stealth fighter; the Aurora, Lockheed-Martin’s X-33A, the Lockheed X-22A two-man antigravity disc fighter, Boeing and Airbus Industries’ Nautilus, the TR3-A Pumpkinseed, the TR3-B Triangle , Northrop’s “Great Pumpkin” disc, Teledyne Ryan Aeronautical’s XH-75D Shark antigravity helicopter, and the Northrop Quantum Teleportation Disc.”
Since at least 1956, the press has been trying to manage public awareness by staying hush-hush about anti-gravity research, or discounting those who attempted to show that it was real. However, a trade press magazine, the Aviation Report, made numerous references to anti-gravity projects, and listed many of the companies pursuing research into anti-gravity technologies.
Quotes from the Aviation Report listed in the Aviation Studies (International) Ltd. report are suggestive of what was truly going on at Boeing, Lockheed and other agencies despite what the public was being told.
What Anti-Gravity Means to the World at Large
Anti-gravity, first and foremost would make petrol-guzzling cars, crumbling electric grids, and other outdated and dirty fuels a total waste of time. Anti-gravity, as Nikola Tesla made clear, would make space flight to other heavenly bodies as simple as driving your car to a nearby city, today.
It would also turn Einstein’s E=MC2 theory on its head, and it also suggests, as Tesla explained, that the ether is given to us to use responsibly by a life-giving creative force.
Fifty Small Ways To Increase Your Happiness May 26 2022 | From: HuffingtonPost / Various
Would you love to get happier but you’re feeling busy or overwhelmed?
Making a few small changes to your daily routine and attitude can add up to positive results for your life and happiness. Here are 50 small ways to increase your happiness.
1. Choose a simple mantra for the day to keep your thoughts positive and empowering (for example: I am enough. Today I choose happiness. I am thankful for the good in my life.)
2. Meditate for 3-5 minutes each day.
3. Switch your jarring morning alarm tone for an inspiring song.
4. Start a gratitude practice by writing down 3 things you are grateful for.
5. Take a few moments each morning to notice the sun has risen and feel appreciation for the new day ahead.
12. Decide how you most want to feel (e.g. free, inspired, abundant, relaxed) and consciously cultivate these feelings in your being as you go about your day.
13. Read a few pages of an inspiring book to feed your mind.
14. Have a short dance break to get you out of your head and back in your body.
15. Write down a list of your current goals and desires and what they mean to you.
16. Perform small acts of kindness and see how amazing it feels to help others.
17. Take a new route or try a new coffee shop or hobby - mixing up your routine can shake you out of autopilot mode and get you back in the present moment where beauty and joy exist.
25. Place your hand on your heart and wish yourself well.
26. End the day by reflecting on everything good that happened.
27. Let your creativity flow through writing, painting or making art.
28. Do something that scares you - tapping into courage is hugely satisfying.
29. Write a list of people and memories you are willing to forgive and let your past pain go.
30. Cultivate an abundance mindset by noticing everything you have in your life - you might have an abundance of freedom, fresh air, food, friends or inspiring ideas.
31. Take small steps towards an important or meaningful goal you have.
32. Ask your soul and the Universe for more miracles and magic in your life.
33. Soak up and savour the simple pleasures - like your morning coffee, sunshine on your back or the comfort of fresh sheets in your bed.
34. Spend a few moments thinking about what a privilege it is to be alive and having an adventure on planet earth — the odds of you being born at this time to your parents are about one in four hundred trillion. You and your life are a miracle.
35. Write a list of your gifts, passions and interests - having clarity on these things can help you bring more meaning into your life.
36. Practice accepting the things you cannot change and spending your energy on the things you can.
37. Believe in yourself a little more by telling yourself often: I can do this. I’ve got this.
38. Feel your feelings instead of numbing them - if you sit and feel what’s going on in your emotional body without adding a mental story, your pain will soon dissolve and you will feel whole because you are reconnecting with yourself.
39. Mentally sending blessings to the people you encounter during your day.
40. Feel gratitude and excitement for your dreams - your appreciation will call them into your life faster.
41. Think of a way to use your gifts today - you have been given them for a reason.
42. Be led by love, not fear. As you make daily decisions, ask yourself: What would love do here?
43. Drop comparison and competing with others for a new goal: being the best you.
44. Decide to be a light of love and inspiration for others. As the poet Rumi wrote: “Be a lamp, or a lifeboat, or a ladder. Help someone’s soul heal. Walk out of your house like a shepherd.”
45. Quiet your mind for a moment and listen to what your soul or intuition is guiding you to do.
46. Surround yourself with people who are positive, loving and bring out your best.
47. Know your values (e.g. connection, creativity, adventure) and incorporate them into your life.
48. Remember your inherent worth and remind yourself often that you are enough.
49. Celebrate the light in others instead of judging them for their human imperfections.
50. Energy flows where attention goes so make a daily commitment to focus on the things you like about yourself and your life - and watch how you flourish as a result.
Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories May 25 2022 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various
Do you smirk when you hear someone question the official stories of Orlando, San Bernardino, Paris or Nice? Do you feel superior to 2,500 architects and engineers, to firefighters, commercial and military pilots, physicists and chemists, and former high government officials who have raised doubts about 9/11?
If so, you reflect the profile of a mind-controlled CIA stooge.
The CIA used its friends in the media to launch a campaign to make suspicion of the Warren Commission report a target of ridicule and hostility. This campaign was “one of the most successful propaganda initiatives of all time.”
So writes political science professor Lance deHaven-Smith, who in his peer-reviewed book, Conspiracy Theory in America, published by the University of Texas Press, tells the story of how the CIA succeeded in creating in the public mind reflexive, automatic, stigmatization of those who challenge government explanations.
This is an extremely important and readable book, one of those rare books with the power to break you out of The Matrix.
Professor deHaven-Smith is able to write this book because the original CIA Dispatch #1035-960, which sets out the CIA plot, was obtained through a Freedom of Information Act request. Apparently, the bureaucracy did not regard a document this old as being of any importance.
The document is marked “Destroy when no longer needed,” but somehow wasn’t. CIA Dispatch #1035-960 is reproduced in the book.
The success that the CIA has had in stigmatizing skepticism of government explanations has made it difficult to investigate State Crimes Against Democracy (SCAD) such as 9/11.
With the public mind programmed to ridicule “conspiracy kooks,” even in the case of suspicious events such as 9/11 the government can destroy evidence, ignore prescribed procedures, delay an investigation, and then form a political committee to put its imprimatur on the official story.
Professor deHaven-Smith notes that in such events as Kennedy’s assassination and 9/11 official police and prosecutorial investigations are never employed.
The event is handed off to a political commission.
Professor deHaven-Smith’s book supports what I have told my readers: the government controls the story from the beginning by having the official explanation ready the moment a SCAD occurs. This makes any other explanation a “conspiracy theory.” This is the way Professor deHaven-Smith puts it:
“A SCAD approach to memes assumes further that the CIA and other possibly participating agencies are formulating memes well in advance of operations, and therefore SCAD memes appear and are popularized very quickly before any competing concepts are on the scene.”
The CIA’s success in controlling public perception of what the Founding Fathers would have regarded as suspicious events involving the government enables those in power positions within government to orchestrate events that serve hidden agendas.
The events of September 11 2001 created the new paradigm of endless war in behalf of a Washington-dominated world.
The CIA’s success in controlling public perceptions has made it impossible to investigate elite political crimes.
Consequently, it is now possible for treason to be official US government policy.
Professor deHaven-Smith’s book will tell you the story of the assassination of President Kennedy by elements of the US military, CIA, and Secret Service. Just as the Warren Commission covered up the State Crime Against Democracy, Professor deHaven-Smith shows why we should doubt the official 9/11 story. And anything else that the government tells us.
Read this book. It is short. It is affordable. It is reality preparation. It will innoculate you against being a dumbshit, insouciant, brainwashed American. I am surprised that the CIA has not purchased the entire print run and burned the books.
Perhaps the CIA feels secure from its success in brainwashing the public and does not believe that American democracy and accountable government can be restored.
The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories
The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented by the CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief of Official Government Stories
Ron Unz reports on the cold shoulder given to an extensively researched book that concludes that World War II hero General George Patton was murdered by the CIA because he became a powerful critic of Washington.
The book was ignored because the US media and public have been programmed to regard the US government as a truth-teller and those who expose government crimes as “conspiracy theorists.”
In 2013 Professor Lance Dehaven-Smith in a peer-reviewed book published by the University of Texas Press showed that the term “conspiracy theory” was developed by the CIA as a means of undercutting critics of the Warren Commission’s report that President Kennedy was killed by Oswald. The use of this term was heavily promoted in the media by the CIA.
It is ironic that the American [Western] left is a major enforcer of the CIA’s strategy to shut up skeptics by branding them conspiracy theorists.
Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe May 24 2022 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various
Every single day we are bombarded with thousands of advertisements, whether we realize it or not.
Being accustomed to their constant presence, we don’t consciously pay attention to them and can’t realize the tremendous negative impact they have on us and the world.
Below are five quite damaging lies that advertisements want you to believe and which you should be aware of so as to avoid falling into their trap.
1. You are incomplete. Advertisements do their best to convince you that you are not enough as you are. Once they achieve to make you feel bad about yourself, they provide you with a solution to make you feel well again: that of buying the products they sell.
2. Everything you need is on sale. Advertisements want to persuade you to think that anything you desire can be bought. Do you want to feel confident? Then buy this shiny car! Do you feel you’re not attractive to the opposite sex? Then get yourselves some hip shoes! Are you stressed? Then consume these magic pills!
3. Material possessions are all that matters in life. Another damaging lie promoted through advertising is that acquiring material things is the key to living well. You needn’t search anywhere else for happiness and fulfillment, such as in pursuing your passions or building healthy relationships with people - there’s always a product that can substitute for all those things.
4. Success is measured by the stuff you own. Advertisements try to fool you into believing that if you have less and worse stuff than those around you, then you are a person to be looked down upon, and that the only way to prove your importance is to get more and better stuff than others.
Thus advertisements are urging you to constantly compare yourself to others and compete with them.
5. Consuming without end is normal. Lastly yet perhaps most importantly, advertisements are trying to convince you that your purpose in life is to consume, and that only by doing so will you fit in society.
As a result, they can immensely complicate your life by stressing you to constantly hunt for the next best thing, regardless of how wasteful that behavior is and the negative consequences it has on the planet.
As you can understand, the sole purpose of advertisements is to sell you stuff so that companies and corporations can make an economic gain, and the tactics they use to achieve that are hideous and deceptive.
The quicker you realize this fact and stop buying into their lies, the more you’ll be able to live free, without feeling the constant pressure to mindlessly waste your time, energy, and the earth’s finite resources to satisfy your artificial needs.
Why The World Should Be Very Concerned About New Zealand Under The Ardern Government& Regulatory Capture In The Age Of COVID May 23 2021 | From: HatchardReport / TheEpochTimes / Various
The New Zealand government relies upon a science body known as Te Punaha Matatini (Centre for Science in Society) whose work is funded directly by the office of the Prime Minister and cabinet.
Recently, Te Punaha Matatini published a 21 page document entitled “The Murmuration of Information Disorders” (see attached release from the Science Media Centre) designating those opposed to the government’s pandemic policies as violent right wing insurrectionists planning the weaponised storming of parliament and the execution of public servants, academics, journalists, politicians, and healthcare workers.
An utterly false characterisation worthy of the worst excesses of historical propaganda.
This 21 page document, represented to the public as a scientific paper, contains not a single discussion of the scientific concerns being raised in opposition to government pandemic policy.
It omits for example analyses of the government’s own official figures which show that the vaccinated are more vulnerable to infection, hospitalisation, and death than the unvaccinated, a fact that has been deliberately hidden from the public.
Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern introduced today’s Te Punaha Matatini report with the words:
"One day it will be our job to try and understand how a group of people could succumb to such wild and dangerous mis- and disinformation.
And while many of us have seen that disinformation and dismissed it as conspiracy theory, a small portion of our society have not only believed it, they have acted upon it in an extreme and violent way that cannot stand.
We have a difficult journey in front of us to address the underlying cause.”
Since when do reasonable scientifically-based questions asked of the government in good faith constitute violent insurrection?
I am tempted to think that Ardern could just as well be talking about her own government.
The Prime Minister and the social scientists(??) working at Te Punaha Matatini might do well to read the New York Times, (although they probably don’t do so because the official policy of the New Zealand government is to discourage any information that is not sanctioned and edited by themselves).
"Emergent BioSolutions, a longtime government contractor hired to produce hundreds of millions of coronavirus vaccine doses, hid evidence of quality control problems from Food and Drug Administration inspectors in February 2021 - six weeks before it alerted federal officials that 15 million doses had been contaminated.”
A reasonable observer might conclude that early (and later) concerns being voiced about vaccine safety were justified, but the New Zealand government is far from reasonable.
A succession of scientific papers published in reputable journals during recent weeks (which we and many others have reported extensively and communicated directly to the government) have in fact fully justified concerns about safety and efficacy, but unbelievably our government is in denial and still moving ahead with propaganda advertising of their mRNA vaccination agenda for all ages and, as today’s Te Punaha Matatini report shows, labelling any opposition as a conspiracy with violent aims.
How Did the Transformation of the New Zealand Government Come About?
New Zealand has a small population of 5 million, but it has been used to trial new products in order to gauge what the public reaction and acceptance might be in bigger markets overseas.
Never more so than during the pandemic. Take up of the Pfizer mRNA Covid vaccination has reached up to 95% of the eligible population.
This has been achieved through a transformation in the style of government, media control, science funding, intellectual standards, and international relations unprecedented in the western world, along with the coercion of draconian employment mandates and the pursuit of dissenters through compliant courts.
This has been engineered under the leadership of a person with a bachelor’s degree in communication who grew up in a strict rural Mormon household and cut her political teeth under the Blair administration in London.
In keeping with her upbringing and education, Ardern is a leader who is sure she is right and is prepared to enforce her orthodoxy against all opposition and reason.
Her international perspective is one of unquestioning acceptance of the authority and right to rule of global institutions. Her top confidant and mentor Helen Clark, former NZ Labour Prime Minister, is closely associated with this outlook.
Ardern recounts that she begins her day with a discussion with Clark over breakfast.
Like Ardern, Clark is renowned for her iron fist management style. She ruffled feathers at the United Nations Development Programme, which she led from 2009 to 2017, reportedly undermining human rights and supporting China’s Belt and Road initiative.
On 9th July 2020 the World Health Organization (WHO) appointed Clark as co-chair of a panel reviewing the WHO’s handling of the COVID-19 pandemic and the response of governments to the outbreak.
The Independent Panel for Pandemic Preparedness and Response (IPPR) examined how the outbreak occurred and how future pandemics can be prevented.
According to the CDC, last year, deaths among Americans aged 18 to 49 were up 40 percent. Even after removing all COVID-19 deaths, the spike remains uncanny. Why is that? And is it related to the U.S. government’s mass vaccination campaign?
We sat down with Dr. Richard Urso, a physician, scientist, and former director of Orbital Oncology at MD Anderson Cancer Center to discuss all things myocarditis, blood clotting, and vaccine injury.
Furthermore, we discussed how the synthetic materials within the mRNA-based vaccines act inside the body, how long spike protein production lasts, what effect it has on health, as well as the cause of athletes around the world dying from heart-related complications.
Nothing says more about the overt global agenda of Ardern and Clark than this May 11th 2022 statement of the New Zealand government:
"The establishment of a pandemic treaty/instrument was a key recommendation of the Independent Panel for Pandemic Preparedness and Response and is one of New Zealand’s foremost global health priorities”
Like China, New Zealand’s fading international reputation for successful management of the pandemic was actually built on a single policy - control the borders, restrict entry, and impose lengthy quarantine.
The Current Situation in New Zealand is Deeply Concerning
Ardern controls the media and the science dialogue through a mixture of government funding and exclusion of dissent.
The government has spent big on saturation advertising advising complete safety and efficacy of the Pfizer vaccine, and continues to do so.
It has instituted funding of cultural groups, GPs, and commercial organisations who promote vaccination. The level of funding is so generous that it has distorted prior long standing economic and political relationships.
So far the government has spent on the order of 100 billion dollars on the pandemic in addition to normal expenditure.
To put this in stark perspective, that is equal to the total annual government budget prior to the pandemic - more than $20,000 for every man, woman, and child.
This is borrowed money which will have to be repaid through increased taxation of an already struggling population.
We Have No Constitution in New Zealand, the Power of the Government Is Absolute
The control that Ardern’s government exercises over the courts, government agencies, parliament, media, independent regulators, and over the vast majority of the population is staggering and rigidly enforced.
Dissenting medical professionals are excluded from practicing and in some cases prosecuted also. They are also mercilessly hounded and vilified by bought mainstream media.
In an atmosphere of strict government control, more worrying aspects of information control have emerged. In some cases noted by my scientific colleagues, policy and pronouncements that they have demonstrated are in conflict with published research have disappeared from the public record.
Even rare court rulings in favour of caution have been rapidly bypassed by simply passing new laws without debate.
Court rulings about mandates have also been openly flouted, as happened when the military vaccine mandate was ruled illegal.
Shocking statistics recently published by the New Zealand Ministry of Health reveal that the vaccinated population in New Zealand account for 73% of all Covid-19 deaths that have occurred in the country since March 2020 up to the 21st April 2022.
With the support of the government, the military said the courts had no jurisdiction over its operation and went ahead anyway.
Ardern has introduced her policies in such a dedicated, persuasive, secretive, and complete way that almost the whole population of New Zealand has complied.
They have accepted limitations on medical choice, judicial protections, human rights, press freedom, freedom of information, privacy, employment conditions and opportunities, standard of living, and social interaction.
Ardern’s successful efforts to persuade the population that government should be your only source of truth, have all but negated any of the longstanding mechanisms of government accountability.
A majority of the population have all but concurred with Ardern that the unvaccinated may be safely blamed for every government failing and omission; and for all Covid case loads, hospitalisations, and deaths contrary to all evidence.
The opposition parties have apparently accepted that they will in future go about their business using the same Ardern doctrines and techniques.
Accordingly they have failed to sound the alarm, investigate Covid science publishing deeply, or oppose draconian legislation. They have joined Ardern in labelling peaceful protest as unacceptable and illegal.
Ardern is about to deploy her international political capital to promote the globalisation of her policies and outlook.
Her public persona can be deceptively mesmerising. You should be worried.
The world’s economy also has no constitution. So far Ardern appears to be happy to allow it to be controlled by global economic predators.
Pfizer has been uncritically promoted by her, and the notion of WHO control over New Zealand’s sovereign rights is being welcomed with open arms. It fits with her strict hierarchical perspective.
Ardern may be viewed by naive foreign governments as a pandemic success story unfairly criticised in her own country.
Stop for a moment and consider that she is about to lend her support to the promotion of a new world order on the global stage using her trademark persuasive techniques of propaganda, coercion, and control of information.
Yet we trusted private-public partnerships to find an optimal solution to a global pandemic, assuming a crisis would bring out the best in historically corrupt institutions.
Here is a brief list of less-than-savory behavior demonstrated by our titans of healthcare:
Pfizer and J&J plead guilty to “misbranding with the intent to defraud or mislead” and paying “kickbacks to health care providers to induce them to prescribe [their] drugs”, resulting in fines of $2.3 billion in 2009 and $2.2 billion in 2013, respectively.
Pfizer settled another lawsuit for “manipulating studies” and “suppressing negative findings” just a few years later.
Gilead Sciences paid $97 million in fines because it “illegally used a non-profit foundation as a conduit to pay the Medicare co-pays for its own drug”.
In 2005, AstraZeneca’s drug Crestor was shown to be linked to a life-threatening muscle disease while the company withheld evidence of this and two dozen other effects from the public.
In 2012, GlaxoSmithKline paid $3 billion in fines as it “failed to include certain safety data” relating to their drug, since labeled to be connected to heart failure and attacks.
This Pandemic Treaty is the Greatest Power Grab Any of Us Have Seen in Our Lifetime
Thankfully our public health guardians are in place to protect us from the greed and deceit of the private sector, right? Wrong. Another brief list:
FDA worked behind the scenes with company Biogen to alter previously conducted trials of their $56,000 per year Alzheimer’s treatment, and “by removing the subset of people for whom the drug didn’t work, they found a slight statistical effect in favor of the drug.” Even after doing this, an advisory committee voted 10-0 against approving the drug. The FDA approved the drug anyways, causing three committee members to resign.
In that case, the third-party advisors did the right thing. This is not always the case… A study by Science Magazinetracking 107 FDA advisors for four years, found that 62% received money from related drug makers with 25% receiving over $100k and 6% receiving over $1 million. It only takes a few corrupt advisors to fix a panel and feign medical consensus.
If you need more proof that the WHO is in China’s pocket, just watch this clip.
In 2017, it was revealed that the CDC Director for Heart Disease and Stroke Prevention had been secretly communicating with Coca-Cola, providing guidance on how “to influence world health authorities on sugar and beverage policy matters”.
As for Fauci and the NIH, I can’t do any better than Dr. Chris Martenson in his video analyzing Fauci’s declassified emails. One thing is clear, the Wuhan research was gain-of-function.
Dr. Zelenko – The [DS] Failed, The Vaccination Agenda Did Not Work, The Cures Are Out There
Dr. Zelenko Board Certified Family Physician with over 20 years experience. Dr. Zelenko was nominated for the Presidential Medal of Freedom and the Nobel Prize , Dr. Zelenko’s team was one of the first in the country to successfully treat thousands of Covid-19 patients in the prehospital setting. Dr. Zelenko developed his now famous “Zelenko Protocol,” which has saved countless lives worldwide.
Dr. Zelenko recommended that President Trump take hydroxychloroquine. Dr. Zelenko begins the conversation by explaining the plan of the [DS], they are still pushing they still want control but they did not get what they wanted the entire population vaccinated, big fail.
So they are pushing this on the people again, but this will fail. The cures have always been right in front of us.
As mentioned above, the WHO failed to warn the world of the magnitude of the threat. Here in the US, our public health ailments are a bit more complex.
These systems are mired in good old-fashioned crony capitalism, fascism, corporatism, mercantilism, protectionism…. fancy words for when private companies work with governments to subvert the forces of competition.
The suppression of research into off-patent drugs is a notable symptom of this problem. While there are countless drugs to which this applies, we will discuss ivermectin.
First, addressing the drug’s dismissal by its own manufacturer, Merck, let it be known that ivermectin is no longer under patent. Merck no longer owns exclusive rights to it’s production.
The forces of competition have been bestowed upon the drug, thus making it far cheaper. Merck is also currently rolling out an oral COVID treatment, which the US government is funding $1.2 billion to research.
This would be under patent and explains their dismissal of ivermectin.
While it’s important to note that ivermectin’s effectiveness is still up for debate, a signal that it could be effective against COVID-19 was discovered in early April 2020 through a study at the University of Monash in Australia.
Given the crisis and ivermectin’s safety, it should have been used immediately in hospitals, so it could have been administered safely and its effectiveness been observed, especially given the fact that there were no recommended treatments at the time, eliminating the possibility of an adverse reaction to another medication.
Instead, a week after the Australian study was published, the FDA advised against ivermectin for COVID-19 treatment, forcing desperate people to the black market and causing them to self-prescribe versions of the drug intended for animals.
This decision surely had nothing to do with the $615 million in lobbying put forth by the health sector in 2020. Would love to see a FOIA on how that money was spent.
The FDA noted subsequently that “additional testing is needed”.
To date, there has not been a single completed, government-funded study on the effectiveness of ivermectin against COVID-19.
Ivermectin is currently being studied in the NIH-funded ACTIV-6 trials, but it took the NIH well over a year since the start of the pandemic to grant the funding.
Meanwhile, they have funneled billions towards research into vaccines and patented treatments.
The NIH funded trials for remdesivir, still under patent with Gilead, despite being less effective and having more severe side effects than ivermectin.
FDA approved remdesivir under EUA despite published trials later stating “remdesivir was not associated with statistically significant clinical benefits”.
As long as a pharma giant stands to profit, it will lobby and our government will be there to provide funding. Hospitals are open to liability when the FDA does not approve a drug for a specific use, making doctors reluctant to prescribe.
Funding randomized controlled trials to convince the FDA is immensely expensive, with the median cost being $19 million to achieve approval.
Given ivermectin is off patent, the only way to raise these funds would be through a government grant or crowdfunding.
The former option is hopeless as we’ve seen. The latter, while difficult, is possible when people can be educated and persuaded.
This brings us to the final culprit, Big Tech. When cities are locked down and it is forbidden to gather in large groups, public discussion must take place primarily online. Crowdfunding requires the freedom to collaborate.
However, discussion of ivermectin has been suppressed across social media:
A Joint Statement, representing 17,000 Physicians and Medical Scientists to End the National Emergency, Restore Scientific Integrity, and Address Crimes Against Humanity.
The time is now. As most readers of this substack are now well aware, this is not just about COVID.
All of this, when we may have had effective treatments as early as April 2020, which our government not only failed to investigate but actively suppressed?
Our healthcare system isn’t just broken – it is actively working against public health interests.
Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Dramatise Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians May 22 2022 | From: NaturalNews / Various
I'm almost rolling with laughter watching all this unfold: Because democrats refuse to face the real threats facing America - Islamic terrorism, debt spending, illegal immigration and job-crushing federal mandates like Obamacare - they have to invent their own fake emergencies to try to win the votes of people who don't have any clue about the real world.
So-called "climate change" - previously known as "global warming" but renamed after the data revealed no warming trend at all - is entirely rooted in false mythologies, official narratives and creative storytelling.
That's precisely why democrats had to hire James Cameron, Arnold Schwarzenegger and Sigourney Weaver to present a climate change scary in a new short film. These are the very same people whose films depict time-traveling Terminator robots, interplanetary aliens with green acid blood, and poltergeists that could be captured with vacuum cleaners (the original "Ghostbusters" movie... the one that didn't suck).
If you believe in time-traveling robots from the future, you might also believe in the climate change narrative, too.
That narrative is based entirely on ridiculous, absurd, make-believe notions such as:
The hilariously ignorant idea that polar bears can't swim (or even that their numbers are plummeting). In truth, polar bears are champion swimmers, and their population numbers are on the rise.
The scientifically illiterate notion that carbon dioxide is bad for the planet. In reality, it's the No. 1 nutrient source of all forests, food crops, herbal plants and green zones across the planet. CO2 reforests deserts and amplifies food production.
It's also impossible for humans alone to raise CO2 levels much at all for the simple reason that plants are starving for it and keep consuming it as fast as we can make it. (This is Botany Science 101.)
The laughably anti-science narrative that says oceans are going to rise so quickly, they'll drown out coastal cities and devastate human civilization. In reality, even during warming periods of Earth's history, oceans barely creep up at the pace of only about 1-2mm per year. That's about 1-2 DECADES for a single inch of ocean level rise. (Yep, not exactly the tidal wave apocalypse depicted in climate change scare films, is it?)
You have hopefully realized by now that everything the democrats invoke in their political campaigning is based on lies. Man made climate change is a cult science myth rooted in a convenient political narrative, not scientific facts.
That's why their climate change scare film had to be made: to stir up the imagination of climate change and make it seem visually real even though it is scientifically false. It sort of reminds me of the original "Reefer Madness" film which was also created as a propaganda political film to scare people away from medical marijuana.
That film was also based on quack science hysteria, just like the climate change films being made today.
Yep, you heard me right: There is no legitimate scientific evidence whatsoever to support their climate change narrative. The data that have been presented to the public are all "corrected" (i.e. fraudulent altered) to artificially insert new "data points" that fit the political narrative we're all being spoon fed by the corrupt democrats.
Remember: The climate changing pushing politicians are all exactly the same people who lie to us all about vaccines, GMOs, fluoride, government debt and antidepressant drugs.
Why on Earth would anyone believe they are magically and selectively telling the truth only about climate change when we all know they are constantly lying about everything else?
The pro climate change position is truly just climate superstition masquerading as science. It should be obvious at this point, but everything the democratic establishment insists is TRUE is almost certainly FALSE.
It states, "Climate alarmists are no different from 16th century Europeans who burned 15,000 witches for 'cooking the weather.' They observe ordinary events, and convince themselves that it is unprecedented and somebody's fault."
"Planetary temperatures have remained largely stable throughout the past several decades, according to new data released by the Remote Sensing Systems (RSS) satellite.
Mean temperatures gauged across multiple measurement platforms including GISS, HadCRUt4, NCDC, UAH and RSS definitively show that the planet has not been warming for nearly 18 years, taking the wind out of the sails of the global warming fallacy.”
"The US government's Global Historical Climate Network reversed the results of temperature recordings to suggest that the temperature was rising through 60 years of research. These recordings were amplified by two official surface records.
The Goddard Institute for Space Studies and the National Climate Data Center amplified surface records to estimate temperatures across entire regions of the Earth where temperatures aren't even recorded. By falsifying records and then amplifying the data, these large data centers misrepresented temperatures records across an entire region of the earth.”
"Now, in what might be the largest scientific fraud ever uncovered, NASA and the NOAA have been caught red-handed altering historical temperature data to produce a "climate change narrative" that defies reality.
We now know that historical temperature data for the continental United States were deliberately altered by NASA and NOAA scientists in a politically-motivated attempt to rewrite history and claim global warming is causing U.S. temperatures to trend upward.
The data actually show that we are in a cooling trend, not a warming trend (see charts below).
This story is starting to break worldwide right now across the media, with The Telegraph now reporting, "NOAA's US Historical Climatology Network (USHCN) has been 'adjusting' its record by replacing real temperatures with data 'fabricated' by computer models."
Because the actual historical temperature record doesn't fit the frenzied, doomsday narrative of global warming being fronted today on the political stage, the data were simply altered using "computer models" and then published as fact.”
And here is the EPA's own chart depicting heat waves throughout U.S. history. Notice that the heat waves were far, far worse in the 1930's than they are today?
How to Counter the Climate Change Narrative With Actual Logic and Real Data
From RealClimateScience.com (go there to see all the graphs and charts that accompany this text):
1) There is no 97% consensus of scientists. In a 2013 survey of the professional members of the American Meteorological Society, only 52% believed that global warming was primarily man-made – much less dangerous. No group in the survey came anywhere close to reaching 97%.
2) Heatwaves are not getting worse. According to the EPA, the worst heatwaves in the US (by far) occurred during the 1930's - when the Midwest commonly saw temperatures over 110 degrees, and as high as 120 degrees.
3) Droughts are not getting worse. According to NOAA, the US has been getting steadily wetter over the past century. In the 1930's, drought covered 80% of the US, as poignantly described by John Steinbeck in "The Grapes of Wrath."
4)Scientists say that California has had much more severe droughts in the past, lasting as long as 200 years. The past 100 years was the wettest century on record in California.
5) Hurricanes are not getting worse. The US is experiencing a record quiet period for hurricanes.
6) According to the Danish Meteorological Institute, the Arctic Ocean is full of thick ice. There is more ice on the Russian side than there has been in years, and a group of global warming sailors are currently blocked by impenetrable ice in the Northeast Passage.
7) Polar Bear populations are not decreasing. (They are steadily rising, year after year.)
8) Sea level has been rising for 20,000 years, since the end of the last ice age. Most of that time much faster than now. It has nothing to do with humans.
9) According to NOAA, sea level is only rising 1.7 to 1.8 mm/year. At that rate, it will take thousands of years for Manhattan to drown.
10) According to NOAA, sea level at Manhattan has been rising at about the same rate (2.8 mm/year) since the 1850's. There is no indication that humans are affecting the rate of sea level rise.
11) Glaciers have been melting for a very long time. In 1879, John Muir (founder of the Sierra Club) found that Alaska's largest glacier had retreated 48 miles since 1794. Twenty thousand years ago, Chicago was buried under a mile of glacial ice.
12) Forest fires are not getting worse over the long term. According to USDA, the US had five times as much burn acreage in the 1930's as we do now. The New York Times confirmed this.
13) Climate models have failed, and greatly over-predict warming.
14) Our most accurate systems for measuring global temperature, satellites, show that this year is no warmer than 1998.
15) NASA shows that global surface temperatures have fallen 0.54 degrees C over the last four months. The largest drop on record in such a short time.
Sites to visit where you can get educated about climate change:
Western Propaganda - So Simple But So Effective May 21 2022 | From: JournalNeo / Various
When some time ago Noam Chomsky and I met at MIT, in order to write a book “On Western Terrorism: From Hiroshima to Drone Warfare” and to produce a film with the same title together, the topic we mainly aimed at discussing was that of the countless genocides the West has committed all over the world since the end of the WWII. The second topic was impunity.
But no matter what atrocities we re-visited, our conversation kept slipping towards one crucial theme: the propaganda that has been manufactured in media centers like New York, Paris, London and other North American and European cities; the propaganda created in order to twist both the past and the present.
Without such brainwashing and the almost total indoctrination of the Western general public and the ‘elites’ in all of the ‘client’ states, no imperialist and neo-colonialist policies would have become truly successful.
We spoke about US commercial advertising and its influence on German Nazi propaganda, and about Nazi propaganda influencing by return both the US and European propaganda-makers.
Noam kept asking me about my childhood in socialist Czechoslovakia, and I explained to him, honestly, how indoctrinated I was as a teenager: not by the Communist dogmas, but by the BBC, the Voice of America and the Radio Free Europe – all of them relentlessly spreading the Western political and market gospel to all corners of the socialist world.
Both Noam and I have created dozens of essays on the topic, as well as several books. My latest one, basically written about all the corners of the world where the Empire is spreading destruction and followed by indoctrination, has more than 800 pages, and is called “Exposing Lies of the Empire”.
And I always feel that even this massive book just touches the tip of the iceberg, that it is only a beginning!
Western propaganda is actually a perfect apparatus! It is effective and it is almost fully ‘bulletproof’. It ‘works’! European empires have been refining it for many long centuries, and the European offspring – the United States – has elevated it to almost total perfection.
One precondition for its success is, of course, that the Western political and economic regime owns almost all the major media channels and distribution outlets of the world.
Diversity can never be tolerated. It could smash the idiocy! Once this prerequisite is completed, things get relatively relaxed and cozy for the demagogues in Washington, London and Paris.
Here is just an example of how easy it is to smear a world leader who resists the imperialist designs of the Empire:
Imagine that one sunny morning, some 10 major newspapers and television stations declare that various anonymous but highly reliable sources in Moscow have informed them that the Russian President Vladimir Putin is a vampire!
This ‘news’ would fly all over the world. Many readers and viewers would at first roll around on the floor laughing, but some would not. And even several of those who found the information thoroughly bizarre and unbelievable would at some point realize that seeds of doubt were beginning to grow inside their brains: “OK, it is absurd, of course, but what if? What if? How awful that would be!”
But how can one really prove that he or she is not a vampire? Or how can one prove that he or she has not been visited by some evil extra-terrestrial flying saucers on several occasions?
At some point, the Russian President would feel that he had enough of the charade. He’d go to the best university clinic in Moscow, and ask for a certificate that clearly stated that he is not a vampire. Several leading academics and doctors would get involved and produce a complex and thorough scientific conclusion, resolutely stating that President Putin is not a vampire.
Shocked by and reacting to the vulgarity demonstrated by the Western propaganda tsars, most of the Russian media outlets would offer some commonsense and logic:
"Can’t we all see clearly that he cannot be a vampire? All his teeth are of approximately equal length, he socialized during the day, he does not sleep in a coffin, he eats garlic and he is not scared of crosses; be they Orthodox, Protestant or Catholic ones!”
Others would argue that there are actually no real vampires inhabiting our Planet.
This is when the Western mass media would go into overdrive. Sarcastically it would declare that the Russian academia, Russian doctors and Russian media cannot be trusted – they are all under the heel of the state, and on top of it they have been infiltrated by nation’s secret services and former KGB agents.
"And doesn’t ‘Vlad’ sound somehow similar to ‘Bran’, which is the castle in Romania, which in turn used to be the home base of the commander-in-chief of all militant vampires - Count Dracula?”
There would still be some rational resistance: “No, ‘Vlad’ does not really sound like ‘Bran’, and anyway, nobody in Russia calls Mr. Putin ‘Vlad’ – only the Western media does.” But such voices of reason would never reach the general public all over the world! And on it goes.
In the end, a few billions of human brains would register and subconsciously store the ‘vampire theory’, and they would never again look at the President of Russia, or at his country, with the same eyes!
Of course the Russian leadership is not the only one that the West is targeting. There is a relentless flow of ‘shocking’ rumors and derogatory remarks made by the mainstream media against the President of China, of Byelorussia, against the leadership of Iran, South Africa, Eritrea, Zimbabwe, Syria, and North Korea as well as against all the left-wing governments of Latin America.
After being repeated hundreds of times, the rumors, at least for many people, get confused with facts, and get accepted as facts.
When still leading Cuba, Fidel Castro was constantly ‘dying’ or ‘disappearing’. The North Korean government has been relentlessly portrayed as a desperate gang of bloodthirsty sexual maniacs, executing and raping all that moves.
The ANC and especially President Zuma have done ‘nothing to close that staggering social divide in South Africa’. In South America, the pro-Western media outlets invented and then perfected a new lucrative industry: manufacturing corruption scandals and implicating in them virtually all of the popular socialist leaders.
Nihilism, darkest ‘news’, and scenarios have been force-fed to the public, in order to eradicate all zeal and optimism that comes when one is building a great independent and egalitarian nation.
"I never forget that day,” an Eritrean cameraman exclaimed, during my visit to his country. “I had just finished an assignment inside the Presidential Palace. Then I met my friends and we were having coffee in front of the main gate. Suddenly the Western networks began broadcasting that ‘there is a coup in Asmara’.
Social media went bananas. It was the “Breaking News” story everywhere. And here we were, right there, on a lazy sunny afternoon, in front of the Palace… I had just seen the President…. All was quiet!
They just invented it, in order to get people out onto the streets! They were trying to manufacture a coup via their media outlets.”
It is mainly fear, implanted into the brains of its subjects and slaves; fear that allows the Empire to control almost the entire Planet. Often it is subconscious fear, but it is fear nevertheless. Fear can be that of the Empire as a whole, or of its might and brutality, or even of the alternatives, portrayed in the most unsavory and frightening colors by the propaganda.
In order to rule unopposed, one has to be feared! And one has to smear the alternatives. The task to spread fear, slander diversity and dissent, was given to the official media, academia and ‘artists’.
Of course the biggest ‘threat’ to the Empire has been the two sisters who were born under the same star, from the same mother called Humanism.
Their names are Communism and Socialism. And I am not only talking about the Western Marxist concept. There are many great concepts that put life and the well-being of the people first, all over the world!
In fact, a few decades ago, it was becoming crystal clear that Western colonialism, imperialism and capitalism were finished. Their time was up! Socialism was the natural and logical way forward for most of humanity.
But then the West and its Empire fought back. They employed extreme violence and brutality, as well as cunning ‘divide and rule’ tactics. Tens of millions died, and progress was stopped, although hopefully, only for a limited period of time. And not everywhere!
One of many reasons why Russia is perceived as a great ‘threat’ is because it inherited the humanist and internationalist foreign policy of the Soviet Union. But, also because it itself is actually becoming socialist again (although it is moving in that direction by taking extremely short steps). Russia is recovering irreversibly from those dark days of the free marketer and West’s lackey, Boris Yeltsin.
Russia is also hated because it is setting the ‘wrong example’; proving to the world that one can develop and prosper without taking orders from the West, without serving its governments and corporations. Or more precisely: it can do it exactly because it broke itself free!
The demonization of Russia is relentless. Every little negative detail is multiplied and magnified by the mainstream media and film industry. The world’s public is being nourished by bizarre stereotypes and fabrications. And so one of the most compassionate, deep, artistic and passionate nations on Earth, Russia, is depicted as being cold, robotic, heartless and inherently evil.
Massive NATO military forces are now dispatched along Russia’s western border, and they include German troops. Periodically there are maneuvers and exercises, not far from the borderline.
It is clearly a provocation, and it all brings back the horrific memories of the years right before World War II, the war in which the Russian nation lost between 25 and 30 million lives. A few hundred kilometers south, an old ally, in fact a Slavic sister, Ukraine, is being forced to confront Russia by its Western handlers, something that is being done against the will of the great majority of the Ukrainian people.
The US is heavily involved in the destabilizing of Central Asia, including a group of nations that used to form part of the Soviet Union. But thanks to Machiavellian Western propaganda, it is actually Russia that is being portrayed as the aggressor and a danger to world peace!
And it is China [CCP], which is being depicted as some kind of a ruthless and unpredictable monster that is now ready to swallow the world!
In fact China is an extremely predictable country, and any unbiased student of world history would clearly see how peacefully it has been behaving, for centuries!
But to ‘prove’ that China is not a Communist country, anymore, and at the same time that it is one of the greatest threats to world peace and ‘stability’ (read: to Western control of the World), is one of the most important tasks given to the Western media, academia and propaganda tsars by the Empire.
And they are succeeding! Indoctrination tactics are working flawlessly. The Western pubic is by now thoroughly brainwashed (at worst) or confused (at best) when it comes to China.
In recent years I engaged hundreds of French, Italian, Spanish, German, British and Czech people in discussions about China, just to receive (with extremely few exceptions) a barrage of standardized, patronizing, mass-produced ‘opinions’.
It often felt like talking to the people who were forced to live for decades under the Taliban or under the ‘spiritual guidance’ of some fundamentalist evangelical Protestant sect.
In fact, China is both Communist (Communism or Socialism, but with Chinese characteristics) as it is breathtakingly successful! Analyzing this marvelous country, together with my China-based colleagues and comrades, I am coming to the conclusion that Beijing often uses “capitalist means in order to achieve socialist goals” (to borrow a quote from Jeff J Brown, which is actually the sub-title’ of his latest book).
And an enormous, independent, successful Communist or Socialist country – that is absolutely the worst nightmare for the Empire! It is something that has to be stopped, derailed, destroyed, isolated and demonized by all means! China’s Communist success…
You would never hear about that on CNN, BBC or Fox TV! Just as you would never hear that Indonesia, India, Rwanda and any of the other Empire’s allies and client nations, are in fact the most brutal fascist ‘failed’ states, and that the genocides in Papua, Kashmir and the Democratic Republic of Congo (DRC) are the bloodiest extermination campaigns anywhere in the world.
I have worked in all these countries, intensively, I can testify. As this is being written, the people of Kashmir are being murdered and tortured. Right at this moment! I am wondering how many of my readers are aware of it?
Perhaps I’m obsessed with “exposing lies of the Empire”. A second volume will soon follow my 820-page long book. I cannot stop travelling, investigating and amassing the evidence. Because I am shocked; because I am outraged and because there are so few, so desperately few people that are actually working in the most desperate parts of the world!
Virtually all stereotypes about the world that have been domesticated in the West are wrong, terribly wrong.
The story of the Russian Revolution is told in the most twisted way, and so is the story of the Ukrainian famine and of the gulags. Not everything is wrong, of course, but the facts and numbers are twisted. I will soon resume my work in the Russian Far East, to write on this subject.
The story of China is grotesquely wrong, from the Great March to the present day!
The story of Cambodia’s “Commie slaughter” under the Khmer Rouge is a thoroughly idiotic manipulation! The slaughter was there, but more people died from the US carpet-bombing, and then from being displaced from their farms by US mines and cluster ‘bombies’, than from Pol Pot’s atrocities.
The great majority of Khmer Rouge men and women had nothing to do with Communism. They were just settling scores with the capital, which they saw as responsible for selling the country to the US, and for the bombing of the countryside. In the jungle, I recently met Pol Pot’s personal guard.
He told me frankly that he was simply pissed off (the bombing killed his relatives), and had no clue what Communism was:
“Pol Pot came and said ‘Communism! Let’s fight the traitors!’ And we did. How could someone call us a Communist country if we did not even know what Communism was?”
What we hardly ever hear is the most important story of mankind: the story of Western colonial plunders, of imposed slavery, genocides that lasted for centuries, of British-triggered famines that killed tens of millions in the Sub-Continent, of virtually the entire Europe and Christianity systematically committing global holocaust.
We are not told that it actually happened, and that it is still going on and on and on! In order to ‘shelter’ the Western public from the horrendous truth about the past and the present of their countries and culture, new and newer stories about those “evil others” are being invented and circulated.
Perhaps, soon, we will be really told that Mr. Putin is a vampire, or that Kim Jong Un is eating Korean virgins for breakfast. We may not be far from such a new wave of propaganda zeal. It all makes sense: the more evil the Empire becomes; the more it has to smear its adversaries.
The mass media and Hollywood are asked to perform. And they do! Reality and fiction are now being systematically mixed, and everything gets blurred and finally the great confusion and intellectual chaos are managing to overwhelm both reason and logic.
The Empire is killing millions and destroying countries and continents. But California is falling off a cliff, and clouds of huge insects are invading the entire North America. While millions of alien terrorists are now engulfing the ‘tolerant’ and ‘democratic’ Europe! So what is more terrible?
Plus there are those sinister monsters like Count Vlad and Comrade Kim, waiting with their daggers behind a corner! Therefore, The Empire and its people have to ‘protect’ themselves. They have to be tough, even tougher than before! And to put their interests first! America (North America) first! Germany first! France first!
Primitive? Does it all sound primitive? Yes, certainly. But it works! At least for the Europeans and North Americans [Westerners] it does. And the rulers don’t give a damn what works or doesn’t for the rest of the Planet.
All The World’s A Cult May 20 2022 | From: ZenGardner / Various
It’s funny how people get all self righteous about not being religious or belonging to some group and condemn anyone who they think is or has been.
Naturally most people attempt to be careful about what they align themselves with, but do we really see what all of society is made up of and what we’ve each unwittingly participated in to varying degrees?
Religions don’t have a corner on the market. Perhaps all of us have been cult-ivated in some way.
Cult-ure is called just that for a reason. It’s pretty blatant nomenclature. Merriam-Webster defines culture as the following:
Simple Definition of culture
The beliefs, customs, arts, etc., of a particular society, group, place, or time
A particular society that has its own beliefs, ways of life, art, etc.
A way of thinking, behaving, or working that exists in a place or organization (such as a business)
That just about includes every societal behavior or activity. So-called cults, the word derived from the Latin colere meaning to cultivate, are mere start-ups of new and old ideas of group conformity for some objective.
In the 60’s these were everywhere as groups and individuals attempted to harvest the spiritual awakening and longings of an entire generation looking for alternatives to the mad military industrial complex-bound world around them.
Some were labeled cults by the orthodox minded, but these included a wide range of groups, organizations, alternative learning centers, spiritual fellowships, institutes, break away churches or other so-called “new religious movements” as they preferred to be called.
And the followers were enthusiastic, the word enthusiastic derived from “spirit, or god within us”. Just about any alternative was deemed good, or at least an effort to break free from the system, so there was a lot of experimentation going on.
Some of those groups still exist today. Many have been absorbed by the New Age amoeba and yet others grew into powerful organizations.
Mind cotroll experimentation was rife at this time as well as the deliberate introduction of mind altering drugs and manipulated music in an effort to scramble society, diffuse dissent, and make it malleable for further indoctrination.
Little did we know. But now we do.
Cults and More Cults
When you finally become awakened and grow detached from this massive matrix ensnaring the world you begin to realize it’s all cults.They’ve simply externalized the idea so we don’t recognize the cults we’re already in.
Cult of the personality for example, where sycophantic adoration towards an individual takes place.
There are the obvious cases as in showbiz and the media and charismatic religious or social leaders, but this is much more prevalent than people would like to realize.
It could be anyone in our lives we’re overly enamored with to the point we relinquish our rational thought.
And even worse, our autonomy and individualism, to the charismatic or domineering authority of another, resulting in great devotion to whatever the object and their eventual unquestioned control and spiritual and even physical abuse.
These are all forms of disempowerment or containment, the symptoms to look out for. I’ve written about religion and belief systems quite a bit in this regard, but few realize how social and spiritual pressures are brought to bear via many seemingly innocuous relationships, especially with groups and even loose associations.
Think about school and all the pressures we felt to conform and survive in that packaging facility. That’s a cult, a carefully structured one with a very clear purpose – entrainment and uniformity.
How about clubs, fraternities and sororities, or the whole sports scene, never mind the military.
The even more obvious examples are business organizations and “work” relationships. Then there are the guys at the bar, or the ladies’ coffee cliques. Speaking of cliques, remember those from your school days? They still exist not only in school environments but in adult social circles.
Then you get to the source – the oc-cult cultivators. They are the ones that set the imprint. They are all avid adherents to cult control of the very worst and most insidious sort. They may seem to act autonomously or as having authority, but they aren’t and they don’t. They’re under heavier control than any of us could imagine.
It’s a blood agreement and they’ve sold their souls to move up the pyramid of control, both in this world and other realms. This is a big subject covered extensively in many books as well as other articles by myself and other researchers.
Cultivating Culture – The Open Hidden Hand
The media, corporations and government have a field day playing on this weakness for group think and the need for acceptance, to the extent they’ve created a society that’s complete mush, with the intent that big corp and the nanny state can be the lead dogs in everyone’s life.
When you think about how many people are glued to the boob-toob today it’s easy to understand why the masses behave as they do, dress as they do, and eat and drug themselves as they do.
It’s learned. And there is a lot of direct as well as implied pressure to fit in, or else you’ll be mocked, marginalized and excluded, to the extent that any seemingly “anti-social” behavior is now considered suspicious and to be reported, the fear of terrorism coursing through their programmed neurons like molten nano metal.
Most of us are aware of these traps and devices, but the vast majority have no idea. They’re swayed like sickened seaweed in an artificially rippled pond of liquified sewage.
Detachment – The Only Way to Live Fully Free
This may sound like some vague concept but it really isn’t. If you’re not invested in their sticky entrapping webbery you can live outside of it. Sure, we all have to interact with this engineered madness but we don’t have to give it our energy and obeisance.
But it will take some sacrifices and dealing with our own shadow work seeing how we’ve succumbed to this in our past.
Each of us have to deal with our own entanglements. Besides religious and belief systems, there are financial interactions with the beast, social obligations we think we have to submit to or endure, or employment entrapments we’d rather have nothing to do with.
Do what you can, but get free, in mind, body and spirit, even if you’re still in it. Some costs will not be comfortable. Old stuck in the mud friends who only bring you down and sap your energy, living or working circumstances that make you curse your situation and absently long for freedom, or how you portray yourself on a daily basis.
This is perhaps the most important. Are we being who we truly are? Do we respond honestly, or has the cult-ure of our micro environment, usually hinged on the macro, force us to compromise our convictions and water down what we know to be true, honest and loving?
Do you like yourself when you’re forced into artificial social situations and to compromise for the sake of momentary convenience? We all face these situations.
These are questions we all ask ourselves, consciously and definitely subconsciously. They need answers. And appropriate action, or inaction, needs to be taken.
The hour is late. It always is when it comes to snapping out of the matrix of deceit. Otherwise it will kill you – spiritually and physically.
Something to think about. Time to bust out of the cult of everything. It’s not the real world, it’s fabricated, and often with our permission and subservient compliance.
Stop empowering it. Break out and change the world by being your authentic self. Wisely and lovingly, and with centered conviction. This is the stand we each need to make.
David Wilcock: The Ascension Mysteries May 19 2022 | From: DivineCosmos / Various
Enjoy our epic two-hour YouTube video investigation into The Ascension Mysteries - Revealing the Cosmic Battle Between Good and Evil! The so-called New World Order consider themselves to be the descendants of extraterrestrial humans who crash-landed to Earth some 55,000 years ago.
They were giants with elongated skulls who set up control systems and "royal bloodlines" all over the earth. They are the "Fallen Angels" from ancient texts. Even after multiple events wiped them out, they are still here. This information is some of the most jealously guarded data in the classified world.
Watch David combine insider testimony with surprising scientific evidence of giants and giant skeletons that were once widely seen on Earth. If all of this story is true - and it does appear to be thanks to multiple insiders' testimonies - it is perhaps the single greatest cover-up in Earth's history.
Even those who are heavily entrained by the mainstream view are finding the final 45 minutes of the video undeniably compelling due to the proof David offers.
Awesome Scope of the Investigation
The video you are about to see racked up nearly 30,000 unique views in just over three days after it launched on August 2nd, 2016.
It is important to note that this is not a video in which David holds back information and says "If you read the book you will find out that (blank.)"
Instead, this is a full presentation from Conscious Life Expo on February 7th, 2015, which directly led to the signing of the book deal for The Ascension Mysteries.
The public response to this information was overwhelmingly positive, despite its incredibly sci-fi implications. The crowd that had lined up to see this event was literally spread throughout five different hallways at the LAX Hilton Hotel that Saturday night.
Cabal symbols appear in various places in sudden and creepy ways, showing the deeper, hidden context of these historical events.
With the testimony of William Tompkins, we now have independent insider verification of Corey Goode's testimony that Nazis cut a deal with negative ETs.
A Gaia episode of Cosmic Disclosure revealed our first introduction to Tompkins, with Wilcock and Goode discussing the implications.
Photographic Evidence
A variety of NASA photos provide indirect verification of a truly awesome story that multiple insiders have revealed to us.
Some of these photos are in the book. Others are not. Still other images were discovered after this presentation and made it into the finished product. Taken together, this is the story of the cosmic history of our solar system.
At the time this was done, David was still missing many elements that now appear in Cosmic Disclosure and in the book, but this is a great starting point.
Giants on Earth
David traces through the story of how a vast intelligent civilization in our solar system ended up living on the surface of Earth's Moon. From there, they suffered awesome attacks that destroyed their habitable zones, forcing a small number of them to crash-land on Earth.
At this point the story becomes much easier to track, with much more evidence behind it. Our research for the book created a variety of wonderful new leads that we had missed in this presentation.
Nor did we understand the difference between the Ancient Builder Race and what we are now calling the Empire at the time this was done. The book contains a "grand summary" of all insider information we have gathered over the years, with particular emphasis on our solar system's cosmic history.
When these refugees arrived on Earth, they were significantly taller than the rest of us, and yet they still managed to survive and spread across the globe.
Undeniable Evidence
The evidence in favor of giants is overwhelming. The final portion of this video is a guided tour through all the best surviving photographic evidence that exists.
You will also see many different excerpts from credible papers like the New York Times, documenting huge discoveries of giant skeletons. In some cases, the skulls are so large you could slip them over your head.
A discovery on Catalina Island, next to Los Angeles, found over 3,000 giant skeletons all in one burial site alone. These skeletons can often be as tall as 11 to 12 feet -- clearly dwarfing any type of humans we now see on earth.
Much of this data ended up being cut from the book, since we had so much to say that we ran out of space by the time we had hit 500 pages. Therefore, this video is a valuable companion piece to the book The Ascension Mysteries.
The Illuminati believe they are the descendants of a half-million-year-old race that had originally colonized much of our solar system. See the original NASA photos of the ruins they left behind in this video!
When they first arrived here, they were giants - 12 to 14 feet tall - and had elongated skulls. They quickly took over the planet and interbred with native humans, creating a red and blonde-haired, blue-eyed, white-skinned race.
This civilization originally found ruins from an "Ancient Builder Race" that was much older. Our latest intel is that the Builder ruins may be over two billion years old, and are usually made out of a transparent aluminum alloy.
This video contains a great deal of data and images of giant skeletons that did not make it into the book due to size constraints. There is also significantly more intel in the book than we had time to cram into this one video -- so the two work very well together as companion pieces.
The footage is from David's first professionally-filmed conference in February 2015, where the material for a possible new book was tested in front of a live audience. The talk went over so well that David and the publisher decided to turn it into The Ascension Mysteries!
Bill Gates And George Soros Fund Monsanto And A World Depopulation Agenda May 18 2022 | From: NaturalNews / Various
Hitler had a depopulation agenda which he kept under wraps, until so many millions of people disappeared that the world started figuring out what was happening.
How many people around the world would have supported him and said they liked the idea of getting rid of all the "undesirables" and blaming them for all the world's problems?
Well, Bill Gates and George Soros are also all about depopulation, but there's no way they're going to come right out and say it ... or has Bill already done so?
What if you found out right now, by video, that Bill Gates, along with his partner in crime, are planning on reducing the world's population by about 5 billion over the next decade, and that they plan on using vaccines and genetically modified food to do so? Here it is.
Westerners underestimate the devastating power of consuming pesticides daily. Sure, most people say they want labels on GMOs, but they're not getting them anytime soon, so now what?
Also, most people believe vaccines are a good idea for combating infectious disease, and two out of every three people get a flu shot yearly, but do they know what the typical ingredients are and what chronic damage they're really doing to their brains and nervous, immune and reproductive systems?
Bill Gates and George Soros know. These two super rich white dudes are not trying to save poor people in Africa, or India or Brazil.
They don't care at all about the health of underprivileged societies, but what they do care about is making sure these folks can't reproduce, and that if they do reproduce, they are creating deformed, severely autistic, cancer-ridden beings that won't reproduce or even lead productive lives, but rather cost their parents all of their earnings and savings just to care for them.
Bill Gates has spoken at a TED conference saying he can reduce the world population by billions using vaccines.
How so? If vaccines supposedly prevent infectious disease, how does that equate to killing off people or keeping them from multiplying? Great question.
South African 'Test and Treat' Mass HIV Experimentation Begins with Funding from Bill Gates
As of 2016, was approximated that 7 million people in South Africa have HIV, with over 300,000 new cases arising every year.
Of those, nearly 200,000 die each year from an AIDS related death, usually because their immune systems are next to non-existent, so anything from a head cold to the flu could drive them into their graves.
What else could "kill off" these "undesirables?" Vaccines that contain known neurotoxins and heavy metal toxins. It's called eugenics, and some tall white guys are running the show.
"Trials" are underway, and Bill Gates, the ultimate population control promoter and self-declared philanthropist, is pumping money into the pharma labs to concoct an AIDS vaccine.
Zika Hoax, Bill Gates' GM Mosquitoes, Mass Media Propaganda Scare, Followed by Mass DNA Vaccination Agenda
The CDC defines DNA vaccines as "purified plasmid preparations containing one or more DNA sequences capable of inducing and/or promoting an immune response against a pathogen," yet there is no proof that this really works as stated, and research shows that when these sequences are injected they can cause "insertional mutagenesis," which means gene and cell mutations can result – and that's also the definition of carcinogenesis, or "cancer."
Care to turn off your tumor suppressor genes? Bill Gates and George Soros would love it if you did. That could help reduce the world population "problem" they are so righteously battling for us.
Could these novel sounding DNA vaccines actually create human tolerance to pathogens instead of immunity? Why would billionaires who support and promote cancer-causing, pesticide-laden GM food support a vaccine that creates immunity?
It wouldn't make sense. That would be like breeding and releasing millions of poisonous snakes while creating and promoting anti-venom inoculation.
Watch out for hoax vaccines that contain neurotoxins. Ask your naturopathic physician if the highly experimental, untested and dangerous Zika, HIV, Ebola, Anthrax, HPV, Swine Flu, MMR and DNA vaccines are "right for you" and your children.
UPDATED: Our Enemies Are The Same People: San Diego Synagogue Shooter Inspired By New Zealand Anti-Muslim Massacre & Parents Catch FBI In Plot To Force Mentally Ill Son To Be A Right Wing Terrorist May 17 2022 | From: TheIntercept / PaulCraigRoberts / TheFreeThoughtProject / Various
Reposted from 2019 with important parallels showing connections between the recent Buffalo NY and 2019 Christchurch NZ shooting events (see below)
Two weeks before a man walked into a Poway, California, synagogue and shot four people, killing one, an arsonist tried to burn down a nearby mosque. The same man likely committed both crimes.
In a 4,000-word manifesto reportedly posted online by the synagogue shooter, a 19-year-old San Diego man named John Earnest, who was taken into custody on suspicion of committing the synagogue killing, claimed responsibility for the mosque arson in the nearby town of Escondido.
He had done the arson in honor, he said, of the mass murderer who had recently
killed 50 Muslim worshippers in New Zealand. “I scorched a mosque in Escondido with gasoline a week after Brenton Tarrant’s sacrifice and they never found shit on me,” he wrote in his manifesto.
The connection between these two crimes screams at us to pay attention.
UPDATED: Recent Buffalo NY Shooting - These Flags Don't False Themselves! This is a must watch / must read: It provides excellent insight into how false-flag shootings are used to further gun control restrictions and other impingements on our freedoms. "In fact if you look closely, whole pages of the manifesto from the Buffaloshhooter was copy and pasted directly from the manifesto of the Christchurch, New Zealand shooter."
"Another glaring symbol used in this shooting brings us to another connection with the Christchurch, New Zealand shooting of 201."
In the past six months there have been three mass shootings at houses of worship in Western countries - two targeting Jews and one targeting Muslims. In each case, the ideology has been the same.
The shooters were driven not just by white supremacy, but by a bigoted conspiracy claiming that white people are being demographically “replaced” by ethnic minorities. Earnest’s manifesto is a stomach-churning blend of anti-Semitism and Islamophobia, with justifications for violence liberally mixed in.
He leaves no ambiguity about who inspired him. “Tarrant was a catalyst for me personally,” he wrote, referring to the New Zealand mosque shooter who left behind a similar manifesto. “He showed me that it could be done.”
For the past several decades, Jews and Muslims living in the West have had the relative luxury of being able to fight with each other over foreign policy to the near exclusion of any other issue.
Those were the halcyon days. Little did we realize that, while we clashed, the ground was slowly giving way under our feet. As my colleague Mehdi Hasan and British journalist Jonathan Freedland have written, both minority groups are today threatened by the emergence of far-right [and far-left] movements utterly hostile to diversity.
If these movements reach critical mass, the outcome of old debates will be moot. History has already shown us where this road leads.
It’s hard to recognize a Golden Age until it’s passed. While there is no shortage of injustices and challenges facing the United States and Europe today, they remain places where people of different races and religions are able to live together with a relative degree of peace and dignity.
At their best, they have allowed different people, like Jews and Muslims, to mix, get to know each other, and even create unique cultures and communities. This kind of diversity is not the historical norm.
And today, it is under grave threat. Each mass shooting - carried out by those who have proven that they are willing to live up to their toxic rhetoric - is another blow against the open societies most of us take for granted, societies that are beginning to crumble.
The horrible shooting of Jewish worshippers at synagogue on the last day of Passover reminded me of the pain I felt following recent far-right massacres of Muslim worshippers at mosques in Quebec City and New Zealand.
The choice of targets in each case was different, but the ultimate goals were the same.
The fact is that anti-Semitism and Islamophobia in the West flow from one source: the quest for ethnic purity. Those who accept one bigotry while thinking they will be safe from the other are living a delusion.
Today, we are reaping the consequences of hatred that has been sown - is still being sown - by powerful demagogues and opportunists. Things are likely to get worse before they get better.
In the aftermath of horrible events like the synagogue shooting in Poway, I’m reminded of my favorite writer, the Jewish-Austrian novelist Stefan Zweig. He was a leading figure in the cultural renaissance of Jewish Vienna, before the rise of Nazism turned the world dark for him.
We should keep Zweig’s story, and his destroyed community, in mind during dark moments like these - not as a sign of what is inevitable, but as reminder of the urgent need to resist these familiar forces with dignity and strength.
The lesson rings especially true in the wake of tragedies like the ones in New Zealand, Pittsburgh, Quebec City, and Poway.
“Even from the abyss of horror in which we try to feel our way today, half-blind, our hearts distraught and shattered,” Zweig wrote in his memoirs, “I look up again and again to the ancient constellations that shone on my childhood, comforting myself with the inherited confidence that, some day, this relapse will appear only an interval in the eternal rhythm of progress onward and upward.”
Parents Catch FBI In Plot To Force Mentally Ill Son To Be A Right Wing Terrorist
The parents of a severely mentally disabled man are speaking out on how the FBI groomed him as a right wing terrorist, knowing he's paranoid schizophrenic.
It’s become a near-weekly occurrence. Somewhere in some state, the FBI will announce that they’ve foiled yet another terrorist plot and saved lives.
However, as the data shows, the majority of these cases involve psychologically diminished patsies who’ve been entirely groomed, armed, and entrapped by FBI agents. Simply put, the FBI manufactures terror threats and then takes credit for stopping them.
While many of these cases have garnered attention and been exposed in the alternative media, a case out of Oklahoma sets a new low for the FBI and exposes how insidious these plots can be.
Through the hundreds of ‘foiled terror plots’ the FBI has ‘busted’ over the years, many of them have been focused on people of Middle Eastern descent or people associated with ISIS or Al Qaeda.
This time, in the case of Jerry Drake Varnell, the 23-year-old diagnosed schizophrenic, accused of attempting to bomb a bank, the FBI fomented terror from a right wing dialogue.
In a June meeting with the agent, according to FBI documents, Varnell described himself as a believer in “Three Percenter” ideology, a right wing group claiming to be committed to standing against and exposing corruption and injustice.
According to federal documents, Varnell drove what he believed was a stolen van containing a 1,000-pound ammonium nitrate bomb on Saturday morning to blow up an Oklahoma City bank. Vile, indeed.
However, if we backtrack just a bit, to when the FBI began grooming their would-be right wing militia terrorist, the vileness comes directly from the government.
“The FBI knew he was schizophrenic,” Varnell’s parents declared on Wednesday in an open letter bravely published by NewsOK.
“Underneath his condition, he is a sweet-hearted person and we are extremely shocked that this event has happened.
However, what truly has us flabbergasted is the fact that the FBI knew he was schizophrenic.
The State of Oklahoma found him mentally incompetent and we, his parents have legal guardianship over him by the Court.
These documents are sealed from the public, which is why no news media outlet has been able to obtain them.
The FBI clearly knew that he was schizophrenic because they have gathered every ounce of information on him.”
Yet they knowingly continued to groom him, despite the clear immoral implications.
When they began grooming him, according to the family, the FBI knew that Varnell was declared mentally unfit to live by himself and that he was a paranoid schizophrenic.
Without their criminal informant and the FBI tactics playing mind games with this vulnerable man, the idea of him committing an act of terror would have likely never materialized.
“What the public should be looking at is the fact that the FBI gave our son the means to make this happen. He has no job, no money, no vehicle, and no driver’s license, due to the fact that he is schizophrenic and we; his parents do everything we can possible to keep him safe and functional...
He has suffered through countless serious full-blown schizophrenic delusional episodes and he has been put in numerous mental hospitals since he was 16 years old.
The FBI came and picked him up from our home, they gave him a vehicle, gave him a fake bomb, and every means to make this happen none of which he had access to on his own."
The parents noted that during the setup, they suspected something was going on and Jerry’s father told the informant to stay away from their son.
However, according to the parents, the informant “continued to sneak onto our residence.
The FBI paid him to continue this operation and I believe they have cleared his criminal record.”
Because they knew Varnell had severe mental disabilities, the FBI should have had stopped their plans to do this and immediately sought an option of hospitalization. However, they pressed on.
Knowing a sane person would likely never attempt to blow up a bank, the FBI deliberately targeted a severely delusional and mentally ill person.
This is wrong on so many levels. Will the next mass murderer they groom come directly from a mental institution?
“The FBI should have filed conspiracy on our son and had him committed to a mental institution.
They should not have aided and abetted a paranoid schizophrenic to commit this act. There are many more facts that I will not make public that will support my son and the disturbing acts made by the FBI.
I realize that many will say my son could have found another person to commit this act.
Yet, any person that has access to the materials and the state of mind necessary to bomb a building would not have any need for a schizophrenic who has no resources to contribute.”
Clifford and Melonie Varnell, Jerry’s parents make a powerful point.
No one - other than the FBI - would’ve attempted to get a schizophrenic man with nothing to contribute to do their bidding as it would most likely be a futile effort - unless you are the FBI looking for an easy patsy to keep fear alive.
David Steele, a 20-year Marine Corps intelligence officer, the second-highest-ranking civilian in the U.S. Marine Corps Intelligence, and former CIA clandestine services case officer, had this to say about these most unscrupulous operations:
“Most terrorists are false flag terrorists, or are created by our own security services.In the United States, every single terrorist incident we have had has been a false flag, or has been an informant pushed on by the FBI.
In fact, we now have citizens taking out restraining orders against FBI informants that are trying to incite terrorism. We’ve become a lunatic asylum.”
Fifty Small Ways To Increase Your Happiness
The World Economic Forum’s “Young Global Leaders”
From current Government oppression;
Davos 2022: The Octogenarian Oligarch Cage Match. Kissinger vs. Soros
The people cookers - cooking people like a microwave oven cooks meat
What is Electronic Mind Control / Electronic Mind Reading / Brain Zapping / Synthetic Telepathy / Remote Neural Monitoring?
Russell Brand on the Impending WHO Pandemic Treaty
1) There is no 97% consensus of scientists. In a 2013 survey of the professional members of the American Meteorological Society, only 52% believed that global warming was primarily man-made – much less dangerous. No group in the survey came anywhere close to reaching 97%.
CURRENT AFFAIRS
Replay: Putin Dismisses 'Stupid' Western Sanctions 'Blitzkrieg' 
1. Gut and Digestive Issues
Meat
The Spanish Flu (1918-19), killed 20-509 million people. Most died due to secondary bacterial infection, as this was before availability of any modern antibiotics. 
10. "
